Home

Epson S5U1C62000A User's Manual

Contents

1. SH 103 o TS TT 18 ncdtusccetnteni T mE Me EE D E EN ber b ca e ene 104 CHAPTERS HEX CONVERTER ensesxeeinsxndi idera ERI I se ER OISEAU dV IUS 105 Bede ATIC ODS TC 105 DE NE TIBI Ec 105 VPN NI NIU T 105 VP NUN T EEOAE 105 Z dU 106 Va MEOS SOIN dpa et REFORM npa HOMER LE Mren is bui e Ru CUbU dM cia HU E 107 ee OR TA UN ote ene De me OREO EE ee eee Mere ee eae men me ee 108 ladd PROX PEC OM UT AIOE c 108 Vi o dntel HEX Format sa necssbuctesnionnctisonisedudetenieacitessncdeueneetectiabustenusecsonnntencdasedennsless 108 fded Motorola S FOTINO ooie erone ENE E EE E EE EEEO 109 TDF CONEIS ON RONIE sra EEE EEE EEE 109 TAO Error Warming JMESSQUES seriene Ei ENEE EiS 110 NE TOE EE A EA E E EE E AE 110 1220 VT vos E E EEEE E E TEE E E 110 VA PCU OVS e AEA IIl 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON V S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CONTENTS CHAPTERS DIASSCHBLER sorie nnr M quU qu 1091 2092000009 UR TAD E PELA SERA E TA OUR SU EE 112 Gd FUC Re 112 Oe AT OU Files E 112 CREAN BI TEUER EROR RN 112 ORA ERUIT Pm 112 VS MEE UII RD A EEEE ES EE 113 AMMESSI eer meT eee 114 ME P RUD ER no See ER ee RET ODE EEE eee PORE ene ae ne eee eee omen EET 115 0 0 Ji TOL Warmin o MOSSOPONS tadeitut eraan E E E p cop cd DN EaE 116 TIO CNN st eect tsetse ann eee et 116 QNPN RM IIT CT y 118 WIE TQUE MB
2. 8 1 f f f f f f f 8 T t another area 144 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER Operating registers The following operations can be performed on registers Table 9 8 3 3 Commands menu items to operate registers Function Command Menu Displaying registers rd View Register Modifying register values rs 1 Displaying registers Register contents can be displayed in the Register or Command window Registers PC A B X Y SP and IDZC flags While the program is being executed the PC address is updated in real time every 0 5 seconds by the on the fly function IDZC 6616 2 Modifying register values The contents of the above registers can be set to any desired value The register values can be directly modified on the Register window Current Code e0 LD A 8x8 Hext Code Fed LD SPH A 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 145 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 8 4 Executing Program The debugger can execute the target program successively or execute instructions one step at a time single stepping Successive execution 1 Types of successive execution There are two types of successive execution available e Successive execution from the current PC e Successive execution from the program start address 0x0100 after resetting the CPU Table 9 8 4 1 C
3. 5 12 Precautions 1 Nesting of the include pseudo instruction is limited to a maximum 10 levels If this limit is sur passed an error will result 2 A maximum of 64 internal branch labels can be specified per macro and maximum 9999 internal branch labels can be expanded within one source file If these limits are exceeded an error will result 3 Other limitations such as the number of sections depend on the free memory space 88 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 6 LINKER CHAPTER 6 LINKER This chapter will describe the functions of the Linker 1k62 6 1 Functions The Linker 1k62 is a software that generates executable object files It provides the following functions e Puts together multiple object modules to create one executable object file e Resolves external reference from one module to another e Relocates relative addresses to absolute addresses Delivers debugging information such as line numbers and symbol information in the object file created after linking e Capable of outputting a link map file symbol file absolute list file and a cross reference file e Automatic page correction function insertion removal correction of the pset instruction for branch instructions 6 2 Input Output Files from Assembler lt b Linker Relocatable ICE command file object file s parameter file ea OS file cm file par Linker Ik62 Link Symbol Absolute Cross Absolu
4. Open button Opens a document source header or project Save button Saves the document in the active Edit window to the file The file will be overwritten Save All button Cut button Cuts the selected text in the Edit window to the clipboard Copy button Copies the selected text in the Edit window to the clipboard Paste button Pastes the text copied on the clipboard to the current cursor position in the Edit window Find button Finds the specified word in the active Edit window Find Next button Finds next target word towards the end of the file Find Previous button Finds next target word towards the beginning of the file Print button Prints the document in the active Edit window Help button Displays a dialog box showing the version of the work bench le ts ss 5s e r9 Li e Io Saves the documents of all Edit windows and the project information to the respective files Build tool bar d Assemble button Assembles the assembly source in the active Edit window Build button Builds the currently opened project using a general make process Rebuild All button Rebuilds the currently opened project Stop Build button iiH Stops the build process being executed Development Tools Build tool bar 44 HEX Convert button HEX Invokes the HEX converter f Disassemble button tt Invokes the disassembler Bu Debug button
5. Gui utility Option Mode Setting menu item When this menu item is selected a dialog box appears allowing selection of the on the fly display option Mode Setting Use the On the fly Display check box for this selection v iOn the fiy Display Break Mode Time or Step Mode Break Enable Real Time Measurement C Break Disable C Step Measurement cence 216 EPSON 5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER tim time or step mode Function This command selects a measurement mode of the execution counter during target program execution by the g go or gr go after reset command Either execution time count mode or step count mode can be selected Format gt tim direct input mode Example gt timd Set step count mode This command toggles the measurement mode gt timd Set real time count mode gt i Note The execution time count mode is set at power on by default Gui utility Option Mode Setting menu item When this menu item is selected a dialog box appears allowing selection of a measurement mode Mode Setting Use the radio buttons for this selection Break Mode Break Enable i Break Disable Time or Step Made Real Time Measurement C Step Measurement 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 217 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 9 19 Self Diagnosis Chk self diagnostic t
6. ce MA ome Os 495006 XSODODU O0G7TrE QxOLOD M eem er See TOs Ox07 3XOTQD cDXOJII X010 Se Heiner Ss Jw O08 UsDODD QDOIT dOXwOIlUD gt c las 0X09 3JOXOSUO dQxDOIT UZUL d eee a los Ux0a Ox0a00 Ox0artr 020100 eee d M A 14 DsOb 3XODOD DXODTTI Ux IUUD c Mm S5 15 Ox0e UxUGDO DUGII US0100 0 eee ce 16r Desc QOeDIOU OXUAFE QEDIUD See IM qm Lie UOS dqoeDSQU Ox efr OXOIQU SS Rem as lor URUTE O20T00 QOxOTrII JODXULOD s Sse 0 me Total 0x19 occupied Oxfe7 blank BSS section map of TEST ABS Index Start End Size Type File SecNbr 1 0x000 0x003 0x004 Abs MAIN S P 23 0x004 OUxTirt SSS ccc crim Total 0x4 occupied Oxffc blank Contents of link map file Index Indicates the index number of the section Page Indicates the page number in which the section is allocated Start Indicates the start address of the section End Indicates the end address of the section Size Indicates the size of the section Pset Indicates the number of pset instructions that are inserted or removed Type Indicates the section type Rel relocatable section and Abs absolute section File Indicates the file names of the linked module SecNbr Indicates the section number Total Indicates the total map size and the unused area size in the Size Pset Type File and SecNbr columns indicate that no section is allocated 96 EPSON 5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBL
7. lt addr4 gt Set PC breakpoint bpc lt addr1 gt lt addr2 gt lt addr4 gt Clear PC breakpoint bd lt addr gt data r w Set data break bdc Clear data break br lt reg gt lt value gt lt reg gt lt value gt Set register break brc Clear register break bm pc addr data opt a b f x y lt value gt Set multiple break bmc Clear multiple break bl Display all break conditions bac Clear all break conditions be Set break enable mode bsyn Set break disable synchronous mode Program display Development Tools u lt addr gt Unassemble display sc lt addr gt Source display m lt addr gt Mix display Symbol information sy lt keyword gt lt keyword gt a List symbols Load file If lt file name gt Load IEEE 695 format absolute object file lo lt file name gt Load Intel HEX format file ROM access rp Load program from ROM vp Verify the contents of ROM with program memory rom 64 128 256 512 Set ROM type Trace tc s m e Set trace condition ta all start1 lt end1 gt lt start4 gt lt end4 gt Set trace area tac start1 lt end1 gt lt start4 gt lt end4 gt Clear trace area tp Display current trace pointer td lt num D gt Display trace information ts pc dr dw lt addr gt Search trace information tf
8. 80 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 7 11 List Control Pseudo Instructions list nolist Instruction format list nolist Function Controls output to the relocatable list file The nolist pseudo instruction stops output to the relocatable list file after it is issued The list pseudo instruction resumes from there the output which was stopped by the nolist pseudo instruction Precaution The assembler delivers relocatable list files only when it is started up with the 1 option specified Therefore these instructions are invalid if the 1 option was not specified 5 7 12 Source Debugging Information Pseudo Instructions stabs stabn Instruction formats 1 stabs File name gt FileName 2 stabn 0 FileEnd 3 stabn Line numbers Linelnfo Function The assembler outputs object files in IEEE 695 format including source debugging information conforming to these instructions This debugging information is necessary to perform debugging by Debugger db62 with the assembly source displayed Format 1 delivers information on the start position of a file Format 2 delivers information on the end position of a file Format 3 delivers information on the line No of an instruction in a source file Insertion of debugging information When the g option is specified as a start option the preprocess stage of the assembler will insert debugging pseudo inst
9. Debugger db62 3 Development Tools Menus Trace menu Trace Area Window menu m Sets or clears program address ranges for tracing REMIS Trace Condition lisse d Sets a trace condition Start Middle End Geena Trace Condition Trace Search Tile Trace Search Searches trace information from the trace memory Dr Trace File Trace File 2 Mix Saves the specified range of the trace information displayed in the Trace 3 Regel window to a file 4 Data 5 Trace Cascade Cascades the opened windows Tile Tiles the opened windows This menu shows the currently opened window names Selecting one activates the window View menu Command Activates the Command window Command Help menu EE Program Unassemble Source Display Mix Mode Data ine a see Opens or activates the Source window and displays the Contents Ege MEME program from the current PC address in the display mode About DbB2 Trace selected from the sub menu items Data Dump v Toolbar Opens or activates the Data window and displays the data memory ee coe contents from the memory start address Register Opens or activates the Register window and displays the current values of the registers Trace Opens or activates the Trace window and displays the trace data sampled in the ICE trace memory Toolbar Shows or hides the toolbar Status Bar Shows or hides the status bar Option menu L
10. File Name specification Program file h hex 4 high order bits l hex 8 low order bits Function option data file f hex Segment option data file s hex Melody data file a hex Not used in some microcomputer models Li Format 1 gt lo file name gt direct input mode 2 gt lo guidance mode File Name file name gt 2 file name File name to be loaded path can also be specified i Examples Format 1 gt lo testl hex l Loads the program files testl hex and testh hex Loading file OK gt Format 2 gt LO e File name tests hexd Loads a segment option file Loading file OK gt Notes e The debugger determines the file type based on the specified file name Therefore the debugger cannot load a file not following to the name specification listed above and an error will result Error File name error e If an error occurs when loading a file portions of the file that have already been read are left as they were loaded Gui utility File Load Option menu item Load Option button When this menu item or button is selected a dialog box appears allowing selection of a hex file to be loaded Load Option button Load Option Look in C3 test EN Files of type Hex Files hex Cancel 196 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 9 12 ROM Access rp ROM program lo
11. Invokes the debugger with the specified ICE parameter file ficse21 CP PAB ICE Parameter pull down list box Er ean eee ein Selects the ICE parameter file for the model being developed In this box ICSE2458P PAR all the ICE parameter files that exist in the Dev62 directory are listed Absolute Object Output Format pull down list box mere Selects an executable object file format Intel Hex The build process will generate an executable object in the format selected Motorola 5 here Window tool bar m Cascade button Cascades the opened Edit windows Tile Horizontally button Tiles the opened Edit window horizontally an Tile Vertically button Tiles the opened Edit window vertically Controls on Edit window ee Insert Into project button Inserts the source file being edited into the current opened project Goto Label pull down list box BOOT Goes to the selected label position LOOP Goto Label Work Bench wb62 3 Menus File menu Hew Open Close Open Workspace Close Workspace Save Save As Save All Print Print Preview Page Setup 1 sub s 2 mai 5 hest epy Exit Ctrl h Ctrl O Ctrl 5 Ctrl F The file names listed in this menu are recently used source and project files Selecting one opens the file Edit menu Undo Ctrl Cut Ctrl Copy Chrl C Paste Ctr Select All Ctrl 4 Find
12. Search Label a 14 0108 e pg ld a 4x8 15 6781 Feu ld sph a 16 8182 eB ld a HWxH 17 0183 FFG ld spl a 18 mun pH poet Hx2 19 8185 4 B8B call HxH 21 Hu186 pH poet Hx2 22 0187 466 Call x Note lel ES xxxx BOOT LOOP sss global INIT RAH BLK subroutine global INC _RAM_BLK1 subroutine org 8x1668 BOOT ld a 5P INIT ADDRS gt 4 Set SP ld sph a ld a SP IHIT ARDDR amp UWxzF ld spl a call INIT RAH_BLK1 initialize Rat LOOP call INC_RAM_BLE1 increment ir el Source codes can be displayed only when an absolute object file that contains source debug informa tion has been loaded Gui utility View Program Mix Mode menu item Mix button When this menu item or button is selected the Source window opens or activates and displays the program from the current PC address Mix button 5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE EPSON 193 CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 9 10 Symbol Information SV symbol list Function This command displays a list of symbols in the Command window Format 1 gt sy a direct input mode 2 gt sy lt keyword gt a direct input mode 3 gt sy lt keyword gt a direct input mode lt keyword gt Search character string ASCII character Condition 0 lt length of keyword lt 32 Examples Format 1 gt sya INC RAM BLK1 206 INIT RAM BLK1 200 RAM BLK1 O B
13. page 5 Starts new absolute CODE section from page 5 bas This section is relocatable not affected by the page pseudo instruction code This section is also relocatable not affected by the page pseudo instruction e If the page pseudo instruction is defined immediately after a section definer code or bss the section definer does not start a new section But page starts a new section with the attribute of the section definer Example code Lhis does not start a new CODE section page 5 his starts an absolute CODE section e If the page pseudo instruction is defined immediately before a section definer code or bss it does not start a new section and makes no effect to the following sections Example code The latest relocatable section definition page 5 This does not start a new absolute section and makes no effect DS8s The another kind BSS of section which is not affected by the previous page pseudo instruction in the CODE section code I his will be an relocatable CODE section not affected by the previous page pseudo instruction 74 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER bank pseudo instruction Instruction format bank Bank number Bank number Absolute bank number specification e Only decimal binary and hexadecimal numbers can be described e The bank number that can be specified is
14. 9 5 2 Key Break Button e This button forcibly breaks execution of the target program This function can be used to cause the program to break when the program has fallen into an endless loop 9 5 3 Load File and Load Option Buttons s Load File button This button reads an object file in the IEEE 695 format into the debugger It performs the same function when the If command is executed Load Option button This button reads a program or optional HEX file in Intel HEX format into the debugger It um performs the same function when the lo command is executed 9 5 4 Source Mix and Unassemble Buttons These buttons open the Source window or switch over the display modes Source button This button switches the display of the Source window to the source mode The Source window opens if it is closed This button performs the same function when the sc command is executed a Unassemble button This button switches the display of the Source window to the unassemble mode The Source window opens if it is closed This button performs the same function when the u command is executed Mix button This button switches the display of the Source window to the mix mode unassemble amp source The Source window opens if it is closed This button performs the same function when the m command is executed 9 5 5 Go Go to Cursor Go from Reset Step Next and Reset Buttons Go
15. Break enable mode default In this mode any break factor can suspend the target program being executed Break disable mode In this mode only the forced break function Key Break button Esc key Break switch and Reset switch can suspend the target program being executed When a break condition that is set by a break command is met during program execution the ICE outputs a SYNC pulse from the SYNC pin but does not suspend the program being executed This function can be used as an oscilloscope synchro nous signal to measure the target circuit timing using the pulse as a reference Table 9 6 5 5 Commands to set ICE break mode Function Command Set break enable mode be Set break disable mode bsyn Note The command breaks control of the trace operation according to the set trace condition If Start or Middle is selected as the trace condition the target program temporarily breaks when the set break condition is met but restarts for sampling trace information The program execution is terminated after the trace information is completely sampled 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 149 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 8 6 Trace Functions The debugger has a function to trace program execution Trace memory and trace information The ICE contains a trace memory When the program executes instructions in the trace range set by a command the trace information on each cycle is taken i
16. File name abs A path can also be specified Absolute object file created by the linker This file must always be specified Text file File name par A path can also be specified File to specify the memory mapping information of each 51C62 Family model This file is supplied in the development tools for each model and is commonly used with the linker debugger and disassembler 7 2 2 Output Files Hex file File format File name Output destination Text file in Intel HEX or Motorola S format Intel HEX format File name gt h hex and File name l hex Motorola S format File name hsa and File name gt lsa Current directory Description Two hex files are generated one h hex or hsa contains the four high order bits of the object codes with 0b0000 extended and the other I hex or 1sa contains the eight low order bits Intel HEX format files are delivered by default Motorola S format files can be specified using the m option Error file File format Text file File name File name err Output destination Current directory Description File that is delivered when the start up option e is specified It records information that the hex converter outputs to the Standard Output stdout such as error messages S5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 105 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 7 HEX CONVERTER 7 3 Starting Method General form of command line hx62 Options Absolu
17. e Although the contents of the unassemble display are modified by rewriting code those of source display remain unchanged Gui utility None 160 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 9 4 Data Memory Operation dd data memory dump Hi Function This command displays the content of the data memory in a 16 words line hexadecimal dump format i Format gt dd lt address1 gt lt address2 gt direct input mode lt address1 gt Start address to display hexadecimal or symbol IEEE 695 format only lt address2 gt End address to display hexadecimal or symbol IEEE 695 format only Condition 0 lt address lt address2 lt last data memory address Display 1 When Data window is opened If both lt address1 gt and lt address2 gt are not defined the Data window is redisplayed beginning with address 0x000 If address1 is defined or even address2 is defined the Data window is redisplayed in such a way that lt address1 gt is displayed at the uppermost line Even when address1 specifies somewhere in 16 addresses line data is displayed beginning with the top of that line For example even though you may have specified address 0x118 for lt address1 gt m o mn on Ga Za Za oU es TS Xe Gm gee G2 eae in Bagge Gn gno o TS Bee Za Z2 G2 Z2 Z2 Ch mn on Gn Zn oZ Ue UeDSOUeQ CQ C9eQCS 75 7 Ce Cm ome Za Za G2 Z2 Z2 data is displ
18. lems 0x200 Other option selections Disable all branch optimizations check box Select this option if PSET insertions deletions and corrections are not necessary Disable insertion of branch extension check box Select this option if PSET insertions are not necessary Output Error log file check box Select this option to generate the error log file of the linker Disable Removal of branch optimization check box Select this option if PSET deletions are not necessary Add source debug information check box Select this option to add the debugging information If this option is not specified the sources cannot be displayed in debugging Output absolute list file check box Select this option to generate the absolute list file Output Map file check box Select this option to generate the link map file Output Symbol file check box Select this option to generate the symbol file Output cross reference file check box Select this option to generate the cross reference file Refer to Chapter 6 Linker for details of the linker options 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 43 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 4 WORK BENCH 4 9 3 Debugger Options Settings COM Port list box Select a COM port of the personal computer used to communicate with zs SUE bps the ICE COM1 is set by default S600 Assembler Linker Debugger Hex Converter bps list box Select a baud rate to communicat
19. or The instructions that begin with are preprocessed pseudo instructions and they are ex panded into forms that can be assembled The expanded results are delivered in the preprocessed file ms The original statements of the pseudo instructions are changed as comments by attaching a nun before delivering to the file The instruction that begins with are used for section and data definitions They are not converted at the preprocessing stage All the pseudo instruction characters are not case sensitive The following pseudo instructions are available in the assembler Pseudo instruction include define macro endm ifdef else endif ifndef else endif align Org page bank code bss codeword comm comm global set list nolist stabs stabn Function Includes another source Defines a constant string Defines a macro Defines an assemble condition Defines an assemble condition Sets alignment of a section Sets an absolute address Sets a page number Sets a bank number Declares a CODE section mapping to the built in ROM Declares a BSS section mapping to the built in RAM Defines data in the CODE section Secures a global area in the BSS section Secures a local area in the BSS section Defines an external reference symbol Defines an absolute address symbol Controls assembly list output Controls assembly list output Debugging informa
20. Load Option Exit Load File Reads an object file in the IEEE 695 format into the debugger Load Option Reads a program or optional HEX file in Intel HEX format into the debugger Exit Terminates the debugger Run menu hn Go ta Cursor Go from Reset Step Next Command File Reset CPU Break menu Break Breakpoint Set Data Break Register Break Multiple Break Break All Clear Go Executes the target program from the address indicated by the current PC Go to Cursor Executes the target program from the address indicated by the current PC to the cursor position in the Source window Go from Reset This menu item resets the CPU and then executes the target program from the program start address 0x100 Step Executes one instruction step at the address indicated by the current PC Next Executes one instruction step at the address indicated by the current PC The call and calz instructions and their subroutines are executed as one step Command File Reads a command file and executes the debug commands written in that file Reset CPU Resets the CPU Breakpoint Set Displays sets or clears PC breakpoints Data Break Displays sets or clears data break conditions Register Break Displays sets or clears register break conditions Multiple Break Displays sets or clears multiple break conditions Break All Clear Clears all break conditions
21. Step Other pages Page 15 0x0 Program area Oxff Maximum configulation 12 bits S1C6200 Core CPU Registers Flags 3 0 Program counter F fFlagregister D Z C EE I Interrupt flag 1 Enabled 0 Disabled Index register X D Decimal flag 1 Decimal adjustment on 0 Decimal adjustment off Z Zero flag 1 Zero 0 Non zero C Carry flag 1 Carry borrow 0 No carry Index register Y SP Stack pointer A Data register A Data register B Instruction List 1 Symbols in the Instruction List Registers Register Data A B X XP XH XL Ys YP YH YL F SP SPH SPL NBP NPP PCB PCP PCS PCSH PCSL Data register A or its contents 4 bits Data register B or its contents 4 bits Register XHL or its contents 8 low order bits of the IX register Register XP or its contents 4 high order bits of the IX register Register XH or its contents 4 high order bits of the XHL register Register XL or its contents 4 low order bits of the XHL register Register YHL or its contents 8 low order bits of the IY register Register YP or its contents 4 high order bits of the IY register Register YH or its contents 4 high order bits of the YHL register Register YL or its contents 4 low order bits of the YHL register Flag register F or its contents 4 bits Stack pointer SP or its contents 8 bits Stack pointer SPH or its contents 4 high order bits of the stack po
22. lt address1 gt lt address2 gt direct input mode address1 Start address hexadecimal or symbol IEEE 695 format only lt address2 gt End address hexadecimal or symbol IEEE 695 format only Condition 0 address lt address2 lt last program memory address il Example ev 100 Jit Displays the executed addresses within the range from 0x100 to Ox 1f Coverage Information Bs 0100 006 gt Notes e The addresses specified here must be within the range of the program memory area available with each microcomputer model An error results if the input one is not a hexadecimal number or a valid symbol Error invalid value An error results if the limit is exceeded Error Program address out of range e If the cv command is input without lt address1 gt and lt address2 gt coverage information in all address is displayed if both lt address1 gt and lt address2 gt are specified coverage information within the specified address range is displayed if just lt address1 gt is specified the end address is treated as the maximum program address and coverage information within that range is displayed Gui utility None 210 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER CVC coverage clear Function This command clears the coverage information Li Format gt CVC 1 direct input mode GUI utility None 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 211 S1C60
23. lt num1 D gt lt num2 D gt file name gt Save trace information into file Others cv lt addr1 gt lt addr2 gt Display coverage information cvc Clear coverage information com lt file name gt lt interval D gt Load amp execute command file rec lt file name gt Record commands to a command file log lt file name gt Turn log output on or off ma Display map information otf Turn on the fly display on or off tim Set time or step measurement mode chk Report results of ICE self diagnostic test q Quit debugger The parameters with D should be specified with a decimal number For other parameters hexadecimal numbers can only be used A symbol can be used to specify an address as follows lt global symbol gt or lt local symbol gt lt source file name gt Development Tools Debugger db62 5 Debugger Messages ICE errors Error communication error There is a probrem in communication between Host and ICE Error ID not match ICE protocol ID error Error ROM sum check error ICE62 firmware ROM sum erro found during self diagnostic test Error RAM check error ICE62 firmware RAM error found during self diagnostic test Error undefined code detected ICE status Status break hit Some undefined code is detected when loading file A breakpoint is met when executing a program Status break switch pus
24. options Otherwise an error will occur in the mask data checker Refer to the development Tool manual of each model for details of the mask data checker 2 The ICE and Evaluation Board support 4 types of ROMs 2764 27128 27256 and 27512 When making the program ROMs from the hex files generated by the hex data converter write data with an offset address as shown below Table 7 7 1 ROM offset address ROM type Offset value For ICE For Evaluation Board 2764 0 0 27128 0 0 27256 0 0x4000 27512 0x8000 0xC000 3 If an 8 character output file name DOS file name without extension is specified for the Intel HEX files it will be changed to a long file name because l hex or h hex is added to the file name 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 111 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 8 DISASSEMBLER CHAPTER 6 DISASSEMBLER This chapter will describe the functions of the Disassembler ds62 8 1 Functions The Disassembler ds62 inputs an object file in IEEE 695 or Intel HEX format and disassembles the codes to mnemonics The results are output as a source file The restored source file can be processed in the assembler linker hex converter to obtain the same object or hex file 8 2 Input Output Files 8 2 1 Input Files Absolute object file File format File name Description Hex file File format File name Description ICE parameter file File format from Linker from He
25. 22 6167 4 06 call 6x6 call INC RAH BLK1 increment RAM LD A 6x8 23 6168 886 jp 6x6 jp LOOP infinity loop E 2h sub s Next Code Fe 8 25 test program subroutines LD SPH fi 26 aE CE 29 org 6x2 66 a 4 Command Eel Debugger 2 Verx xx Copyright SEIKO EPSON CORP 199x Connecting COM1 with 9688 baud rate done Parameter file C XE8C62Xdeu 62XDeu621cXIcs 21cp par Chip Name E6C621c m C2 CB C2 C2 C2 e G2 G2 e o 2 o0 02 02 020 02 02 02 0 DB o C C C2 C2 C2 eo eo 0G G3 c o TNG 2 qaqa 02 02 02 02 MD V C CB C2 C2 G3 o o G3 GA Uo o Un n 2 02 02 02 02 02 a OQooaoo SSS SS o9 9 C3 C3 C3 C3 C3 SS 4 o C C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 eo Gn o ow oo C2 C2 02 C2 C2 02 02 OD o acc n 0n n 2 E i 05020020050 020202 02 9 03 02 02 02 m TU Gm o Hv C 3 32 02 2 C A GA own 02 gt com C XE8C62XtestXtest cmd 8 lf test abs CD C CL CD C2 C CD C2 CD CD CD C2 C2 D C2 C2 2 C2 C2 C2 02 2 C CL CL CL Cm Cm o7 Gm Oo om m m Cm C2 C2 Cm Cm Cm Cm CB CA Cm Cm eo 7 Gm o oem m 2 on 2 C02 02 02 DO V Cm oC C C2 C2 G2 cO ovo SS 2 2 2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 UD V oC oC C C2 C2 G2 e Oo Ovowus 2 2 2 C2 02 C2 C2 02 OO V E C Cm CL GL GO G OTSG7 W o om Gm Gm Cm Cm Cm Cm Gm D Oooooo sss SSS m Cm Gm Cm Cm C2 Cm C2 oe Gm C2 G2 G2 G3 eGOUOo O VS SS Cn G3 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 UD a Loading file 0K 8 8tg gt ta 6t ot 4 WZ h Ready NUM For t
26. 221 viii EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 1 GENERAL CHAPTER GENERAL 1 1 Features The S1C62 Family Assembler Package contains software development tools that are common to all the models of the S1C62 Family The package comes as an efficient working environment for development tasks ranging from source program assembly to debugging Its principal features are as follows Simple composition A task from assembly to debugging can be made with minimal tools Integrated working environment A Windows based integrated environment allows the tool chain to be used on its Windows GUI interface Modular programming The relocatable assembler lets you develop a program which is made up of multiple sources This makes it possible to keep a common part independently and to use it as a part or a basis for the next program Source debugging A debugger can display an assembler source to show its execution status and allow debugging operations on it This makes debugging much easier to perform Common to all S1C62 chips The tools workbench assembler linker hex converter disassembler and debugger are common to all S1C62 Family models except for several chip dependent masking tools Dev tools The chip dependent information is read from the ICE parameter file for each chip Complete compatibility with old syntax sources By supporting old syntax together with the new syntax an existing dat sour
27. 38 0203 900 lbpx mx 0 set 0x0000 to RAM BLK1 39 0204 900 lbpx mx 0 40 0205 fdf ret 41 42 BAM block 1 increment 43 44 global INC RAM BLK1 45 INC RAM BLKI1 46 0206 e00 ld a RAM BLK1 h 47 0207 e80 ld xp a 48 0208 b00 ld x RAM_BLK1 1 set RAM_BLK1 address to x 49 0209 e00 id sy 50 020a 41 scf 51 020b 28 acpx mx a increment 16bit value 523 020c f28 acpx mx a SE T 020d L2 acpx mx a 54 020e a98 adc mx a 55 020f rat ret S5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 115 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 8 DISASSEMBLER Output source file test ms default Disassembler 62 Ver x xx Assembly source file TEST MS Mon May 04 11 49 34 1998 Og 0x100 ld a 0x8 ld sph a ld a 0x0 ld spl a pset 0x2 call LABEL1 LABEL3 pset 0x2 call LABEL2 jp LABEL3 Org 0x200 LABELZ1 ld a 0x0 ld xp a ld x 0x0 lbpx mx 0x0 lbpx mx 0x0 ret LABEL2 ld a 0x0 ld xp a ld Xx 0x0 ld a 0x0 Scr acpx mz pa acpx mx a acpx mx a adc mx ret Output source file test ms when cl is specified Disassembler 62 Ver x xx Assembly source file TEST MS Mon May 04 11 50 20 1998 4Ofg 0x100 ld a 0x8 ld sph a ld a 0x0 ld spl a pset 0X2 call label11 label3 pset xs call label2 JP label3 OG 0x200 labell ld a 0x0 ld xp a ld x 0x0 lbpx mx 0x0 lbpx mx 0x0 ret label2 ld a 0x0 ld xp a LA x 0x0 ld a 0x0 Scr acpx mx d acpx mx a acpx mx adc mx ret 116 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANU
28. 4 Find button The Find dialog box appears Find Ei Find what Eiri Hert T Match whole ward only Direction Cancel Match case C Up amp Down 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 33 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 4 WORK BENCH The controls in the dialog are as follows Find what text box Enter the word to be found in this text box The specified word is maintained as the finding word even if this dialog box is closed Match whole word only check box If this option is selected the work bench searches only the words that are completely matched with the specified word If not only the part of word that matches the specified word will be searched Match case check box If this option is specified a case sensitive search is performed If not a case insensitive search is performed Direction option If the Up radio button is selected the specified word is searched toward to the beginning of the file If the Down radio button is selected a search is performed toward to the end of the file Find Next button Clicking this button starts searching the specified word If the specified word is found the Edit window refreshes the display and highlights the word found Cancel button Clicking this button closes the dialog box Once a word to be found is specified in the Find dialog box the Find Next and Find Previous buttons on the toolbar can be used for a forward or backward search
29. Absolute Object 7 dk ve PU alam Project window B fa T 8 sub s M This window shows the currently opened work space folder and lists all the source files in the project with a structure similar to Windows Explorer Double clicking a source file icon opens the source file in the Edit window GotoLabe b i i P subroutines Edit window global RAM_BLK1 This window is used for editing a err source file A standard text file can also be displayed in this window Two or more windows can be opened s ums IMIT R H BLK1 in the edit window area ld a R amp M BLK1 h org XQ 05 OA fon jx RAM block 1 initialize see xp a 1d x RAM_BLK171 set RAM_BLK1 address to x lbpx nx 8 set 8x8888 to RAM BLK1 lbpx nx 8 ret Linker 62 Uer x xx Copyright C SEIKO EPSON CORP 199x Output window This window displays the messages delivered from the executed tools in a build or assemble process Double clicking a syntax error message with a source line number displayed in this window activates or opens the Edit window of the corresponding source so that the source line in which the error has occurred can be viewed Created absolute object file TEST fiBS Link 8 error s 8 warning s Build Done b ud For Help press F1 fini cot NUM Work Bench wb62 2 Tool bars Standard tool bar New button Creates a new document source header or project
30. File name Output destination Description Symbol file File format File name Output destination Description Binary file in IEEE 695 format File name abs Current directory Object file in executable format that can be input to the debugger All the modules comprising one program are linked together in the file and the absolute addresses that all the codes will map are determined It also contains the necessary debugging information in IEEE 695 format Text file lt File name gt map Current directory Mapping information file showing from which address of a section each input file was mapped This file is output when the m start up option is specified Text file lt File name gt sym Current directory Symbols defined in all the modules and their address information are delivered to this file This file is delivered when the s start up option is specified Cross reference file File format File name Output destination Description Absolute list file File format File name Output destination Description Error file File format Text file lt File name gt xrf Current directory Labels defined in all the modules and their defined and referred addresses are delivered in this file This file is delivered when the x start up option is specified Text file lt File name gt als Current directory File delivered when the start up option l is specified The file contents are s
31. Hex converter Disassembler Debugger Object format library for debugger Hex file library for debugger Inline assembler for debugger CPU library for debugger ICE library for debugger Run time library for work bench OLE library for work bench Child task library for work bench Manual folder English S5BU1C62000A Manual 51C60 62 Family Development Tool Manual Manual folder Japanese S5BU1C62000A Manual 91C60 62 Family Development Tool Manual Function option generator Segment option generator Mask data checker Melody assembler Model dependent files for development tools Model dependent files for development tools DOS version Note Work bench assumes the above directory structure Do not rename these folders or file names and do not change the tree structure Online manual in PDF format The online manuals are provided in PDF format so Adobe Acrobat Reader Ver 4 0 or later is needed to read it EPSON 5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 3 SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT PROCEDURE CHAPTER 3 SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT PROCEDURE This chapter outlines a basic development procedure 3 1 Software Development Flow Figure 3 1 1 represents a flow of software development work Work Bench wb62 Development tools for each model h ces Assembly lee Jo file DAT source file s DE TE MEER Function O
32. ICE parameter file box lists the parameter files that exist in the dev62 directory The work bench creates a folder directory with the specified project name as a work space and puts the project file epj into the folder If a folder which has the same name as that of a specified one already exists in the specified location the work bench uses the folder as the work space Thus you can specify a folder in which sources are created The specified project name will also be used for the absolute object and other files 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 27 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 4 WORK BENCH 4 6 2 Inserting Sources into a Project The sources created must be inserted into the project To insert a source into a project use one of the four methods shown below 1 Insert Files into project menu item A dialog box appears when this menu item is selected Open Look in E test E main g amp ub s Files of type Assembly Source Files 2 me dat Cancel Choose a source file from the list box and then click Open 2 File Open menu item or Open button rj Open button A dialog box appears when this menu item or button is selected Open Look in C3 test main gub s Files of type Assembly Source Files 3 ms dat Cancel Open as read only Choose a source file from the list box and select the Into project button then click Open 3 I
33. MemOP Read write operation denoted by R or W at the beginning of data accessed data memory address hexadecimal and data hexadecimal OtherOP Interrupt process INT1 stack INT2 vector fetch Trace areas and conditions Trace areas address ranges and a trace condition can be selected using the following commands Table 9 8 6 1 Trace area condition set up command Function Command Menu Set trace area ta Trace Trace Area Set trace condition tc Trace Trace Condition 1 Trace area Multiple program address ranges can be specified as the trace areas The debugger samples trace information from the set areas only 150 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 2 Trace condition The trace starts when the target program starts executing and ends relative to an instruction that generates a break set by a break command bp bd br or bm The trace range is decided according to the trace condition that can be selected from the three positions shown below e Start The trace is halted after sampling trace information for 8 192 cycles beginning from the first hit break point In this case the trace information at the break point is the oldest information stored in the trace memory l Break point Execution started l PENA 8 192 cycles Trace sampling range Fig 9 8 6 1 Trace range when start is selected Middle The trace is halted after sampling t
34. Open button The HEX converter starts up and converts the selected object into the specified format The messages delivered from the HEX converter are displayed in the Output window 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 39 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 4 WORK BENCH Disassembler To invoke the disassembler select Disassembler from the Tools menu or click the Disassemble button iE Disassemble button Then select the executable object file to be disassembled in the Disassemble dialog box Disassemble Look in C test E Test abs Files of type Absolute Object File abs Cancel ICE Parameter file fics 6210P PAR Dutput eror log file Output Option Default Lowercase C Upper case Start address ox0000 This dialog box allows selection of the disassembler options ICE Parameter file list box Select an ICE parameter file from the pull down list Output error log file check box Select this option to generate the error log file of the disassembler Output Option Select a character case option using the radio buttons When Default is selected the disassembled source will be made with all labels in upper case characters and instructions in lower case characters When Upper case is selected the source will be made with upper case characters only When Lower case is selected the source will be made with lower case characters only Start address box
35. Record function toggles when rec is input Set to record on mode Notes e In record on mode besides the commands directly input in the Command window the commands executed by selecting from a menu or with a tool bar button except the Help menu commands are also displayed in the Command window and output to the specified file If you modify the register value or data memory contents by direct editing in the Register or Data window or set breakpoints in the Source window by double clicking the mouse the corresponding commands are also displayed in the Command window and output to the specified file e At the first time you should specify the file name to which all debug commands following the rec command will be output e Once an output command file is open the recording is suspended and resumed toggled every time you input the rec command This toggle operation remains effective until you terminate the debugger If you want to record following commands to another file you can use format 1 to specify the file name then current output file is closed and all following commands will be recorded in the newly specified file e If you want to execute some commands frequently you can record them to a file at the first execution and then use the com command to execute that command file you made GUI utility Option Record menu item When this menu item is selected a standard file selection Reco
36. Register window are also updated every step If the Register window is closed its contents are displayed in the Command window The display of the Data window is updated after the specified number of step executions are completed Resetting the CPU The CPU is reset when the gr command is executed or by executing the rst command When the CPU is reset the internal circuits are initialized as follows 1 Internal registers of the CPU PC 0x0100 Other registers not initialized 2 The Source and Register windows are redisplayed Because the PC is set to 0x0100 the Source window is redisplayed beginning with that address The PC value in the Register window is redisplayed The data memory contents are not modified S5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 147 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 8 5 Break Functions The target program is made to stop executing by one of the following causes e Break command conditions are satisfied e The Key Break button is clicked or the Esc key is pressed e The Break or Reset switch on the ICE is pushed Break by command The debugger has four types of break functions that allow the break conditions to be set by a com mand When the set conditions in one of these break functions are met the program under execution is made to break 1 Break by PC This function causes the program to break when the PC matches the set address The program is made to break
37. data lt data gt file name gt FileName 0 FileEnd line numbers Linelnfo Development Tools Inserts other file in the source file Defines a character string with a define name Defines a statement string with a macro name Branch labels in a macro are specified with 1 to n par Dummy parameters Conditional assembling name defined statements 1 is assembled name undefined statements 2 is assembled Conditional assembling name undefined statements 1 is assembled name defined statements 2 is assembled Declares the start of a code section Declares the start of a bss section Specifies an absolute address Specifies a page number Specifies a bank number Specifies alignment of a section Defines a global symbol and secures memory area in a bss section Defines a local symbol and secures memory area in a bss section Defines an absolute address for a symbol Declares the symbol as global Defines codes in the CODE section Turns output ON list OFF nolist in the assembly list file Effective only when the l option is specified Outputs source information for debugging Effective only when the g option is specified Assembler as62 2 Operators Priority Plus sign 1 Minus sign 1 H Acquires 8 high order bits 2 L Acquires 8 low order bits 2 Negation 2 Parenthesis 3 11 d Multiplication 4 Division 4 96 Residue 4 Sh
38. items for register break setting The register value can be input as a binary number with or without mask bits or a hexadecimal number in the range of the bit width of each register refer to the notes for bd command An error results if the limit is exceeded Error invalid data pattern Gui utility Break Register Break menu item When this menu item is selected a dialog box appears for setting register break conditions Register Break To set a register condition select the radio button for the register and enter a value in the Enter Value box then click Modify All the register condition must be set Enter Register OA C E an to exclude the register from the break condition When the Apply button is clicked the dialog box closes and the register break is EE 00016 Note Set Hexadecimal value for the register means ignore Enter Value Modify Cancel Clear set with the specified conditions However if there is a register of which the condition has not been set indicated with no register break condition is set To clear the register break conditions click Clear 182 EPSON 5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER brc register break clear LH Function This command clears the register break conditions that have been set Li Format brc direct input mode GUI utility Break R
39. lt address3 gt direct input mode 2 dm guidance mode Start address lt address1 gt End address lt address2 gt Destination address address3 J gt address1 Start address of source area to be copied from hexadecimal or symbol IEEE 695 format only lt address2 gt End address of source area to be copied from hexadecimal or symbol IEEE 695 format only lt address3 gt Address of destination area to be copied to hexadecimal or symbol IEEE 695 format only Condition 0 address1 lt address2 lt last data memory address 0 lt address3 lt last data memory address i Examples Format 1 gt dm 200 2FF 2804 Copies data within the range from address 0x200 to address Ox2ff to the area from address 0x280 Format 2 dm Start address 200 Source area start address is input End address 2ff l Source area end address is input Destination address 2804 Destination area start address is input gt Command execution can be canceled by entering only the Enter key and nothing else Notes e All the addresses specified here must be within the range of the data memory area available with each microcomputer model An error results if the input one is not a hexadecimal number or a valid symbol Error invalid value An error results if the limit is exceeded Error Data address out of range e Write operation is not performed to the read only address of the I O ar
40. the g command with a temporary break is executed The program execution will be suspended after executing the address at the cursor position Go to Cursor button 170 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER gr go after reset CPU LH Function This command executes the target program from the boot address after resetting the CPU Li Format gt gr direct input mode Operation This command resets the CPU before executing the program This causes the PC to be set at address 0x100 from which the command starts executing the program Once the program starts executing the command operates in the same way as the g command GUI utility Run Go from Reset menu item Go from Reset button When this menu item or button is selected the gr command is executed w Go from Reset button 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 171 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER S step Function This command single steps the target program from the current PC position by executing one instruc tion at a time i Format gt S lt step gt direct input mode step Number of steps to be executed decimal default is 1 Condition 0 lt step 65 535 Operation If the lt step gt is omitted only the program step at the address indicated by the PC is executed other wise the specified number of program steps is executed from the address i
41. 0 010 O0 0 0 0 000 0 0 0 Q 0 0010 00000000 00000000 0020 00000000 000 000 0 0 O0e0s 0 Of QU 7 FJ X f FH LL FF AFF ODPOTXTOIOTQLOIO 7 7 7 UG O00 0 7 7 7 gt gn indicates an unused address bits indicates that the address contains write only bits or read only S5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 161 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER If only lt address1 gt is defined the debugger displays data for 256 words from lt address1 gt gt dd 0084 L 2 35 4507 9 9 AB GC DE 0000 00000000 0010 00000000 00000000 0020 00000000 00000000 00e0 0 0 0 DOTrOSTUIODIDIOTO 0100 00000 gt O 7X ON ON C 7 ON O N O N O N ONS ONS COSS OSS If both lt address1 gt and lt address2 gt are defined the debugger displays data from lt address1 gt to lt address2 gt gt dd 008 0174 01234567 89ABCDEF 0000 00000000 0010 0 0 0 0 5 9 0 g gt 3 During log output If a command execution is being output to a log file by the log command when you dump the data memory 256 words of data are displayed in the Command window even if the Data window is opened and are also output to the log file Notes Both the start and end addresses specified here must be within the range of the data memory area available with each microcomputer model An error results if the input one is not a hexadecimal number or not a valid symbol Error invalid value An error results if the limit is exce
42. 2 Select EOC Project File and click OK The Project dialog box appears Project Praject ICE parameter File fies IC5621CF PAR Location Cancel CAEOCB2 test H 4 A 3 Enter a project name select an ICE parameter file and select a workBench62 Version x xx directory then click OK File Edit Miew Insert Build Tools He The ICE parameter file box lists the parameter files that exist Dis ES Cel ae Ei E amp e a E ICSE21CP PAR The work bench creates a folder directory with the specified woof best files project name as a work space and puts the project file epj into the folder The specified project name will also be used for the absolute object Bd and other files Created project Project window in the dev62 directory 3 2 3 Editing Source Files The work bench has an editor function This makes it possible to edit source files without another editor To create a new source file 1 Select New from the File menu or click the New button L New button The New dialog box appears OF EDC Assembly Source File EDC Assembly Header File EDC Project File Cancel 2 Select EOC Assembly Source File and click OK 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 9 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 3 SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT PROCEDURE A new edit window appears Edit window V WorkBench62 Version x xx EOCASM1 Iaf XI Ex File Edit View Inse
43. 26 comm RAM BLK1 4 Opening Closing Edit windows An Edit window opens when a source file text file is loaded using a menu button or a file icon in the Project window or when a new source is created Edit windows close by clicking the Close box of each window or selecting Close from the File menu When a project file is saved the Edit window information files opened size and location is also saved So the next time the project opens editing can begin in the saved condition Arrangement of the Edit windows The Edit windows being opened can be arranged similar to standard Windows applications 1 Cascade windows Select Cascade from the Window menu or click the Cascade Windows button E Cascade Windows button x5 sub s Iof xi sia i AN man s Goto Label main s test program main routine xxx INITIAL SP ADDRESS DEFINITION xxxxx itdefine SP INIT ADDR 6x86 SP init addr 6x86 xxxxx BOOT LOOP xxxxx global INIT RAM BLK1 subroutine global INC_RAM_BLK1 subroutine 2 OO C uU IE oN org 0x100 ld a SP_INIT_ADDR gt gt 4 ld sph a ld a SP_INIT_ADDR amp OxF ld spl a S5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 17 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 4 WORK BENCH 2 Tile windows To tile windows vertically select Tile Vertically from the Window menu or click the Tile Vertically button T Tile Vertically button Goto Label E main s t
44. 6027 Fax 02 767 3677 SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION ELECTRONIC DEVICES MARKETING DIVISION IC Marketing Department IC Marketing amp Engineering Group 421 8 Hino Hino shi Tokyo 191 8501 JAPAN Phone 81 0 42 587 5816 Fax 81 0 42 587 5624 ED International Marketing Department Europe amp U S A 421 8 Hino Hino shi Tokyo 191 8501 JAPAN Phone 81 0 42 587 5812 Fax 81 0 42 587 5564 ED International Marketing Department Asia 421 8 Hino Hino shi Tokyo 191 8501 JAPAN Phone 81 0 42 587 5814 Fax 81 0 42 587 5110 S5U1C62000A Manual S1C60 62 Family Assembler Package SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION ll EPSON Electronic Devices Website First issue September 1998 V Printed March 2002 in Japan DB
45. 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 9 15 Command File COM execute command file Function This command reads a command file and executes the debug commandes written in that file You can execute the commands successively or set an interval between each command execution Format 1 com file name gt lt interval gt direct input mode 2 com J guidance mode Filename file name gt Execute commands 1 successively 2 With wait 1 22 1 Interval 0 30 seconds intervals appears only when 2 With wait is selected Display execution progress file name Command file name path can also be specified interval Interval wait seconds between each command decimal 0 30 UI Examples Format 1 com batchl comcd Praia Commands in batchl com are executed successively Format 2 gt com File name test cmdd Execute commands 1 successively 2 with wait saad Lal Wait time 0 30 seconds 241 Para uou 2 sec of interval is inserted after each command execution Notes e Any contents other than commands cannot be written in the command file e Anerror results if the file you specified does not exist Error can t open file e Another command file can be read from a command file However the nesting of command files is limited to a maximum of 5 levels An error results if a com command at the sixth level is encountered the command
46. A Find Next button F Find Previous button Replace To replace a word with another one select Replace from the Edit menu The Replace dialog box appears Heplace Find what Eind Next Replace with Replace Beplace gll Match whole word only Cancel adai Match case The controls in the dialog are as follows Find what text box Enter the word to be found in this text box If a word has been specified in the Find dialog box it appears in this box Replace with text box Enter the substitute word in this box Match whole word only check box If this option is selected the work bench searches only the words that are completely matched with the specified word If not only the part of word that matches the specified word will be searched Match case check box If this option is specified a case sensitive search is performed If not a case insensitive search is performed 34 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 4 WORK BENCH Find Next button Clicking this button starts searching the specified word If the specified word is found the Edit window refreshes the display and highlights the word found Replace button By clicking this button after the specified word is found it is replaced with the substitute word Then the work bench searches the next Replace All button Replaces all the specified found words with the substitute word No
47. ADDA 0 ADDA 1 ADDR 2 ADDR 3 O20 Ue Cancel d Previous Hiert Clear All Breakpoint Break button When this button is clicked after placing the cursor to a line in the Source window the address at the cursor position is set as a PC breakpoint If the address has been set as a PC breakpoint this button clears the PC breakpoint Aih Break button The set breakpoints are marked with a at the beginning of the address lines in the Source window search Label 1 0100 eas 15 6161 Fea 17 8103 FFG 18 0104 ek 19 8165 468 28 21 8186 e4 22 0107 466 ld ld ld pset call poet call a 8x8 sph a a 8x8 spl a Ax x 6x2 z To set a breakpoint select a Set button and enter an address in the text box corresponding to the selected button When setting more than four breakpoints click the Next button to continue settings The Previous and Next buttons are used to view previous and subsequent four breakpoints To clear a breakpoint select the Clear button of the address to be cleared The Clear All Breakpoint button clears all the set breakpoints lel x xxxx BOOT LOOP sxxsx global IHIT RAH BLET1 subroutine global INC RAM BLET1 subroutine org 827488 call INI T_RAM_BLK1 BOOT ld ld ld ld LOOP call INC RAH BLK1 a 5P INIT ADDRS gt 4 a P sph a a SP IHIT RDDR amp xF spl a initialize RAI
48. Absolute sections remain unaffected e BSS sections are mapped from this address unless otherwise specified One or more spaces or tabs are necessary between bss and address e The address should be described in hexadecimal format Ox Default If this option is not specified the BSS section will begin from the RAM physical start address specified with the ICE parameter file Sample description bss 0x000 rcode lt file name gt lt address gt Function Set up of the file specific CODE section start address Explanation e Sets the absolute address to map the CODE section of the specified module This command serves to specify a module having a code to be fixed at a specific address such as the interrupt vector Absolute sections in the specified file remain unaffected e One or more spaces or tabs are necessary between rcode and file name gt e The address should be described in hexadecimal format Ox Default If this option is not specified the CODE section of each module is mapped continuously from the address that was set by the code option Sample description rcode testl o 0x0110 rbss lt file name gt lt address gt Function Set up of the file specific BSS section start address Explanation e Sets the absolute address to map the BSS section of the specified module This command serves to specify a module having a symbol to be fixed at a specific address of the RAM Absolute sections in the specified file
49. CODES BSS4 is mapped from address 0x600 Since the start addresses of the relocatable CODE and BSS sections in testl o have not been specified they are mapped from the relocatable section start addresses specified by the code and bss options First the linker will try to map CODE from address 0x0100 to address 0x010f If CODE2 is smaller than 0x100 words and CODE 1 is smaller than 0x10 words CODE can be mapped from address 0x0100 In this example CODE is mapped behind CODE4 because CODE1 is larger than 0x10 words When the or option is specified the linker will try to map CODEI in the same page as one of the already mapped sections that has many branching relationships BSS1 is mapped from address 0x500 however it may be mapped behind BSS4 if BSS1 is larger than 0x100 words A section cannot be overlapped to other sections therefore an error will occur if there is no free area larger than the section size For example an error will occur if CODE2 is larger than 0x110 words 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 101 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 6 LINKER 6 11 Automatic Insertion Removal Correction of pset Instruction To branch the program sequence to another page the pset instruction is required immediately before a branch instruction jp or call is executed Since the location of relocatable sections is not decided until the linking process is completed the linker has a function that automatically inserts removes or co
50. GRAM BLK1 Local symbol lt symbol name source file name e g GLOOPGmain s Refer to the description of each command for parameter input examples Step execution using the Enter key When the Enter key is pressed without entering any command the debugger single steps the instruction at the current PC address if a program has been loaded 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 137 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 7 2 Executing from Menu or Tool Bar The menu and tool bar are assigned frequently used commands as described in Sections 9 5 and 9 6 A command can be executed simply by selecting desired menu command or clicking on the tool bar button Table 9 7 2 1 lists the commands assigned to the menu and tool bar Table 9 7 2 1 Commands that can be specified from menu or tool bar Command Function Menu Button If Load IEEE 695 absolute object file File Load File us lo Load Intel HEX file File Load Option g Execute program successively Run Go g lt address gt Execute program to lt address gt successively Run Go to Cursor El gr Reset CPU and execute program successively Run Go from Reset e S Step into Run Step E n Step over Run Next com Load and execute command file Run Command File rst Reset CPU Run Reset CPU xt bp bpc Set clear PC breakpoint Break Breakpoint
51. Instruction format code Function Declares the start of a CODE section Statements following this instruction are assembled as those to be mapped in the program ROM until another section is declared The CODE section is set by default in the assembler Therefore the code pseudo instruction can be omitted at top of a source file Always describe it when you change a section to a CODE section Precautions e A CODE section can be divided among multiple locations of a source file for purpose of definition describing the code pseudo instruction in the respective start positions e Sections are relocatable by default unless those locations are specified with the org page or bank pseudo instructions or more loosely with the align pseudo instruction bss pseudo instruction Instruction format bss Function Declares the start of a BSS section Statements following this instruction are assembled as those to be mapped in the RAM until another section is declared Precautions e n a BSS section nothing else other than the comm lcomm and org pseudo instructions symbols and comments can be described e A BSS section can be divided among multiple locations of a source file for purpose of definition describing the bss pseudo instruction in the respective start positions e A BSS section is relocatable by default unless its address is specified with the org pseudo instruction It is possible to specify absolute loc
52. Package and the tools used for development depend on the model For details refer to the tool manual associated with each specific model Work Bench wb62 Development tools for each model bh gt Assembly file S ie file DAT J source file s Assembler as62 Assembly h RR list file s Lfile LST jj file O Ji file MS Linker file CM Function Option Seed bearer Generator fog62XX fileF DOC fileF HEX Function option Function option HEX file document file file SEG Segment option source file Segment Option Generator sog62XX fileS HEX fileS DOC file s Preprocessed source file s Object command file Linker Ik62 Symbol file file SYM file ABS rite acs Absolute file ALS list file i Segment option Segment option HEX file document file Absolute mA Cross Link map file file MAP object file Lfile XRF reference file HEX converter hx62 Motorola S Intel HEX format files format files Fee ee URS ee et file HSA L or fileL HEX file mel Melody Assembler mla62XX Melody data file fileA HEX fileA DOC Melody Melody l HEX file document file Mask Data Checker mdc62XX Mask file MS 5777 file PAn J gata file Disassembled source file Debugger
53. Set s bd bdc Set clear data break Break Data Break br brc Set clear register break Break Register Break bm bmc Set clear multiple break Break Multiple Break bac Clear all break conditions Break Break All Clear ta tac Set clear trace area Trace Trace Area tc Set trace condition Trace Trace Condition ts Search trace information Trace Trace Search tf Save trace information to a file Trace Trace File u Unassemble display View Program Unassemble El SC Source display View Program Source Display m Mix display View Program Mix Mode dd Dump data memory View Data Dump rd Display register values View Register td Display trace information View Trace log Turn log output on or off Option Log rec Record commands to a command file Option Record otf be bsyn tim Set modes Option Mode Setting rom Set ROM type Option Rom Type 138 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 7 3 Executing from a Command File Another method for executing commands is to use a command file that contains descriptions of a series of debug commands By reading a command file into the debugger the commands written in it can be executed Creating a command file Create a command file as a text file using an editor Although there are no specific restrictions on the ext
54. Start pointer decimal min 0 num2 End pointer decimal max 2 730 file name Output file name path can also be specified Li Examples Format 1 gt tf tuace trod Saves all trace information extracted by the d command Iracing into file OK gt Format 2 SEL Start point 2 D End point 7 a The oldest data is specified by the Enter key File name 2 Test tred Tracing into file se OR gt Notes e f an existing file is specified the file is overwritten with the new data e The default value of lt num1 gt is 0 the default value of lt num2 gt is the last location GUI utility Trace Trace File menu item When this menu item is selected a dialog box appears allowing specification of the parameters Trace File Enter a start pointer end pointer and a file name then click OK Start Point Decimal min 0 To save all the trace information enter 0 to the Start Point ER Oooo Demans E box and leave the End Point box blank The file name can be selected using a standard file selec epee Browse tion dialog box that appears by clicking Browse Cancel 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 209 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 9 14 Coverage CV coverage i Function This command displays coverage information addresses where the program is executed The coverage information is displayed in the Command window Format gt cv
55. The hex converter error messages are given below Error message Description Cannot create file kind file lt FILE NAME gt The file cannot be created Cannot open file kind file FILE NAME gt The file cannot be opened Cannot read file kind file lt FILE NAME gt The file cannot be read Cannot write file kind file FILE NAME gt Data cannot be written to the file Different processor types The ICE parameter file contains an illegal parameter setting Illegal file name FILE NAME gt The specified input file name is incorrect Illegal option option An illegal option is specified Illegal absolute object format The input file is not an object file in IEEE 695 format Out of memory Cannot secure memory space 7 6 2 Warning Even if a warning is issued the hex converter keeps on processing and completes the processing after displaying a warning message unless in addition any error occurs Warning message Description Two or more file names with the same extension have been specified The last one is used Input file name extension XXX conflict 110 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE 7 7 Precautions 1 When creating the hex files for making the mask data file in the mask data checker specify Intel HEX CHAPTER 7 HEX CONVERTER format and convert for the entire available memory range of the model do not specify the b and m
56. UN 200 te trace condition PPP TERCER TT 200 ta trace 010220 NER 201 ae 220107202052 08912 21 RII TT TT TS 205 ID Pace POET a arce AEQ ists E kE SREEIURR RUNDE MORE URL RE RURE 204 id trace data display icuusenseiisukntke neve HATH PO EREMO ERR OL CENE 205 IS irace search dsssenbesotesdestssi us tistisu tradite cbe UR RARUS PERSIUS 207 dE SAU TT T C 209 A NU Edo OC NN 210 UE COMET BS sania T E E 210 CVE COVOARE CIOQE aroari rst irinin in an ME EES ESE SANESE 211 VU T C ODDO PUB eriein ee loss ades quac lacu E dd RUE 212 com execute command file sess 212 rec record commands to a file si vcsccssrisrecrvemiaspereienciiereiianseseenens 213 DLO TOG Rc d 214 Toa E 214 9 9 LT Map IMOMAT OR periret UU Ue ER CHEM Ern pe prit PD bU M E Ie EHRA EA OH E de E OED 215 Mma Map TA OPINION PEE m 215 el OOO CLIN CREER pA 216 otf on the fly display asin cunctcte capevonncaanveuntsrorcatencsicneceitanerhscataieoess 216 imi time or step Mode axcssosidsdii e a RE PREDA TUR BRI GE Rad RIS LEUR 217 9 9 19 Self DIAGNOSIS e cs MR IESCIERNREPU PERI ga NRI TRIS naa eio aaneen e daa aE ei 218 CHR self diar nosiic TeSt wexoivosebusewa itk RURGUSEUDbRS ENE e i EANES 218 VR OO ET P 219 288 70701 EE EEE NOT RT DU E n A E 219 DAO Err Warming MCS SG COS s esisacc pua dia usce S Ad coo heave Pda Dua DUE UEM aM pEES 220 UTE TE PERIENCE M
57. after executing the instruction at that address When the pset instruction is entered at the set address the pset and subsequent instructions are executed before a break occurs The PC breakpoints can be set for multiple addresses Table 9 8 5 1 Commands menu items tool bar button to set breakpoints Function Command Menu Button Set breakpoints bp Break Breakpoint Set llth Clear breakpoints bpc Break Breakpoint Set ally The addresses that are set as PC breakpoints are marked with a as they are displayed in the Source window Using the Break button easily allows the setting and canceling of breakpoints Click on the address line in the Source window at where the program break is desired after moving the cursor to that position and then click on the Break button A mark will be placed at the beginning of the line indicating that a breakpoint has been set there and the address is registered in the breakpoint list Clicking on the line that begins with a and then the Break button cancels the breakpoint you have set in which case the address is deleted from the breakpoint list The temporary break addresses that can be specified by the successive execution commands g do not affect the set addresses in the breakpoint list 2 Data break This break function allows a break to be executed when a location in the specified data memory area is accessed In addition to specifying a memor
58. and 12 clock instructions The 5 clock instructions require 3 bus cycles 7 clock instructions require 4 bus cycles and 12 clock instructions require 6 bus cycles Thus the final value of the trace pointer is changed accord ing to the executed instruction The maximum final value when only 5 clock instructions are executed is about 2 730 while the execution for only 12 clock instructions is about 1 300 5o the maximum possible value of trace pointer is 2 730 An error results if the num you specified exceeds the maximum possible value 2 730 e The trace memory receives new data until a break occurs When the trace memory is filled old data is overwritten by new data e If there is no trace information can be read out the warning message will be displayed No trace data e An error results if the num value you input is bigger than the last location in the trace memory Error Data address out of range Gui utility View Trace menu item When this menu item is selected the Trace window opens and displays the latest trace data 206 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER lS trace search i Function This command searches trace information from the trace memory under a specified condition The search condition can be selected from three available conditions 1 Search by executed address In this mode you can specify a program memory address The debugger searches th
59. and printer 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 23 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 4 WORK BENCH 4 5 2 Edit Menu Edit Undo Chrl 2 Cut Erbe Copy Ctrl C Faste Ctrl Select All CirleA Find Ctrl F 4 5 3 View Menu Replace Ctrl H GoTo tle W y W W y W Standard Bar Status Bar Output Window Project Window Build Bar Window Bar Full Screen Undo Ctrl Z Undoes the previous executed operation in the Edit window Cut Ctrl X Cuts the selected text in the Edit window to the clipboard Copy Ctrl C Copies the selected text in the Edit window to the clipboard Paste Ctrl V Pastes the text copied on the clipboard to the current cursor position in the Edit window or replaces the selected text with the copied text Select All CtrI A Selects all text in the active Edit window Find Ctrl F Finds the specified word in the active Edit window A dialog box will appear allowing specification of the word to be found and a search condition Replace Ctrl H Replaces the specified words in the active Edit window with one another A dialog box will appear allowing specification of the words Go To Ctrl G Jumps to the specified line or label in the active Edit window A dialog box will appear allowing specification of a line number or a label name Standard Bar Shows or hides the standard toolba
60. and the number of objects to be linked depend on the free memory space 2 The dr option disabling pset deletion is provided to keep compatibility with the older assembler asm62XX It must be specified to create the same object as one that is created with the asm62XX 3 To load the absolute object file created by the linker to the debugger the same ICE parameter file must be specified when the debugger is invoked 104 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 7 HEX CONVERTER CHAPTER 7 HEX CONVERTER This chapter will describe the functions of Hex Converter hx62 7 1 Functions Hex Converter hx62 converts an absolute object file in IEEE 695 format output from the linker into a hex file in Intel HEX format or Motorola 5 format This conversion is needed when debugging the program with the ROM or when creating mask data using the mask data checker provided for each model When creating the ROM image hex data the hex converter fills the unused area of each model with Oxff 7 2 Input Output Files from Linker ICE parameter file Absolute EE E o object file Hex Converter hx62 Fy file hsa E Motorola S format files file err Error file ROM or Mask data creation Fig 7 2 1 Flow chart 7 2 1 Input Files Absolute object file File format Binary file in IEEE 695 format File name Description ICE parameter file File format File name Description
61. cannot be opened The project close command or work bench terminate command is specified while the build task is being processed The debugger invoke command is specified when the build task has not already been completed Short Cut Key List Ctrl N Ctrl O Ctrl F12 Ctrl S Ctrl P Ctrl Shift F12 Ctrl Z Alt BackSpace Ctrl X Shift Delete Ctrl C Ctrl Insert Ctrl V Shift Insert Ctrl A Ctrl F F3 Shift F3 Ctrl H Ctrl G Ctrl F7 F7 Ctrl Break F5 Alt F7 Ctrl Tab Short cut key Shift F10 Development Tools Creates a new document Opens an existing document Opens an existing document Saves the document Print the active document Print the active document Undoes the last action Undoes the last action Cuts the selection and puts it on the clipboard Cuts the selection and puts it on the clipboard Copies the selection to the clipboard Copies the selection to the clipboard Inserts the clipboard contents at the insertion point Inserts the clipboard contents at the insertion point Selects the entire document Finds the specified text Finds next Finds previous Replaces the specified text with different text Moves to the specified location Assembles the file Builds the project Stops the build Debugs the project Edits the project build and debug settings Next MDI Window Opens the popup menu Opens the popup menu Assembler as62 1 Outli
62. change The align pseudo instruction keeps its effect only in that section until the next section definer code or bss or the next location definer org align page or bank appears Example code The latest relocatable section definition pies 32 Starts new loosely absolute CODE section from the next 32 word boundary address bss This section is relocatable not affected by the align pseudo instruction code This section is also relocatable not affected by the align pseudo instruction e If the align pseudo instruction is defined immediately after a section definer code or bss the section definer does not start a new section But align starts a new section with the attribute of the section definer Example code his does not start a new CODE section align 32 This starts a loosely absolute CODE section e If the align pseudo instruction is defined immediately before a section definer code or bss it does not start a new section and makes no effect to the following sections Example code The latest relocatable section definition align 32 This does not start a new absolute section and makes no effect bss The another kind BSS of section which is not affected by the previous align pseudo instruction in the CODE section code I his will be an relocatable CODE section not affected by the previous align pseudo instruction 76 EPSON S5U1C62000A MAN
63. db62 Q In circuit Emulator ICE Development Tools Programming Create assembly source files using the work bench or an editor Assembly and Linking 2 1 Start up the work bench 2 2 Create a project file then insert source files into the project 2 3 Execute the build process The work bench executes the assembler and linker sequentially to generate an executable object file Option Data Creation Create the option HEX document files function option segment option melody data using the tools provided for each model Debugging 4 1 Start up the debugger from the work bench 4 2 Load the executable object file and option HEX files then debug the program using the debug commands Mask Data Creation When the program development has been completed create a mask data file 5 1 Create the program HEX files using the HEX converter 5 2 Convert the program and option document files into a mask data file using the mask data checker 5 3 Submit the mask data file to Seiko Epson Work Bench wb62 1 Development Tools Outline The work bench provides an integrated development environment with Windows GUI Creating editing source files selecting files and major startup options and the startup of each tool can be made with simple Windows operations Window WorkBench62 Version x xx sub s File Edit View Insert Build Tools Window Help Osta e an Sle amp ficsezicpPaR
64. defining a Define name only for number definition The preprocess in the assembler handles expressions in signed 16 bit data and expands them as hexadeci mal numbers Types of operators Arithmetic operators Examples Old operators for asm62XX Addition Plus sign 0xff 1 2 Subtraction Minus sign 1 2 Oxff 0b111 Multiplication Oxi 5 h Division 0x123 0x56 Residue 0x123 0x56 MOD gt gt Shifting to right 562 SHR lt lt Shifting to left Oxl194 3 SHL H Acquires upper 8 bits 0x1234 H HIGH Pls Acquires lower 8 bits 0x1234 L LOW Parenthesis 1 142 5 not available The arithmetic operator returns the result of arithmetic operation on the specified terms Logical operators Examples Old operators amp Bit AND 0b1101 amp 0b111 AND Bit OR 0b123 0xff OR A Bit XOR E a XOR Bit inversion 0x1234 NOT The logical operator returns the result of logic operation on the specified terms 58 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER Relational operators Examples Old operators Equal SW EQ Not equal SW 0 NE Less than ABC 5 LT lt Less than or equal ABC lt 5 LE gt Greater than ABC gt 5 GT gt Greater than or equal ABC gt 5 GE amp amp AND ABC amp amp Oxf not available OR ABC 0b1010 not available The relational operator returns 1 if the expression is true otherwise it returns 0 Priority The operators have the priority sho
65. error ICE62 firmware RAM errorfound during self diagnostic test Error undefined code detected some undefined code is detected when loading file 2 ICE status Status message Content of message otatus break hit A breakpoint is met when executing a program otatus break switch pushed Break switch is pressed otatus halt The status of ICE is halt Status key break Key break is pressed otatus reset switch target Reset switch is pressed otatus reset switch idle Reset switch is idle otatus target down There is a problem in communication between the ICE and Evaluation Board otatus time out The time waiting for a message from ICE is too long 3 Command errors warning Error message No coverage address Content of message Commands involved There is no coverage information cv No trace data There is no trace data in trace memory td ts Error Program address out of range The specified program memory address is out of range pe pf pm sc m u g bp cv ts Error Data address out of range The specified data memory address is out of range de df dm dd ts Error can t open file The file cannot be opened If lo Error Data out of range use 0 Oxf The specified number is out of the data range de df Error different chip type can t load this file A different ICE parameter is used in the
66. executed This button performs the same function when the n command is executed Reset button This button resets the CPU It performs the same function when the rst command is executed 9 5 6 Break Button x Use this button to set and clear a breakpoint at the address where the cursor is located in the Source window This function is valid only when the Source window is open Note that select ing a break address by clicking on the address line is valid for only the lines that have actual code and is invalid for the source only lines 9 5 7 Help Button a This button displays an About dialog box for the debugger 132 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE 9 6 Menu CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER This section outlines the menu bar available with the debugger 9 6 1 Menu Structure The menu bar has eight menus each including frequently used commands File Hun Break Trace View Option Window Help 9 6 2 File Menu Load File Load Option Exil 9 6 3 Run Menu Hun Go Go to Cursor Go from Reset step Next Command File Reset CPU Load File This menu item reads an object file in the IEEE 695 format into the debugger It performs the same function when the If command is executed Load Option This menu item reads a program or optional HEX file in Intel HEX format into the debugger It performs the same function when the Jo command is executed Exit T
67. file Output of an error file No Not output Yes Output Debug info Addition of debugging information to the relocatable object No Not added Yes Added List file Output of the relocatable list file No Not output Yes Output Defines Name definition for conditional assembly Enter a define name 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 41 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 4 WORK BENCH The edit box shows the default setting Default and the list of source files in the project The default setting applies to all the sources excluding ones that are specified independently To select options of a specific source select the check box at the front of the source file name Check here gt Sub s No No No Each of the Error file Debug info and List file options is set to either No or Yes and it toggles by double clicking For example to change the default List file option from No to Yes double click No in the Default line It changes to Yes Source Error file Debug info List file Defines Default No Yes No c Double click here It will be changed to Yes To define a name for conditional assembly double clicking the Defines part Source Error file Debug info List file Defines Default No Yes No lt Double click here then type a define name An text box appears Type a name in the box If two or more names are to be entered separate each name with a comma Refer to Chapter 5 As
68. file If Error end address start address The start address is larger than the end address pf pm df dm bp cv Error error file type extension should be CMD The extension of the command file should be CMD com Error Incorrect identifier use PC ADDR DATA OPT A B X Y F An illegal parameter has been specified for an item of the bm command bm Error illegal code The input code is not available pe pf Error illegal mnemonic The input mnemonic is invalid for S1C62 as Error invalid command This is an invalid command All commands Error invalid data pattern The input data pattern is invalid bd Error invalid value The input data address or symbol is invalid All commands Error no high and low ROM No ROM is installed in ICE rp Error no high ROM No high order ROM is installed in ICE rp Error no low ROM No low order ROM is installed in ICE rp Error no mapping area A no map area is specified pm dm Error no such symbol There is no such symbol All symbol support commands Error Incorrect number of parameter The parameter number is incorrect All commands Error over max nesting level 5 can t open file Nestling of the com command exceeds the limit com Error r w option r w or An illegal R W option is specified bd bm Error ROM program verify error ROM program checks out dif
69. file dat Assembler gt as62 OS OS file Relocatable Object file Preprocessed Error file list file 5 source file to Linker DOSES Fig 5 2 1 Flow chart 5 2 1 Input File Assembly source file File format Text file File name File name s File name dat File name ms A preprocessed source file created by the assembler or disassembler Description File in which a source program is described If the file extension is omitted the assembler finds a source file that has the specified file name and an extension s Note The extension dat is allowed for assembling source files created for an old assem bler asm62XX Extension s is recommended for creating new sources Actually a S source file and a dat source file can have the same contents with the new and old syntax mixed However if the first section does not have an absolute address specification the section is regarded as a relocatable section in a s source while in a dat source it is regarded as an absolute section and org 0 is placed at the beginning of the source by preprocessing 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 47 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 2 2 Output Files Object file File format File name Output destination Description Relocatable list file File format File name Output destination Description Preprocessed file File format File name Output destina
70. file in IEEE 695 format or a hex file in Intel HEX format and restores it to a source format file The restored source file can be processed in the assembler linker hex converter to obtain the same object or hex file Debugger db62 exe This software performs debugging by controlling the ICE hardware tool Commands that are used frequently such as break and step are registered on the tool bar minimizing the necessary keyboard operations Moreover sources registers and command execution results can be displayed in multiple windows with resultant increased efficiency in the debugging tasks The debugger has both Windows and DOS user interfaces available Work Bench wb62 exe This software provides an integrated development environment with Windows GUI Creating editing source files selecting files and major start up options and the start up of each tool can be made with simple Windows operations 2 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION This chapter describes the required working environments for the tools supplied in the S1C62 Family Assembler Package and their installation methods 2 1 Working Environment To use the S1C62 Family Assembler Package the following conditions are necessary Personal computer An IBM PC AT or a compatible machine which is equipped with a CPU equal to or better than a Pentium 75 MHz and 32MB or more of memory is recommen
71. follows Syntax pattern 1 Mnemonic Operand comment 2 Assembler pseudo instruction Parameter comment 3 Label comment 4 comment Example Statement Syntax Pattern include define h 2 set IO1 0x200 2 TEXT SECTION ROM 12bit width 4 org 0x100 2 START 3 jp INIT execute initial routine 1 reti 1 xorg 0x10 2 INIT 3 ld a 0 1 ida 20 1 The example given above is an ordinary source description method For increased visibility the elements composing each statement are aligned with tabs and spaces 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 51 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER Restrictions e Only one statement can be described in one line A description containing more than two instructions in one line will result in an error However a comment or a label may be described in the same line with an instruction Example OK BOOT id a 0x4 Error BOOT Iid a 0x4 Td b 0x0 One statement cannot be described in more than one line A statement that cannot complete in one line will result in an error Example codeword 0x0 0x1 0x2 0x3 OK Codeword Oxa 0xb 0xc 0xd OK Godeword 0x0 0x1 0x2 0x3 Oxa 0xb 0xc Oxd Error The maximum describable number of characters in one line is 259 ASCII characters If this number is exceeded an error will result The usable characters are limited to ASCII characters alphanumeric symbols except for u
72. from the current PC address by default if address is specified it is displayed from the specified address BI lel Search Label d GUI utility View Program Unassemble menu item Unassemble button When this menu item or button is selected the Source window opens or activates and displays the program from the current PC address E Unassemble button 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 191 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER SC source code Function This command displays the contents of the program source file in the Source window The display contents are as follows e Line number in the source file e Source code Hj Format gt sc lt address gt direct input mode address Start address for display hexadecimal or symbol IEEE 695 format only Condition 0 lt address lt last program memory address Display When the Source window is opened the display is refreshed When the Source window is closed the window automatically opens in the source mode If lt address gt is not specified the program is displayed from the current PC address by default if lt address gt is specified it is displayed from the specified address mi Source Display i IP x Search Label E 11 12 org 82188 13 BOOT 14 ld a SP INIT ADDRS gt 4 ET T 15 ld oph a 16 ld a SP IHIT ARDDR amp xF 17 ld spl a 18 call INIT _RAM_BLK1 initialize RAH block 1 19 LO
73. hex Function option generator Segment option s hex Segment option generator Melody data a hex Melody assembler Ext Extension Com Command Loading ROM data The debugger can load a program from the program ROMs installed in the ICE The following three commands are provided for handling ROM data Table 9 8 1 2 ROM access commands Function Command Menu Load program from ROM rp Verify ROM data with emulation memory vp Set ROM type rom Option Rom Type The ROM type of the ICE must be specified using the rom command before loading or verifying ROM data Debugging a program with source display To debug a program using the source display and symbols the object file must be in IEEE 695 format read into the debugger If any other program file is read only the unassemble display is produced 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 141 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 8 2 Source Display and Symbolic Debugging Function The debugger allows program debugging while displaying the assembly source statements Address specification using a symbol name is also possible Displaying program code The Source window displays the program in the specified display mode The display mode can be selected from among the three modes Unassemble mode Source mode Mix mode Table 9 8 2 1 Commands tool bar buttons to switch display mode Display mode Command Menu Bu
74. i Function This command clears the data break condition that has been set Format gt bdc direct input mode Gui utility Break Data Break menu item When this menu item is selected a dialog box appears for clearing the set data break condition See the bd command 180 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER br register break LH Function This command sets or clears register break This command allows you to specify data or a mask that constitutes a break condition for each register A B F X and Y The program will break when all setting conditions are met Format 1 gt br lt register gt lt value gt lt register gt lt value gt lt register gt lt value gt direct input mode 2 gt br guidance mode Register break set status 1 set 2 clear sn e1 122 Command is completed when 2 is selected A Old value lt value gt B Oldvalue lt value gt Fl Old value lt value gt FD Old value value FZ Old value value FC Old value value X Old value value J Y Old value lt value gt register Register name A B F X orY value Data pattern for the register hexadecimal or binary with B suffix can be used for the bits to be masked Li Examples Format 1 Sor F SW TES Sets a register break condition so that the program breaks when the C flag is set Format 2 2br R
75. in the active Edit window Development Tools View menu T Standard Bar Status Bar Output window Project Window Build Bar Window Bar amp amp RS RS A x Full Screen Standard Bar Shows or hides the standard toolbar Status Bar Shows or hides the status bar Output Window Opens or closes the Output window Project Window Opens or closes the Project window Build Bar Shows or hides the build toolbar Window Bar Shows or hides the window toolbar Full Screen Maximizes the Edit window area to the full screen size Insert menu Insert File Files into project File Inserts the specified file to the text in the Edit window Files into project Adds the specified source file in the currently opened project Build menu Assemble Ctrl F Build Fi Rebuild All Stop Build Debug F5 Settings Alt F ICE parameter File Output Format Ctrl Break Assemble Ctrl F7 Assembles the assembly source in the active Edit window Build F7 Builds the currently opened project using a general make process Rebuild All Rebuilds the currently opened project Stop Build Ctrl Break Stops the build process being executed Debug F5 Invokes the debugger with the specified ICE parameter file Settings Alt F7 Displays a dialog box for selecting tool options ICE parameter file Displays a dialog box for selecting an ICE
76. increment MA 176 EPSON 5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER bpc break point clear LH Function This command clears the specified breakpoints that have been set Li Format gt bpc break1 lt break2 gt lt break3 gt lt break4 gt W direct input mode lt break 1 4 gt Break address or address area hexadecimal or symbol IEEE 695 format only i Example gt bpo 0 0100 Break points that have been set 1 0200 0300 1 set 2 clear 3 clear all sex d sbpc 100 190 s2504 Clears PC break points at address 0x100 and the area from 0x150 0x200 bp4 to 0x250 0251 4 0300 l set 2 clear 3 clear all aes al gt i Notes e The format of parameters is same as the bp command You can also use the guidance input mode of bp command to do the same operation You can use this command for multiple times to clear breakpoints e If the specified addresses or areas have not been set as PC breakpoints no clear operation is done GUI utility Break Breakpoint Set menu item When this menu item is selected a dialog box appears for clearing PC breakpoints See the bp command Break button When this button is clicked after placing the cursor to a PC break address line in the Source window the breakpoint is cleared If the address has not been set as a PC breakpoint this button sets a new PC breakpoint at the address alll
77. information cvc S5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 153 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 9 Command Reference 9 9 1 Command List Table 9 9 1 1 lists the debug commands available with the debugger Table 9 9 1 1 Command list Classification Program memory operation Data memory operation Register operation Program execution CPU reset Break Program display Load files ROM access Trace Coverage Command file Log Map information Mode setting Self diagnosis Quit rd register display Display register values 167 rs register set Modify register values 168 Command Function Page assemble Assemble mnemonic 156 program memory enter Input program code 158 program memory fill Fill program area 159 program memory move Copy program memory 160 data memory dump Dump data memory 161 data memory enter Input data 163 data memory fill Fill data area 165 data memory move Copy data area 166 rst reset CPU Reset CPU 174 go Execute successively 169 go after reset CPU Reset CPU and execute successively 171 step Step into 172 next Step over 173 breakpoint set Set breakpoint 175 breakpoint clear Clear breakpoint 177 data break Set data break 178 data break clear Clear data break 180 register break Set register break 181 register break clear Cle
78. ip LOOP infinity loop 22 23 5x22 RAM block sess 24 bss rie org 6x 666 26 comm RAM_BLK1 4 27 For Help press F1 Ln26 Col28 NUM 32 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 4 WORK BENCH To save the source 1 Activate the Edit window of the source to be saved 2 Select Save as from the File menu The Save As dialog box appears Save As Save in E test al ex EE main x sub s Save as type Assembly Source Files 5 ms dat Cancel 3 Enter the file name and then click OK When overwriting the source on the existing file select Save from the File menu or click the Save button mi Save button To save all the source files opened and the project file use the File Save All menu item or the Save All button Save All button 4 7 3 Edit Function The source editor has general text editing functions similar to standard Windows applications Editing text Basic text editing function is the same as general Windows applications Cut copy and paste are supported in the Edit menu and with the toolbar buttons These commands are available only in the Edit window Undo can be selected from the Edit menu The tab stops are set at every 8 characters Find replace and go to Any words can be searched in the active Edit window Find To find a word select Find from the Edit menu or click the Find button
79. key Gui utility None 198 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER rom ROM type LH Function This command specifies the type of the ROM chip which is installed to the ICE ROM socket i Format 1 gt rom lt type gt direct input mode 2 rom guidance mode rom Current type setting lt type gt gt type Value indicating the ROM type 64 128 256 512 i Examples Format 1 gt rom 642 2764 type ROM is specified gt Format 2 gt rome ROM 64 2564 27256 type ROM is specified gt Notes e The initial value is set as 64 e An error results if you input a value other than the valid ones listed above Error Incorrect ROM type 64 128 256 512 GUI utility Option ROM Type menu item When this menu item is selected a dialog box appears allowing selection of a ROM type Rom Type Select a ROM type from the radio buttons Cancel 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 199 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 9 13 Trace lC trace condition Function This command sets up the trace condition by means of the break point One of the following three trace conditions can be specified with respect to the break point Start Extract the trace information from the break point Middle Extract the trace information before and after the break point End Extract the trace information up to the
80. makes no effect to the following sections Example code The latest relocatable section definition spank 1 This does not start a new absolute section and makes no effect bss The another kind BSS of section which is not affected by the previous bank pseudo instruction in the CODE section code I his will be an relocatable CODE section not affected by the previous bank pseudo instruction 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 75 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER align pseudo instruction Instruction format align Alignment number Alignment number Word alignment in 2 value e Only decimal binary and hexadecimal numbers can be described e The alignment that can be specified is a 2 value e One or more spaces or tabs are necessary between the instruction and the alignment number Sample description code align 32 Sets the location to the next 32 word boundary address Function Specifies location alignment in words of a CODE or BSS section in an assembly source file The section with the align pseudo instruction can be taken as a loosely absolute section in the sense that its location is partially defined This declaration does not allocate any memory space Precautions e align is applicable to any kinds of sections such CODE and BSS e When the align pseudo instruction appears in a section a new absolute section starts at that point The section type does not
81. of keys using such as Ctrl C keys denotes the operation of pressing the C key while the Ctrl key is held down Sample entries through the keyboard are not indicated in Moreover the operation of pressing the Enter key in sample entries is represented by W In this manual all the operations that can be executed with the mouse are described only as mouse operations For operating procedures executed through the keyboard refer to the Windows manual or help screens 7 General forms of commands startup options and messages Items given in are those to be selected by the user and they will work without any key entry involved An annotation enclosed in indicates that a specific name should be placed here For example file name needs to be replaced with an actual file name Items enclosed in and separated with indicate that you should choose an item For example A B needs to have either A or B selected ii EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CONTENTS Contents CHAPTER E GENERAL o eumdem EAS tA M PII URSI RU OUT PRO VIII QURP URIPHDI UE I FEE CIOS EEUU l Io Ta OnO O e E E eee ee 2 1 2 d COMPOSITION OF POR vnccimerptsrciccubueutsncsawitenmntatiiebenoeineteisencsubsbueetunetadenins 2 12 2 Outline of Saftware TOOLS sncsssiici norisa ari TE Ear aD ed upds 2 COHAPPER 2 ANSTATEATION uussetessvesaucpas ese eeEae star ENEE AEE NE ESNE ERS 3 2 1 Working Environment eee eke s
82. option is not specified Intel HEX format files h hex and l hex are generated Function Specification of output path file name Explanation Specifies an output path file name without extension or with an extension hex h hex 1sa or hsa By specifying only one file name two HEX files will be generated If no extension is specified an appropriate extension will be supplemented at the end of the specified output path file name In this case l hex or h hex is added to the output file name It may change a DOS file name 8 character max to a long file name for Windows Default The input file name is used for the output files When entering an option in the command line one or more spaces are necessary before and after the option Example c e0c62 bin hx62 e test abs ics62xxp par EPSON 5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 7 HEX CONVERTER 7 4 Messages The hex converter delivers all its messages via the Standard Output stdout Start up message The hex converter outputs only the following message when it starts up Hex converter 62 Ver x xx Copyright C SEIKO EPSON CORP 199x End message The hex converter outputs the following messages to indicate which files have been created when it ends normally Created hex file FILE NAME gt H HEX Created hex file FILE NAME gt L HEX Created error log file HX62 ERR Hex conversion 0 error s O0 warning s Usage outpu
83. options lt object files O gt lt ICE param file PAR gt lt command file CM gt Options d Disable all branch optimizations di Disable insertion of branch extension dr Disable removal of branch extension 6 Output error log file ERR Q Add source debug information 1 Output absolute list file ALS j Output map file MAP o file name gt Specify output file name 5S Output symbol file SYM X Output cross reference file XRF code address Specify CODE start address bss address Specify BSS start address rcode file name gt lt address gt Specify CODE start address of the file rbss file name gt lt address gt Specify BSS start address of the file When error warning occurs If an error takes place an error message will appear before the end message shows up Example Error Cannot open file TEST CM Link 1 error s 0 warning s In the case of an error the linker ends without creating an output file If a warning is issued a warning message will appear before the end message shows up Example Warning No symbols found Link 0 error s 1 warning s In the case of a warning the linker ends after creating an output file but the result cannot be guaran teed For details on errors and warnings refer to Section 6 12 Error Warning Messages 94 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 6 LINKER 6 5 Linker Command File To simplify the keystroke in
84. or more tabs or spaces If an instruction requires multiple operands the operands must be separated from each other with one comma Space between operands is ignored The elements of operands will be described further below Types of mnemonics The following 46 types of mnemonics can be used in the 1C62 Family acpx acpy adc add and call calz cp dec di ei fan halt inc jpba jp lbpx ld ldpx ldpy nop nop not or pop pset push rcr rdf ret retd rets rlc rro rst rz sbc scf scpx scpy sdf set slp sub szf xor For details on instructions refer to the S1C6200 6200A Core CPU Manual Note The assembler is commonly used for all the S1C62 Family models so all the instructions can be accepted Be aware that no error will occur in the assembler even if instructions or operands unavail able for the model are described They will be checked in the linker Assembler pseudo instructions The assembler pseudo instructions are not converted to execution codes but they are designed to control the assembler or to set data For discrimination from other instructions all the assembler pseudo instructions begin with a sharp or a period General notation forms of pseudo instructions General forms lt Pseudo instruction gt lt Pseudo instruction gt tab or space Parameter lt Pseudo instruction gt tab or space lt Parameter1 gt tab space or comma Parameter2 Examples define Swi 1 Org 0x100 comm BUF 4 There is no r
85. performs the same function as executing the bac command Trace Area This menu item sets or clears program address ranges for tracing executed cycles using a dialog box It performs the same function as executing the ta or tac command Trace Condition This menu item sets a trace condition Start Middle End using a dialog box It performs the same function as executing the tc command Trace Search This menu item searches trace information from the trace memory under the condition specified using a dialog box It performs the same function as executing the ts command Trace File This menu item saves the specified range of the trace information displayed in the Trace window to a file It performs the same function as executing the tf command Command This menu item activates the Command window Program This menu item opens or activates the Source window and displays the program from the current PC address in the display mode selected from the sub menu items These sub menu items perform the same functions as execut ing the u sc and m command respectively Unassemble Data Dump Source Display Register Mis Made Data Dump This menu item opens or activates the Data window and displays the data memory contents from the memory start address 134 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE VJEN Command Program d Data Dump Register Trace Toolb
86. pseudo instructions excluding conditional assembly instruction Other labels than internal branch labels Macro invocation Internal branch label A macro is spread over to several locations in the source Therefore if you describe a label in a macro a double definition will result with an error issued So use internal branch labels which are only valid within a macro e The number of internal branch labels are limited according to the free memory space e The same symbols as for a macro name are available Sample definition define C_RESET Dp T3 macro WALT COUNT ld a COUNT rst f C_RESET LOOP nop5 Jp LOOP endm S5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 67 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER Expansion rules When a defined macro name appears in the source the assembler inserts a statement string defined in that location If there are actual parameters described in that process the dummy parameters will be replaced with the actual parameters in the same order as the latter are arranged The internal branch labels are replaced respectively with L0001 from top of the source in the same order as they appear Sample expansion When the macro WAIT shown above is defined Macro invocation WAIT 15 After expansion Ld a 15 WAIT 15 rst f 0b1101 L0001 nop5 jp L0001 __L0001 denotes the case where an internal branch label is expanded for the first time in the source Precaut
87. specified input file name is incorrect An illegal option is specified The input file is not an object file in IEEE 695 format Cannot secure memory space Two or more file names with the same extension have been specified The last one is used Disassembler ds62 Outline Disassembles an absolute object file in IEEE 695 format or a hex file in Intel HEX format and restores it to a source format file The restored source file can be processed in the assembler linker hex converter to obtain the same object or hex file Flowchart from Linker from Hex converter ICE parameter file IEEE 695 absolute fileh hex L object file or filei hex Intel HEX files ee a file err Error file Preprocessed source file Start up Command Usage Usage ds62 options lt file names gt Options Sed Use lower case characters Error Messages Cannot create lt file kind gt file lt FILE NAME gt Cannot open lt file kind gt file lt FILE NAME gt Cannot read lt file kind gt file lt FILE NAME gt Cannot write lt file kind gt file lt FILE NAME gt Illegal file name FILE NAME gt Illegal HEX data format Illegal offset address offset address Illegal option option No ICE parameter file specified Out of memory Warning Message Input file name extension XXX conflict e Use upper case characters e Output error log file DS62 ERR o file name gt Output file name MS or no extension s address Offset
88. the Standard Output stdout such as error messages 112 EPSON 5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 8 DISASSEMBLER 8 3 Starting Method General form of command line ds62 Options 4 Absolute object or hex file name gt ICE parameter file name gt denotes a space indicates the possibility to omit File names Absolute object file File name abs Intel HEX files ICE parameter file File name gt h hex File name l hex File name par The input files must be specified with their extension The Intel HEX files can be specified with either h hex or l hex as the extension The other one unless specified will be automatically loaded A long file name supported in Windows and a path name can be specified When including spaces in the file name enclose the file name with double quotation marks Options The disassembler comes provided with the following five types of start up options C Function Explanation Default Function Explanation Default e Function Explanation Default 0 file name gt Function Explanation Default S address Function Explanation Default Use of lower case characters Creates all instructions and labels using lower case characters If neither this option nor the cu option is specified the source will be made with all labels in upper case characters and instructions in lower c
89. the command line at the time of start up execute the link processing through the linker by inputting a linker command file cm that holds the necessary specifications options and file names described Sample linker command file e Generate error file Add debug information code 0x0100 Fix CODE section start address rcode test2 o 0x0110 Fix CODE section start position of test2 o bss 0x00e0 Fix BSS section start address 0 Desct abs Specify output file name testl o Specify input file 1 test2 0 Specify input file 2 Create the linker command file with the following rules File format The linker command file is a general text format as shown above cm should be used for the file name extension Option description All options should begin with a hyphen Each individual option needs to be delineated with more than one space tab or line feed For better visibility it is recommended to describe each option in a separate line Notes A numeric value to specify an address should be described in the hexadecimal format Ox Decimal and binary notations will not be accepted e When an option that is only permitted in single setting is specified in a duplicated manner the last entered option will be effective Example code 0x0000 code 0x0100 code 0x0100 is effective Input file specification Describe the relocatable object file names at the end of the link command file The m
90. the currently opened project All the source files will be assembled regardless of whether they are updated or not Stop Build Ctrl Break Stops the build process being executed This button become active only while a build process is being executed Debug F5 Invokes the debugger with the specified ICE parameter file Settings Alt F7 Displays a dialog box for selecting tool options ICE parameter file Displays a dialog box for selecting an ICE parameter file Output Format Displays a dialog box for selecting an executable object file format Three types of formats are available IEEE 695 absolute object format Intel HEX format and Motorola S format The build process will generate an executable object in the format selected here HEX Converter Invokes the HEX converter to convert an absolute object into an Intel HEX object or Motorola 5 object A dialog box will appear allowing selection of an absolute object and options for the HEX converter Disassembler Invokes the disassembler to disassemble an absolute object A dialog box will appear allowing selection of an absolute object and options for the disassembler 5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE EPSON 25 CHAPTER 4 WORK BENCH 4 5 7 Window Menu Window This menu appears when an Edit window is opened Cascade Tile Horizontally Cascade Cascades the opened Edit windows T
91. updated after a break in such a way that the break address is displayed within the window If the Trace window is opened the display contents are cleared as the program is executed It is updated with the new trace information after a break If the Data window is opened the display contents are updated after a break Notes e If a break condition is met program execution is suspended and the PC will be set to the program address next to the breakpoint e When a temporary break is specified g lt address gt the multi break function is invalidated due to the hardware specification while the program is running It takes effect again after the program is sus pended at the temporary break address e The address you specified must be within the range of the program memory area available with each microcomputer model An error results if the input one is not a hexadecimal number or a valid symbol Error invalid value An error results if the limit is exceeded Error Program address out of range S5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 169 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER Gui utility Run Go menu item Go button When this menu item or button is selected the g command without temporary break is executed p Go button Run Go to Cursor menu item Go to Cursor button When this menu item or button is selected after placing the cursor to the temporary break address line in the Source window
92. 0 or 1 e One or more spaces or tabs are necessary between the instruction and the bank number Sample description code bank 1 Function Specifies an absolute bank address of a CODE section in an assembly source file The section with the bank pseudo instruction will be located at the top of the specified bank Precautions e bank is applicable to a CODE section only e When the bank pseudo instruction appears in a section a new absolute section starts at that point The section type is fixed at CODE section The bank pseudo instruction keeps its effect only in that section until the next section definer code or bss or the next location definer org align page or bank appears Example code The latest relocatable section definition bank il Starts new absolute CODE section from bank 1 bss This section is relocatable not affected by the bank pseudo instruction code This section is also relocatable not affected by the bank pseudo instruction e If the bank pseudo instruction is defined immediately after a section definer code or bss the section definer does not start a new section The bank pseudo instruction starts a new CODE section Example code This does not start a new CODE section bDank 1 This starts an absolute CODE section e If the bank pseudo instruction is defined immediately before a section definer code or bss it does not start a new section and
93. 00A MANUAL EPSON 189 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER bsyn break disable Function This command sets the break disable synchronous mode When the PC break data break register break or multi break condition is met with the Evaluation Board CPU state a pulse is output to the ICE SYNC pin However a break is not generated Format gt bsyn direct input mode Example gt DSynal Set to break disable synchronous mode Gui utility Option Mode Setting menu item When this menu item is selected a dialog box appears for setting break disable mode Select the Break Disable button in the dialog box See the be command 190 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 9 9 Program Display U unassemble Hi Function This command displays a program in the Source window after unassembling it The display con tents are as follows e Program memory address e Object code e Unassembled contents of the program Format gt u lt address gt direct input mode lt address gt Start address for display hexadecimal or symbol IEEE 695 format only Condition 0 lt address lt last program memory address H Display When the Source window is opened the display is refreshed When the Source window is closed the window automatically opens in the unassemble mode If address is not specified the program is displayed
94. 1 subroutine global INC RAH BLK1 subroutine org 0x100 1s a SP_INIT_ADDR gt gt 4 ld sph a ld a SP INIT fiDDR amp Oxf spl a Copyright C SEIKO EPSON CORP 1998 Linked with the corresponding source line C XEBC62XTESTXHAIN S 15 Error Unknown mnemonic 1s C EGC62 TEST MAIN S 14 Error Unknown label a Created preprocessed source file HRIN HS Assembly 2 error s 8 varning s m For Help press F1 n14 Co1 NUM 36 EPSON 5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 4 WORK BENCH 4 7 5 Printing The document in the Edit window can be printed out The Print Print Preview and Page Setup commands are provided in the File menu The Print button can also be used They have the same function as those of standard Windows application Select one after activating the Edit window of the document to be printed 4 8 Build Task By using the Build menu or Build toolbar the assembler linker debugger HEX converter and disassembler can be executed from the work bench In the work bench process to generate an executable object from the source files is called a build task For details of each development tool refer to the respective chapter 4 6 1 Preparing a Build Task Before starting a build task necessary source files should be prepared and tool options should be config ured 1 Create a new project Refer to Section 4 6 1 2 Select an ICE paramete
95. 1 1 01 1 n 5 BeM n MnA 1 11 1 1 0 00 n SER eS LDPX mxi 1 111 011 0 i 5 Mei XXe nq TI EO ae a OL ie sg DICITNR EC ee ROEE Saco Bac JEDE r9 p eg vv 5 M X lt I 3 0 M X 1 1 7 4 X X 2 SET F i HEEL TOS x T TT EET BST Ei a slelo o 7 FF amp i SCF Octet te SZF La AOTC MOO 02 o Ae 75 SDF mi 11 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 00 1 7 D lt 1 Decimal adjustment ON RDF 4 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 7 D lt 0 Decimal adjustment OFF DI 1 1 1 110 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 7 0 Disable interrupt INC SP 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 5 SPe SP H DEC SP 1 11 1 1 1 1 0 See Eos IT olofolol oe XP 51 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 5 SPeSP 1 MSP XP XH 111 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 seep MEET YP 11 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 5 SPeSP 1 M SP YP YH 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 SEI E CERT MERE 1 1 1 1 1 0 5 SP lt SP 1 M SP CF POP je 0 EEE S1C6200 Core CPU Clasiffication opcode Operan SuSE Code TET Te Clk Function Stack XP 111 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 5 J XP M SP SP SP 1 operation XH 111111101 0101 5 XH M SP SPeSP 1 instructions XL 1 1 11 1 1 1 01 1 1 110 5 XLe M SP SP lt SP 1 ve Ht iar ai9 voir tt 8 yre Msn sese YH 1 1 1 1 1 1 01 1 0 0 0 5 YH lt M SP SP SP 1 YL 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 111 0 0 1 5 YLeM SP SP lt SP 1 E meno
96. 15 LineInfo ld sph a Stabn 16 LineInfo ld a Ox80 amp 0xf Stabn 17 LineInfo ld spl a stabn 18 LineInfo call INIT RAM BLK1 initialize RAM block 1 Stabn 19 LineInfo LOOP Stabn 20 LineInfo call INC RAM BLKI1 increment RAM block 1 Stabn 21 LineInfo JP LOOP infinity Loop QAONUNUNUN RAM block Kk c bss org 0x000 comm RAM BLK1 4 Stabn 0 FileEnd 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 85 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER Assembly list file Assembler 62 ver x xx Relocatable List File MAIN LST Wed Apr 22 15 31 00 1998 cO 1 nA OF WN FPF WO 10 l4 12 dG 14 153 16 17 18 Lo Z0 21 gt Ene 23 24 25 260 Error file 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 0105 0106 0000 e08 feO e00 ff0 400 400 000 00 main s test program main routine S INITIAL SP ADDRESS DEFINITION SP init addr 0x80 define SP_INIT_ADDR 0x80 Pe BOOT LOOP eG Lobel INIT RAM BLK1 dlobal INC RAM BLKI1 Org 0x100 BOOT ld a SP_INIT_ADDR gt gt 4 ld sph a ld a SP_INIT_ADDR amp 0xf ld spl a call INIT_RAM_BLK1 LOOP call INC_RAM_BLK1 Jp LOOP RUKON WONUN RAM block kck k DES Org 0x000 comm RAM_BLK1 4 subroutine subroutine set SP initialize RAM block 1 increment RAM block 1 infinity loop Assembler 62 Ver x xx Error log file MAIN ERR Sun May 03 11 33 39 1998 Assembler 62 Ver x xx SEIKO EPSON CO
97. 1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION InstallShield Wizard InstallShield Wizard Complete InstallShield Wizard Complete 6 Click Finish to terminate the installer Setup has finished installing 1C62 Family Assembler Package Yer2 0 on your computer Program Menu gt inira Installer registers the WorkBench62 icon to the program Uninstall Us StartUp Settings BB MS DOS Prompt 4 QJ Windows Explorer menu To discontinue installation The dialog boxes that appear during installation have a Cancel button To discontinue installation click Cancel when a dialog box appears To uninstall the tools Use Add Remove Programs in the control panel to uninstall the tools 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION 2 3 Directories and Files after Installation The installer copies the following files in the specified directory default is C EPSON S1C62 Specified folder README TXT bin WB62 EXE AS62 EXE LK62 EXE HX62 EXE DS62 EXE DB62 EXE IEEE695 DLL HEXLIB DLL AS62 DLL CORE62 DLL ICE62 DLL MSVCRT DLL OLEPRO32 DLL SPAWNEX EXE doc English MANUAL E PDF DEV MANUAL E PDF Japanese MANUAL J PDF DEV MANUAL J PDF dev62 bin WINFOG EXE WINSOG EXE WINMDC EXE WINMLA EXE 62XXX dos ReadMe document Work bench Assembler Linker
98. 200 default 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 121 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 3 3 Start up Messages When Debugger db62 starts up it outputs the following message in the Command window Refer to the next section for details about windows Debugger for E0C62 Ver x x Copyright C SEIKO EPSON CORP 199x Connecting COMx with xxxxx baud rate done Parameter file XXXXX par Chip name EO0C62XX Mapaes oe mapsa Ge SE Sone Ske OO Ge eet Be ee a done Tee a Se cb x 59s Gis we 5 54 5 done gt 9 3 4 Hardware Check at Start up If the debugger is invoked it first performs the tests and initializing operations as follows 1 The debugger first checks to see that the ICE is connected to the system and that communication is 2 possible without any problems The following message is displayed in the Command window During test Connecting COMx with xxxxx baud rate When terminated normally Connecting COMx with xxxxx baud rate done When an error is encountered Connecting COMx with xxxxx baud rate Error The Error indicates that communication between the personal computer and ICE is not functioning properly In this case verify the following e A standard RS 232C cable is used e The COM port is correct e The baud rates on both sides are matched e The ICE s power is turned on e The ICE remains reset When the connection test terminates normally the debugger checks the contents of the p
99. 5 10 UK BRANCH OFFICE Unit 2 4 Doncastle House Doncastle Road Bracknell Berkshire RG12 8PE ENGLAND Phone 44 0 1344 381700 Fax 44 0 1344 381701 FRENCH BRANCH OFFICE 1 Avenue de l Atlantique LP 915 Les Conquerants Z A de Courtaboeuf 2 F 91976 Les Ulis Cedex FRANCE Phone 33 0 1 64862350 Fax 33 0 1 64862355 BARCELONA BRANCH OFFICE Barcelona Design Center Edificio Testa Avda Alcalde Barrils num 64 68 E 08190 Sant Cugat del Vall s SPAIN Phone 34 93 544 2490 Fax 34 93 544 2491 ASIA EPSON CHINA CO LTD 23F Beijing Silver Tower 2 North RD DongSanHuan ChaoYang District Beijing CHINA Phone 64106655 Fax 64107319 SHANGHAI BRANCH 4F Bldg 27 No 69 Gui Qing Road Caohejing Shanghai CHINA Phone 21 6485 5552 Fax 21 6485 0775 EPSON HONG KONG LTD 20 F Harbour Centre 25 Harbour Road Wanchai Hong Kong Phone 852 2585 4600 Fax 852 2827 4346 Telex 65542 EPSCO HX EPSON TAIWAN TECHNOLOGY amp TRADING LTD 10F No 287 Nanking East Road Sec 3 Taipei Phone 02 2717 7360 Telex 24444 EPSONTB Fax 02 2712 9164 HSINCHU OFFICE 13F 3 No 295 Kuang Fu Road Sec 2 HsinChu 300 Phone 03 573 9900 Fax 03 573 9169 EPSON SINGAPORE PTE LTD No 1 Temasek Avenue 36 00 Millenia Tower SINGAPORE 039192 Phone 465 337 7911 Fax 465 334 2716 SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION KOREA OFFICE 50F KLI 63 Bldg 60 Yoido dong Youngdeungpo Ku Seoul 150 763 KOREA Phone 02 784
100. 5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 4 WORK BENCH 4 3 Work Bench Windows 4 3 1 Window Configuration Menu bar Toolbar Edit window v WorkBench52 Version X Xx sub s Eie Edt View Iset Buld Toos Window Hep V Bu pelag Hael alela alz elie ICS621CP PAR Absolute Object de s 858 alam P E El test files 2 main s B Ea Gc 73 sub s Goto Label J sub s test program subroutines global RAM_BLK1 org 6x2 66 XO OO C uU fan xxx RAM block 1 initialize xx 18 global INIT RA amp H BLK1 INIT RA amp H BLK1 ld a RAH BLK1 h ld xp a ld x RAM_BLK171 set RAM_BLK1 address to x lbpx nx 8 set 6x6666 to RAM BLK1 lbpx nx 8 ret Linker 62 Uer x xx Copyright C SEIK EPSON CORP 199x Created absolute object file TEST ABS Link 8 error s 8 varning s Build Done b For Help press F1 Ln 1 Col 1 NUM Project window Output window Status bar The work bench has three types of windows Edit window Project window and Output window Edit window This window is used for editing a source file A standard text file can also be displayed in this win dow Two or more windows can be opened in the edit window area When an E0C62 assembly source file is opened the source is displayed with in colors according to the contents 51C62 instructions Black Preprocess ff pseudo instructions Dark brown Assemble pseudo instru
101. 60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CONTENTS 5 7 10 Global Declaration Pseudo Instruction global 50 5 7 11 List Control Pseudo Instructions list NOLISt eeen l 5 7 12 Source Debugging Information Pseudo Instructions stabs stabn 1 213 COMMENT Adding T UNCON aues e rara EROR E OP DIRE a 82 5 7 14 Priority of Pseudo Instructions esses eee eene ene 62 5 6 Summary of Compatibility with the Older Tool sssseeeeeeeese 83 Z9 Relocatable List 54 2D NCO OS metet E E AREE vedere DIM PU 85 Au Error Warning JMOSSQBE S anauivtaGetuitdprteminttrvHrdpspt ETATE EP nde OPERE OR EDU UU 87 VW E i coq NER 87 IN RE E E EEE EE E E EESE 88 Da PVC OOS E T 5S CHAPI RG TIN ICG M 89 OP ME QUU UD RN nn eE EENE EEEE REAN LE 89 02 1007 10817142 BUS PC eN ANE EA 89 QV NI DIM E 89 De I ON aE EEE EEEE E EE EE 90 OD ATINE M CUO REPE 9 ME IU T 94 63 Linker Command Tile uiis ceov etitm ese stances awe NEUE DER EM d SE 95 o KEY qund eee 96 OF S 0 TLC rc 97 D WE UICE NIU 98 09 Cross 205 Pile MTR 99 OA L E aE ines E E e E E N EE E E AN 100 6 11 Automatic Insertion Removal Correction of pset Instruction 102 Ol ETOT WAMING MOSS OCC R 103 REI i MT E 103 oW Aor rr
102. 62d1 82d2 802e80 82F8 82f5 85c8 85d1 85d2 G4eb G4FG 64F4 Unused firea 8082 8008f 6693 6697 6609F 80a1 880af 80b3 80bf Al 8182 8018F 6193 6197 619F 81a1 81af 81b3 81bF amp 8282 028f 6293 0297 029f 02a1 802af 82b3 02bf amp 8382 038f 6393 0397 039f 6803a1 803af 83b3 03bf 8 84582 058F 0493 8597 8059F 80hHa1 8haf 85b3 85bF 6 8fd8 80feF 8FF8 8Fff Command window set SP initialize RAI 80E8 08 8 88F 8 6 60 ial x o C C C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 e e o vo Ww CA 2 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 m o m CB C2 C2 C2 G2 e G3 Gn o o 23 2 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 rf o Cm CL CL CL Cm o7 Gm Gm o7 Uomo Gm Om Om C2 C2 C2 Cm M Cm Cm C Gm Gm o7 Gm Gm eo Un o coo o 3 G3 C3 C3 CA eo Ce o o Vowo SSO C2 2 02 C2 C3 C3 amp 5 XI ip xp a mw Register Pile E PC 82 86 A 8 B dir X 883 y SIFF SP 7d IDZC 8818 Current Code e66 LD A 8x8 Next Code e88 E o T a J o o C C2 C2 C2 C2 G2 eo 7 G3 c Vows 3 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 0D C CL CL CL CL Cm o7 Gm oo om Cm Om O2 C2 C2 C2 C20 Cm Cm C CA Cm Cm eo Gm o o wm 2 2 02 C2 C2 C2 02 D V oC C3 C2 C2 C2 G2 eG OC o oW Gn Cn C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 UD V Cm CL CL CD GL Gm eo 7o o s om Cm Cm Cm Cm C C2 Gm CO C C C CD GL 7e 7 o o oo OD cm Cm C2 Cm C2 C2 Gm D C CL CL CL Gm e 7e 7o AQOCOSOCOo7 m Cm Cm Cm Cm Cm C2 cm 1 om CB Gm Gm G
103. 80808 8 6606668 61 pay y Read Only n 9932 28 ACPX MX A 626c O0 f 661 7FF 8008 R801 9 U081 9 0080 00100 7 ss ss 72 72 2 2 EEG y 80900 8BFF B8FF Ss sss sti Write only Ome 07777774 PP PP EP a Read amp Write Area 6686 6681 66c1 60c4 60c6 80c8 66d1 66d2 88e8 acre i j aa 4 i j 82c1 82ch 02c6 82c8 62d1 62d2 62e6 62F0 62F4 0800 00850808887 77 7 7 l B4c8 hdi 8hd2 O4e 8hF8 0hF 08 018 8F 87777 77771717 Command window Unused firea 0082 008f 0093 0097 009f 00a1 08af 00b3 00bf e 88F8 T0 8 0 8 8 7 8 80880777 0182 818F 8193 8197 819f 81a1 01af 91b3 81bf GO Me es gg agaeoae escsaeosabe Used to enter debug commands and display the execution results 0282 028f 6293 8297 829f 62a1 62af 02b3 02bf 8 10 gg 888888 88885885860 0382 038f 6393 6397 639F 03a1 03af 03b3 03bf 8 20 gg 888888 8888858586 O482 048F 0493 O497 049F O4a1 04af G4b3 04bF l laa9 09000009089 GGG0080068 Grd6 Gfef BFFO OFFF 6018 8080806808 86808806863 8150 s s 2 2 2 2 7 4 2 442727777 zija BZ Ready NUM Debugger db62 2 Buttons oj o o fo Key Break button Forcibly breaks execution of the target program Load File button Reads an object file in the IEEE 695 format into the debugger Load Option button Source button Switches the display of the Source window to the source mode Unassemble button Mix button Switches the disp
104. 88 call 8x8 TM call INIT _RAM_BLK1 initialize RAt ID2C 6611 21 6166 eh pset 6x2 Current Code e68 22 6167 466 call 6x6 call INC RAH BLK1 increment RAH LD A 8x8 23 6168 886 jp 8x6 jp LOOP infinity loop E 2h gt sub s Next Code fe 25 test program subroutines LD SPH f 2 27 global RAM BLK1 a a a 53 Ix o CB C2 C2 C2 C2 ooCOoSG o a C Co Co C2 C2 C2 C2 UD a a 28 29 org 0x200 ADDR 4 Command Debugger 62 Verx xx Copyright SEIKO EPSON CORP 199x Connecting COM1 with 9688 baud rate done Parameter file C XE8C62Xdeu 62XDeu621cXIcs 21cp par Chip Name E8C621c Initlalblzp 5 252 2 aw a mmn E mia done o m C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 e GC G2 e o 2 o 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 0 dB m o C C2 C2 C2 C2 eo eo C C o s UD 0 0 0 2 02 02 02 M V C CB C2 C2 GAB o o G3 GA eo o Un 2 02 02 02 02 02 02 OM V CD C3 GC C3 C3 eo Co o VO V IS S 03 03 03 03 C3 C3 CS X o C C C2 C2 C2 C2 eo G3 o ow o C2 C2 C2 C2 02 02 02 OD gt com C XE8C62XtestXtest cmd 8 lf test abs Loading file OK gt ocn nn 0n 0n 02 C2 T0 mnn 0020050 0202020 02 Vo m 3 03 C3 G2 GA CU Gm e Un n 0n 02020202020 V Qoeoqaooooo SS 3 2 02 02 02 2 2 C2 amp V 9 039 3 3 GA GAB eoo wv wn 02 02002020 02 02 AO Vo 90 2 0 GA GAB eoo GA s wu wn 0200000002050 D gt V C C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 eoo COo7 OFWXW o Co C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 U
105. AL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE Output source file test ms when cu is specified Disassembler 62 Ver x xx Assembly source file TEST MS Mon May 04 11 51 08 1998 CHAPTER 8 DISASSEMBLER ORG 0X100 LD A 0X8 LD SPH A LD A 0X0 LD SPL A PSET 0X2 CALL LABEL1 LABEL3 PSET 0X2 CALL LABEL2 JP LABEL3 ORG 0X200 LABEL1 LD A 0X0 LD XP A LD X 0X0 LBPX MX 0X0 LBPX MX 0X0 RET LABEL2 LD A 0X0 LD XP A LD X 0X0 LD A 0X0 SCF ACPX MX A ACPX MX A ACPX MX A ADC MX A RET S5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 117 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 8 DISASSEMBLER 8 6 Error Warning Messages 8 6 1 Errors When an error occurs the disassembler immediately terminates the processing after displaying an error message It will not output a source file The disassembler error messages are given below Error message Description Cannot create file kind file FILE NAME gt The file cannot be created Cannot open file kind file FILE NAME gt The file cannot be opened Cannot read file kind file lt FILE NAME gt The file cannot be read Cannot write file kind file FILE NAME gt Data cannot be written to the file Illegal file name FILE NAME The specified input file name is incorrect Illegal HEX data format The input file is not an Intel HEX format file Illegal offset address offset address gt The specified address is invalid Illegal option
106. AMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 4 WORK BENCH Shortcut menu The Edit window supports a short cut menu that appears by clicking the right mouse button on the Edit window It can also be done by pressing the Short cut menu key while the Edit window is active if the key is available on the keyboard It contains the editing menu items descried above so you can select an edit command using this menu 35 main s Pile Es Goto Label b nain s test program main routine xxxx THITIAL SP ADDRESS DEFINITION xxxx fidefine Sie au sP init addr 6x88 ut xxxxx BOOT LOOP x op global IHI Paste subroutine global INC Find subroutine ind B1 Replace Goto a 5 sph w Toolbar a SP IHIT ADDREBXF 4 7 4 Tag Jump Function When assembler syntax errors occur during assembling their error messages are displayed in the Out put window In this case you can go to the source line in which an error has occurred by double clicking the error message in the Output window However this function is available only when the error message contains a source line number WorkBench62 Version X XX main s File Edit View Insert Build Tools Window Help Dae e alele Sle e Kea icse21cP PaR Absolute Object de s 938 ajasin main s test program main routine x INITIAL SP ADDRESS DEFINITION sex ftdefine SP INIT RDDR 0x88 SP init addr 8x88 xxx BOOT LOOP sss global INIT RAH BLK
107. BSS is error All symbol support commands Error this chip not support this function The chip with the used parameter file cannot support this option function lo Error undefined code detected Undefined code is detected when loading file rp Error Incorrect register name use PC A B X Y F Command warning Warning read only address can t write An invalid register name is specified br This data address is read only cannot be written to de EPSON International Sales Operations AMERICA EPSON ELECTRONICS AMERICA INC HEADQUARTERS 150 River Oaks Parkway San Jose CA 95134 U S A Phone 1 408 922 0200 Fax 1 408 922 0238 SALES OFFICES West 1960 E Grand Avenue EI Segundo CA 90245 U S A Phone 1 310 955 5300 Fax 1 310 955 5400 Central 101 Virginia Street Suite 290 Crystal Lake IL 60014 U S A Phone 1 815 455 7630 Fax 1 815 455 7633 Northeast 301 Edgewater Place Suite 120 Wakefield MA 01880 U S A Phone 1 781 246 3600 Fax 1 781 246 5443 Southeast 3010 Royal Blvd South Suite 170 Alpharetta GA 30005 U S A Phone 1 877 EEA 0020 Fax 1 770 777 2637 EUROPE EPSON EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH HEADQUARTERS Riesstrasse 15 80992 Munich GERMANY Phone 49 0 89 14005 0 Fax 49 0 89 14005 110 SALES OFFICE Altstadtstrasse 176 51379 Leverkusen GERMANY Phone 49 0 2171 5045 0 Fax 49 0 2171 504
108. Break button 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 177 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER bd data break i Function This command sets or clears data break This command allows you to specify the following break conditions 1 Memory address to be read or written one location 2 Data pattern to be read or written bit mask possible 3 Memory read write three conditions read write or read or write The program breaks after completing a memory access that satisfies the above conditions Format 1 bd address data lt option gt direct input mode 2 bd J guidance mode Data break set status 1 set 2 clear i lt 1 252 Command is completed when 2 is selected ADDR Old address lt address gt DATA Old data lt data gt R W Old option lt option gt gt lt address gt The specified address hexadecimal or symbol IEEE 695 format only lt data gt Data pattern hexadecimal or binary with B suffix can be input for the bits to be masked option Memory read write option r w or Condition 0 lt address lt last data memory address 0 data Oxf i Examples Format 1 gt bd 0020 5 WA Sets a data break condition so that the program breaks when 5 is written to address 0x20 The direct input mode cannot clear the set condition Format 2 gt bd ADDR 020 DATA 5 R W W Currently set condition l set 2 clear zd xd dad set is sele
109. By using this symbol you can describe an instruction to access the RAM Difference between comm and lcomm The comm pseudo instruction and the lcomm pseudo instruction are exactly the same in function but they do differ from each other in the scope of the symbols they create The symbols created by the comm pseudo instruction become global symbols which can be referred to externally from other modules however the file to be referred to needs to be specified by the global pseudo instruction The symbols created by the lcomm pseudo instruction are local symbols which cannot be referred to from other modules Precaution The comm and lcomm pseudo instructions can only be described in BSS sections 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 79 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 7 10 Global Declaration Pseudo Instruction global Instruction format global Symbol Symbol Symbol to be defined in the current file or symbol already defined in other module e One or more spaces or tabs are necessary between the instruction and the symbol Sample description global GENERAL SUB1 Function Makes global declaration of a symbol The declaration made in a file with a symbol defined converts that symbol to a global symbol which can be referred to from other modules Prior to making refer ence declaration has to be made by this instruction on the side of the file that is going to make the reference
110. C flags binary after cycle execution MemOP Read write operation denoted by R or W at the beginning of data accessed data memory address hexadecimal and data hexadecimal OtherOP Interrupt process INT1 stack INT2 vector fetch 1 When Trace window is opened When the td command is input without lt num gt the Trace window redisplays the latest data when the td command is input with lt num gt the trace data starting from numo is displayed in the Trace window The display contents of the Trace window is updated after an execution of the target program All trace data can be displayed by scrolling the window Trace Iof x fetch register trace data CODE B 5 Y IDZC Hem P ther P eB8 LDA 6x8 863 ZFF 8618 fe LD SPH A 863 ZFF 8618 eb LDA 8x8 863 ZFF 8618 FFG LD SPL A HH3 ZFF 8B18 eh2 PSET 8x2 HH3 ZFF 8618 hHH CALL HxH HH3 ZFF HUHiB WUBH F 1 WB E H UWUWB D 6 eBH LDA HxH HH3 ZFF 8618 e8H LD P A 863 ZFF 001A b60 LD 5 HxH HBH ZFF 001A 98H LBP Hk 6x6 6203 HH1 ZFF 0010 UBHBBH8 H UWVBHI H 900 LBP MA 6x8 8264 BBS 8616 W H2 H WhES 8 Sa T2 Z2 Ga Z2 Z2 mn GO 020 m I F f f F F F T F F F f S5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 205 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 2 When Trace window is closed When the td command is input without num the debugger displays 11 lines of the latest trace data in the Command window When the td command is input with num t
111. C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 8 DISASSEMBLER 8 5 Disassembling Output The data code mnemonics are restored from the target code As for the branch instructions a label will be automatically generated like LXXXX where XXXX denotes a hexadecimal number string org pseudo instruction is used to specify the starting location of each code block The following shows examples of disassembled sources Sample outputs Absolute list file test abs Linker 62 ver x xx Absolute list file TEST ALS Sun May 03 14 16 16 1998 Ls main s ae test program main routine ET 4 54 wv INITIAL SP ADDRESS DEFINITION ws 6 define SP_INIT_ADDR 0x80 SP init addr 0x80 Ti 8 BOOT LOOP ge dlobal INIT RAM BLKI1 Subroutine 10 global INC_RAM_BLK1 subroutine Il 123 org 0x100 1 93 BOOT 14 0100 e08 Jt a SP INIT ADDR 4 Set SP ot OL01 fed ld sph a 16 0102 e00 la a SP_INIT_ADDR amp 0xf 17 0103 ffO ld spl a 18 0104 e42 pset 0x2 194 0105 400 call INIT RAM BLK1 initialize RAM block 1 20 LOOP 21 0106 e42 pset 0x2 22 0107 406 call INC_RAM_BLK1 increment RAM block 1 233 0108 006 Jp LOOP infinity loop 24 Sub s 25 test program subroutines 26 21 global RAM BLKI1 28 29 OB 0x200 30 3l iso RAM block 1 initialize 32 RET global INIT RAM BLKI1 34 INIT RAM BLK1 35 0200 e00 ld a RAM BLK1 h 36 0201 e80 la xp 37 0202 b00 ld XxX RAM BLK1 l set RAM BLK1 address to x
112. CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER This chapter will describe the functions of the Assembler as62 and grammar involved with the creation of assembly source files 5 1 Functions The Assembler as62 is a tool that constitutes the core of this software package It assembles translates assembly source files and creates object files in the machine language The functions and features of the assembler are summarized below e Allows absolute and relocatable sections mixed in one source e Allows to develop programs in multiple sources by creating relocatable object files that can be com bined by the linker e Can add source debugging information for source debugging on the debugger The assembler provides the following additional functions as well as the basic assembly functions e Macro definition and macro invocation e Definition of Define name e Operators e nsertion of other file e Conditional assembly e Conversion of old format source files created for the asm62XX into the current format The assembler processes source files in two stages preprocessing stage and assembling stage The preprocessing stage expands the additional function part described in the source file to mnemonics that can be assembled and delivers them to a temporary file preprocessed file The assembling stage as semble the preprocessed file to convert the source codes into the machine codes 5 2 Input Output Files Assembly source file F 73
113. Create necessary source files and add them into the project test files MaN Sample list in the Project window i zub The added source files are listed in the project window Double clicking a listed source file name opens the edit window 3 2 4 Configuration of Tool Options The work bench supports all the start up options of each tool and they can be selected in a dialog box A make process for generating an executable object will be configured based on the settings In addition to option selection command files for the linker and debugger can be configured here To set tool options 1 Select Setting from the Build menu A dialog box appears Settings Assembler Linker Debugger Hex Converter Defines Default Tes subs Mao main s Ma Cancel Apply Help 2 Configure options if necessary Check box items can be selected by clicking Items in the list can be toggled or entered by double clicking Settings Assembler Linker Debugger Hex Converter List file Defines r file Default Ma Tes Mn Bs Tes LI man Ma Ho Ho Refer to Chapter 4 Work Bench for details of the Settings dialog box 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 11 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 3 SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT PROCEDURE 3 2 5 Building an Executable Object To make an executable object file 1 Select Build from the Build menu or click the Build button FE Build bu
114. Ctrl F Replace Ctril H Go To Cile New Ctrl N Creates a new document source header or project Open Ctrl O Opens a document source header or project Close Closes the active Edit window Open Workspace Opens a project Close Workspace Closes the currently opened project Save Ctrl S Saves the document in the active Edit window to the file Save As Saves the document in the active Edit window with another file name Save All Saves the documents of all Edit windows and the project information to the respective files Print Ctrl P Prints the document in the active Edit window Print Preview Displays a print image of the document in the active Edit window Page Setup Displays a dialog box for selecting paper and printer Exit Terminates the work bench Undo Ctrl Z Undoes the previous executed operation in the Edit window Cut Ctrl X Cuts the selected text in the Edit window to the clipboard Copy Ctrl C Copies the selected text in the Edit window to the clipboard Paste Ctrl V Pastes the text copied to the the Edit window Select All Ctrl A Selects all text in the active Edit window Find Ctrl F Finds the specified word in the active Edit window Replace Ctrl H Replaces the specified words in the active Edit window Go To Ctrl G Jumps to the specified line or label
115. D o C C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 eoo OoOF WS Ww Ca C2 02 02 C2 C02 02 C2 OO OQoooo SSS A 2 02 020 02 02 2 0 o V E C3 GC C3 C3 o C o X o Vw S 02 02 02 02 2 C2 C2 IIU 3 Ready NUM Refer to Chapter 9 Debugger for operating the debugger 38 EPSON 5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 4 WORK BENCH 4 6 4 Executing Other Tools The HEX converter and disassembler can be invoked independently HEX converter To invoke the HEX converter select HEX converter from the Tools menu or click the HEX convert button EET HEX convert button Then select an absolute object file to be converted in the Hex data convert dialog box Hex data convert Look in C3 test EN Test abs Files of type Absolute Object File abs Cancel ICE Parameter file ICSB21CP PAR Output Format Intel Hex v Qutput error log file Do not fill room with OxFF This dialog box allows selection of the HEX converter options ICE Parameter file list box Select an ICE parameter file from the pull down list Output Format list box Select an output format from between Intel HEX and Motorola S Output error log file check box Select this option to generate the error log file of the HEX converter Do not fill room with OxFF check box Select this option when not filling the unused program area with OxFF After selecting an absolute object and options click the
116. E CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 7 2 Define Instruction define Any substitute character string can be left defined as a Define name by the define instruction define and the details of that definition can be referred to from various parts of the program using the Define name Instruction format define lt Define name gt lt Define name gt lt Substitute character string gt e The first character is limited to a z A Z and _ e The second and the subsequent characters can use a z A Z 0 9 and __ e Uppercase and lowercase characters are discriminated define itself is not case sensitive e One or more spaces or tabs are necessary between the instruction and the Define name Substitute character string e The usable characters are limited to a z A Z 0 9 and _ They must not contain any space or comma Values mnemonics labels register names and expressions using operators can also be specified e Uppercase and lowercase characters are discriminated e One or more spaces or tabs are necessary between the Define name and the substitute character string e The substitute character string can be omitted In that case NULL is defined in lieu of the substitute character string It can be used for the conditional assembly instruction Sample definitions define define define define define TYPE1 L1 LABEL 01 Xreg X CONST DATA1 DATAZ2 2 BtoA a b Error Comma cannot be use
117. EDDIE 119 Ol JECOD EN EUM Rei M LM M cece 119 22 Input Output FUES accentus raae eus US ists seu EAE UE 119 AURA MET TCS ET TE E 119 De OIE a NNI mnaucenceteebermmmncsdaimneinm escort 120 v dE mco HH 121 9 3 1 Start up Format aus eoe eran rn rrt d ra o ku vd ee Eh xe e ku ad Iun 121 Ro IST OP UP ODOTE PRIOR TIEN D TS 121 LURS S SUP MESAP CS EIE ET 122 9 3 4 Hardware Check ut Start Up ausetessidectixtestusunder idisse csset eti VP pP MO CHR Ea ERR 122 VA Method of Terminati t E 123 LU SB UI mm 124 9 4 1 Basic Structure of Window usosececcscisissestonbe desides ste sos eogEeieddetusrontadbecept at un P nEeus 124 9 4 2 Command Window swmsivisinccvsciwavnesuiisoevadtiusinitestultcssiawestvevssuvbitenumndennintscencones 126 9 4 3 Source WINdOW PN m 127 944 Data WNO OW ERERCNRR M 129 VAS TIT CLITA TUI YEN mm 129 9 4 6 Trace WindoOW iss cnsicnscomsnewonsnxwonwstteissawsewdeicsennincsnlisbendankewsesvaiideicvansesbinnvinietesiies 130 T TOON D costar DDR E E R 131 DDS TOOL Bar SMC VC a nera aE E FF PEN 131 YIA P cuori 131 9 5 3 Load File and Load Option Buttons eese 131 9 5 4 Source Mix and Unassemble Buttons c oo 131 9 5 5 Go Go to Cursor Go from Reset Step Next and Reset Buttons aeesivsci erre treni REC E vaa pad eto paie Eau eodd pa Rv Fed ow ror ETE UR 131 DOCG DOPO soient ii HERE Fed D miei so
118. ER PACKAGE CHAPTER 6 LINKER 6 7 Symbol File The symbol file serves to refer to the labels defined in all the modules and their address information It is delivered if the s start up option is specified The file format is a text file and its file name is File name gt sym File name gt is the same as that of the output object file Sample symbol file Linker 62 ver x xx Symbol file TEST SYM Sun May 03 14 16 16 1998 CODE section Labels or TEST ABS Address Type File Symbol OxOIDO Local MAIN O i BOOT 0x0206 Global V SUBR O INC RAM BLK1 0x0200 Global SUB O Lii INIT RAM BLK1 0x0106 Local MAIN O LOOP BSS section labels of TEST ABS Address Type File Symbol 0x000 Global MAIN O RAM_BLK1 Contents of symbol file Symbol Indicates all the defined labels in in alphabetical order Address Indicates the absolute address defined for the label Type Indicates the scope of the label Global or Local File Indicates the object file in which the labal has been defined S5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 97 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 6 LINKER 6 8 Absolute List File The absolute list file is an assembly source file that carries the absolute addresses and object codes added to the first half of each line It is delivered only when the l option is specified Its file format is a text file and the file name is file name als The file name is the same as that of the
119. Family Assembler Package Ver2 on your computer To continue click Next InstallShield Wizard Choose Destination Location Select folder where Setup will install files Setup will install S1C62 Family Assembler Package Ver2 0 in the following folder To install to this folder click Next To install to a different folder click Browse and select another folder C EPSON S1C62 Browse InstallShield Destination Folder InstallShield Wizard Setup Status 51C52 Family Assembler Package Ver2 0 Setup is performing the requested operations Installing C NEPSON S1C62 dev62 bin MFC42 DLL 13 lrstallShreld 1 Start up Windows 95 or Windows NT 4 0 When Windows has already activated terminate all the programs activated 2 Insert the CD ROM into the CD ROM drive and display its contents 3 Start up the Setup exe by double clicking the icon Welcome 4 Click Next gt to continue installation Choose Destination Location A dialog box appears for specifying the installation directory 5 Click Next gt if the default directory C EPSON S1C62 is not changed to another directory To install the tools to another directory Open the Choose Folder dialog box by clicking Browse and then enter the path name or choose directory Close the dialog box by clicking OK and then click Next gt The installation starts after this selection EPSON S5U
120. ILL eT P R 56 dO VEDI NOES rE t era mutauit EI Di T T PPAR EAEE 56 SNNT IPIE TM T 3 ORE niri B 56 CIR OTS NEN Em Tt 56 2 2 40 Location Counter Symbol 9 siscriancossecin mora bb ttt E tu ps rvE RUE VPE AR 60 30 PCCM XI mc 61 5 6 1 Definition of SO GO eriniki sesioa ia aeieeiaii ee isdi Reit 6l 5 0 2 Absolute and Relocatable Sections sivcssvesiesiveseiedoeesensePdaiseesnveriadavvaecesscavens 61 2 0 9 Sample Definition Of Sections aussen ee tuus uisu Era eR LEHRER D FRE TER Kon 62 5 7 Assembler PF SCUGOANSITUCIIONS iicet cit YE TPENEN ea Urea a iE 63 5 7 1 Include Instruction finclude sees 64 2 242 Define Insiructi n CROIRE os atout restoereE tex Enbe eps en aU E ertsi ariasi 65 5 7 3 Macro Instructions fmacro fendm essen 67 5 7 4 Conditional Assembly Instructions ifdef else endif ifndef Helse Yendif eeeesssssss 69 5 7 5 Section Defining Pseudo Instructions code bss eeeeeeescss 71 5 7 6 Location Defining Pseudo Instructions org bank page align 2 5 7 7 Symbol Defining Pseudo Instruction set ccccccccecseesseesseesseesseessessssenss 77 5 7 6 Data Defining Pseudo Instruction codeword eese 78 5 7 9 Area Securing Pseudo Instructions comm lcomm eese 79 iv EPSON 5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C
121. L Shift left 9 lt lt SHR Shift right gt gt HIGH High order 8 bits gt h LOW Low order 8 bits gt A Logical operators Old Meaning New AND Logical and gt amp OR Logical or gt XOR Logical exclusive or gt A NOT Logical negation gt a Relation operators Old Meaning New EQ Equal to gt NE Not equal to l LT Less than LE Less than or equal to lt GT Greater than gt GE Greater than or equal 3 gt Pseudo instructions Old Meaning New CALLM Optimized call 9 call instruction JPM Optimized jump jp instruction EQU Fixed constant symbol define SET Redefinable constant symbol set DW Data definition codeword ORG Address location definition 9 org BANK Bank location definition bank PAGE Page location definition page SECTION Section alignment gt align 16 END End definition Ignore everything below END MACRO ENDM Macro definition macro endm LOCAL Local symbol declaration none will be removed Location counter gt 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 83 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 9 Relocatable List File The relocatable list file is an assembly source file that carries assembled results offset addresses and object codes added to the first half of each line It is delivered only when the start up option l is specified Its file format is a text file and the file name File name lst The File name gt is the same
122. LER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER e Commands that replace existing data after confirmation The commands that rewrite memory or register contents one by one provide the option of skipping guidance do not modify the contents returning to the immediately preceding guidance or terminat ing during the input session Enter key Skips input lil P Returns to the immediately preceding guidance qa key eee Terminates the input session Input example gt de Command to modify data memory Data enter address 0 l Inputs the start address 0000 A 1 J Modifies address 0x0000 to 1 0001 A J Returns to the immediately preceding address 0000 1 091 Inputs address 0x0000 back again 0001 A 0002 A 0001 A q Terminates the input session gt Numeric data format of parameter For numeric values to be accepted as a parameter they must be input in hexadecimal numbers for almost all commands However some parameters accept decimal or binary numbers The following characters are valid for specifying numeric data Hexadecimal 0 9 a f A F Decimal 0 9 Binary 0 1 is used to mask bits when specifying a data pattern Specification with a symbol For address specifications symbols defined in the source can also be used However it is necessary to load an absolute object file that contains debug information Symbols should be used as follows Global symbol lt symbol name gt e g
123. MF1121 03a EPSON CMOS 4 BIT SINGLE CHIP MICROCOMPUTER S5U1C62000A Manual S1C60 62 Family Assembler Package SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION NOTICE No part of this material may be reproduced or duplicated in any form or by any means without the written permission of Seiko Epson Seiko Epson reserves the right to make changes to this material without notice Seiko Epson does not assume any liability of any kind arising out of any inaccuracies contained in this material or due to its application or use in any product or circuit and further there is no representation that this material is applicable to products requiring high level reliability such as medical products Moreover no license to any intellectual property rights is granted by implication or otherwise and there is no representation or warranty that anything made in accordance with this material will be free from any patent or copyright infringement of a third party This material or portions thereof may contain technology or the subject relating to strategic products under the control of the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Law of Japan and may require an export license from the Ministry of International Trade and Industry or other approval from another government agency Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation U S A PC AT and IBM are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation U S A All other product name
124. O 150 UE TE EA EN E AEA 153 To onmid Ro FONDO rrtt ETE A NE EE NA 154 S Command LST C sia oi eee elo en 154 9 9 2 Reference for Each Command vcwsvscxssusrncaneseusedssiussribaseservaudupionidarsadssadsnc 155 9 9 3 Program Memory Operation iecore i irt rar rra eda ri PER Ra ER ERE FREE VERE un 156 as assemble mnemonic eese eene 156 pe prosram melhory enter ieseecsvevuvescu vis bur PEE VOX iine 158 pf program memory fill 1ussssuciesekes on uuu vE veUdO uoa 20bc ade rash Satu DER RKcE 159 pm program memory move eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eene 160 9294 Data Memory ODOFGOR xoi benpfisk esk ek PEEN SEXE E Hain DA EEEE 161 dd adia RODEO ixctincstectartuna gitar bn REPE EE EDU VENUE 161 de data memory enter iaisseevvuseusncte esie id Tr Rex va etre EU Ra e PED 163 df data memory fill m Tc 165 dm data memory MOVE asesexsuxvunsecttencambs tu Ne E edat ati rii Et DENNA 166 VER dire MT 167 VL regisier display aoseseupbertubi uk dst PERDITA VOpiSPER EUR ERAN DRE 167 UE PIT UII SCL e 166 DOG PITOBFOBEXOGHIQOEH sqscentess enirn EPEEER Ex C paS E ENEE 169 OD T 169 DE 20 aller reset CP D itera waren ocu ee CHR uas uausuaGuasannvene susie 171 E O EEE EE O E A T E AE T 172 TEES a CNET C 173 I ME UP CY T ee eT re eee One neo Sener on ee en Seen 174 PSE reset CPU einernie iin n E Eisa KENES 174 AUN m7 pi AE E ne eeeT Terre rrr TTT ren errr e tT arr eer 175 Dp
125. OOT C EOC62 TEST MAIN S 100 LOOP C EOC62 TEST MAIN S 106 gt In format 1 all the defined symbols are displayed in alphabetical order Global symbols are dis played first then local symbols Shown to right to each symbol is the address that is defined in it Format 2 gt sy SRA INC RAM BLK1 206 INIT RAM BLK1 200 RAM BLK1 0 gt In format 2 the debugger displays global symbols that contain the character string specified by lt keyword gt Format 3 gt sy B4 BOOT C EOC62 TEST MAIN S 100 gt In format 3 the debugger displays local symbols that contain the character string specified by lt keyword gt When local symbols are displayed and the source file name in which the symbol is defined are added t Notes e The symbol list will be sorted by letter order if no option is added If the option lt a gt is added the symbol list will be sorted by address e The symbol list can only be displayed when the object file in IEEE 695 format has been read e The specification of keyword conforms to which defined for assembler tools Gui utility None 194 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 9 11 Load File If load file Hi Function This command loads an object file in IEEE 695 format into the debugger i Format 1 gt If file name gt direct input mode 2 gt If guidance mode File Name file name gt gt lt file nam
126. OP e 20 call IHC RAM BLET1 increment RAM block 1 21 ip LOOP infinity loop 22 fo ixxxxx RAM black xxx 24 bss 25 org x agg 26 COMM HAM BLK1 4 Note Source codes can be displayed only when an absolute object file that contains source debug informa tion has been loaded GUI utility View Program Source Display menu item Source button When this menu item or button is selected the Source window opens or activates and displays the program from the current PC address Source button 192 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE m mix i Function CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER This command displays the unassembled result of the program and the contents of the program source file in the Source window The display contents are as follows e Line number e Program memory address e Object code e Unassembled contents of the program e Source code Format gt m lt address gt direct input mode lt address gt Start address for display hexadecimal or symbol IEEE 695 format only Condition 0 lt address lt last program memory address Display When the Source window is opened the display is refreshed When the Source window is closed the window automatically opens in the mix mode If lt address gt is not specified the program is displayed from the current PC address by default if lt address gt is specified it is displayed from the specified address
127. R PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 9 6 Program Execution g go Hi Function This command executes the target program from the current PC position i Format gt g lt address gt direct input mode lt address gt Temporary break addresses hexadecimal or symbol IEEE 695 format only Condition 0 lt address lt last program memory address i Operation The target program is executed from the address indicated by the PC Program execution is continued until it is made to break for one of the following causes e The set break condition is met e The Key Break button is clicked or the Esc key is pressed e The break or reset switch on the ICE is pushed If address is specified the program execution will be suspended after executing the instruction at the specified address gt g 1a0 Executes the program from the current PC address to address Ox 1a0 Li Display In the initial debugger settings the on the fly function is turned on During program execution the PC content in the Register window is updated in real time every 0 5 seconds by the on the fly function If the Register window is closed the PC content is displayed in the Command window The on the fly function can be turned off by the otf command In this case the Register window is updated after a break The execution time or execution steps set by the tim command are displayed in the Command window after a break The Source window is
128. RP 1998 Copyright C Created preprocessed source file MAIN MS Created relocatable list file MAIN LST Created error log file MAIN ERR Created relocatable object file MAIN O Assembly 0 error s 0 warning s 86 EPSON 5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 11 Error Warning Messages 5 11 1 Errors When an error occurs no object file will be generated The assembler error messages are delivered displayed in the following format Source file name Line number Error Error message Example TEST S 431 Error Illegal syntax Some error messages are displayed without a line number The assembler error messages are given below Error message Description Cannot open file kind file FILE NAME gt The specified file cannot be opened Cannot read file kind file lt FILE NAME gt The specified file cannot be read Cannot write file kind file FILE NAME gt Data cannot be written to the file Division by zero The divisor in the expression is O Illegal syntax The statement has a syntax error Macro parameter range macro parameter range The number of macro parameters has exceeded the limit exceeded CODE section address overlaps with CODE The address is duplicated section lt address gt Multiple statements on the same line Two or more statements were described in one line Nestin
129. Specify the address used for the first org instruction in the disassembled source If this option is not specified the disassembled source will begin with address 0 After selecting an executable object and options click the Open button The disassembler starts up and converts the selected object into the source file The messages delivered from the disassembler are displayed in the Output window 40 EPSON 5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 4 WORK BENCH 4 9 Tool Option Settings The development tools have startup options that can be specified when invoking them These settings can be made in the Settings dialog box that appears by selecting Settings from the Build menu Settings Assembler Linker Debugger Hex Converter Default No C sub s Ma LI main z Ma Cancel Apply Help Click the tool name tab to view option settings of each tool Clicking the OK button updates option setting information in the project and then closes the dialog box To continue to select other tool options click the Apply button This does not close the dialog box Clicking the Cancel button closes the dialog box 4 9 1 Assembler Options Settings Assembler Linker Debugger Hex Converter Defines Mo r file Default Mn Tes subs Ma Mo Ho LI main z Ma Mo Mn Cancel Apply Help In this dialog the following four assembler options can be selected Error
130. UAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 7 7 Symbol Defining Pseudo Instruction set Instruction format set Symbol 5 Value Symbol Symbols for value reference e The Ist character is limited to a z A Z and e The 2nd and the subsequent character can use a z A Z 0 9 and _ e Uppercase and lowercase are discriminated e One or more spaces or tabs are necessary between the instruction and the symbol Value Value specification e Only decimal binary and hexadecimal numbers can be described e The values that can grammatically be specified are from 0 to 65 535 Oxffff One or more spaces tabs or a comma are necessary between the instruction and the value Sample description Set DATAl 0x20 set DATA Oxf2 Function Defines a symbol for a constant value Precaution When the defined symbol is used as an operand the defined value is referred as is Therefore if the value exceeds the valid range of the operand an error will result Example set DATAl 0OxfO0 ld x DATA1 OK ld y DATA1 OK ld a DATA1 Error 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 77 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 7 8 Data Defining Pseudo Instruction codeword codeword pseudo instruction Instruction format codeword lt Data gt lt Data gt lt Data gt lt Data gt 12 bit data e Only decimal binary and hexadecimal numbers can be described
131. a on the Data window place the cursor at the front of the data to be modified or double click the data and then type a hexadecimal character 0 9 a f Data in the address will be modified with the entered number and the cursor will move to the next address This allows successive modification of a series of addresses 9 4 5 Register Window 1 Displaying register contents and fetched code The Register window displays the contents of the program counter PC A register B register X register Y register stack pointer SP and flags I D Z and C The currently fetched instruction at the PC address and the next one are also displayed Updating the display IDZG 8818 The display is updated when registers are dumped rd command when Current Code eB8 register data is modified rs command when the CPU is reset rst com LD A Hx8 mand or after program execution g gr s or n command is completed Next Code feB When the on the fly function is enabled the PC address is updated in real LD SPH f time at 0 5 second intervals while the program is being executed Other contents are left unchanged until the program is stopped by a break 2 Direct modification of register contents The Register window allows direct modification of register contents To modify data on the Regis ter window select highlight the data to be modified and type a hexadecimal number 0 9 a f then press Enter The register data will
132. ad i Function This command loads program to ICE s emulation memory from the ROM at the ICE ROM socket Format rp J direct input mode i Notes e An error results if high and or low ROM chips are not installed and so the program is not loaded to the emulation memory Error no low ROM Error no high ROM Error no high and low ROM e An error results when an undefined code is detected and the execution is terminated Error undefined code detected GUI utility None S5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 197 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER VD ROM program verify Function This command verifies the contents of the ICE emulation memory and the ROM at the ICE ROM socket i Format gt Vp direct input mode Notes e An error results if high and or low ROM chips are not installed Error no low ROM Error i no high ROM Error no high and low ROM e If there is any non agreeing data it ROM address ROM contents emulation memory contents is displayed in the Command window gt vpa Rom verifying NG Rom verify Errors EFE EFC 0300 OFF OEC gt This command just verifies the contents of the ICE emulation memory and the ROM so no error results if an undefined code exists either in the emulation memory or the ROM It is checked when loading program from ROM by rp command e If many non agreeing data are detected the display can be interrupted by pressing the Esc
133. address Default 0x0 File names Absolute object file ABS or L H HEX ICE parameter file PAR Development Tools The file cannot be created The file cannot be opened The file cannot be read Data cannot be written to the file The specified input file name is incorrect The input file is not an Intel HEX format file The specified address is invalid An illegal option is specified ICE parameter file is not specified Cannot secure memory space Two or more file names with the same extension have been specified The last one is used Debugger db62 1 Outline This software performs debugging by controlling the ICE hardware tool Commands that are used frequently such as break and step are registered on the tool bar minimizing the necessary keyboard operations Moreover sources registers and command execution Development Tools Start up Command Usage Usage db62 parameter file name gt startup option Options command file comX X 1 4 specifies a command file com port default coml results can be displayed in multiple windows with resultant p baud rate 1200 4800 9600 19200 default increased efficiency in the debugging tasks Window Ej Db62 Data PIIE3 File Run Break Trace View Option Window Help So rce in do u WI W e eS EJ gt gt 2 M 9 Sjel ajaja elel Displays programs with unassem
134. am counter is set to 0x150 Format 2 bm Combined break None l set 2 clear iud dad 1 set is selected PC v DOO PC condition is input ADDR Euer 80 1 Data memory address is input DATA Aa Data pattern is input R W Fad masks the condition A re B 6 1 Register condition is input FI Tad ET Acl EZ 1H EC Kel X Kad Y 12 0 1 bm PC 0100 ADDR 080 DATA A R W Ree B20 OC CYXXL20 XIALSTIT B 1 set 2 clear 2 Qe 4c 2oelear is selected gt 184 EPSON 5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER Ll Notes For the first time this command is executed no item can be skipped because no default value is set A multiple break will occur when all the conditions for the PC data RAM access and register values coincide The previously set PC break data break and register break conditions are cleared by the bm com mand Also the multiple break setting is cleared when the bp bd and or br conditions are set after the bm condition is set An error results if you input the item name other than one listed below when using the direct input mode Error Incorrect identifier use PC ADDR DATA OPT A B X Y F You can use the direct input mode to set multiple break condition at a time or change one or several items for multiple break setting In guidance mode the following keyboard inputs have special meaning qe Command is te
135. ame function when the n command is executed Command File This menu item reads a command file and executes the debug commands written in that file It performs the same function when the com command is executed Reset CPU This menu item resets the CPU It performs the same function when the rst command is executed 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 133 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 6 4 Break Menu Break point Set Data Break Register Break Multiple Break Break All Clear 9 6 5 Trace Menu race Area Trace Condition Trace Search Trace File 9 6 6 View Menu Lommand Program k Data Dump Register Trace w Toolbar w Status Bar Breakpoint Set This menu item displays sets or clears PC breakpoints using a dialog box It performs the same function as executing the bp command Data Break This menu item displays sets or clears data break conditions using a dialog box It performs the same function as executing the bd command Register Break This menu item displays sets or clears register break conditions using a dialog box It performs the same function as executing the br command Multiple Break This menu item displays sets or clears multiple break conditions using a dialog box It performs the same function as executing the bm command Break All Clear This menu item clears all break conditions It
136. anceled by entering only the Enter key and nothing else Notes e The addresses specified here must be within the range of the program memory area available with each microcomputer model An error results if the input one is not a hexadecimal number or not a valid symbol Error invalid value An error results if the limit is exceeded Error Program address out of range e An error results if the start address is larger than the end address Error i end address lt Start address e When the contents of the program memory is modified using the pf command the contents of the Source window are updated automatically e Although the contents of the unassemble display are modified by rewriting code those of source display remain unchanged Gui utility None 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 159 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER pm program memory move Function This command copies the content of a specified program memory area to another area Format 1 gt pm lt address1 gt lt address2 gt lt address3 gt direct input mode 2 gt pm guidance mode Start address lt address1 gt End address lt address2 gt Destination address lt address3 gt gt address1 Start address of source area to be copied from hexadecimal or symbol IEEE 695 format only lt address2 gt End address of source area to be copied from hexadecimal or symbol IEEE 695 format only l
137. apping by linking takes place in described order unless otherwise specified The extension 0 of the relocatable object files can be omitted Comment A comment can be described in the linker command file As in the source file the character string from a semicolon to the end of the line is regarded as a comment Blank line A blank line carrying only blank characters and a line feed will be ignored It need not be converted to a comment using a semicolon 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 95 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 6 LINKER 6 6 Link Map File The link map file serves to refer to the mapping information for the modules of each section It is output if the m option is specified The file format is a text file and its file name is File name gt map File name gt is the same as that of the output object file Sample link map file Linker 62 ver x xx Link map file TEST MAP Sun May 03 14 16 16 1998 CODE section map of TEST ABS Index Page Start End Size Pset Type File SecNbr Lt 0X00 OxDDOD Ox0O0TT Qx0100 c Soe 2 3 OOL Ox0T00 O2010e 0x0009 2 Abs MAIN 1 3 0x01 Ox0109 OxOIIT OxO OT 4 0x02 0x0200 Ox020f 0x0010 0 Rel SUB S 2 BS 0x02 U02110 OR02Tr OZUUIU S SS ccm Of 0x09 UZO 00 QOxXOSTI O20100 S62 emere ne 7 0x04 0x0400 OxOJATTt 0x0100 Br OXUS 020500 Ux05Tr OXULIUD
138. ar w Status Bar CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER Register This menu item opens or activates the Register window and displays the current values of the registers Trace This menu item opens or activates the Trace window and displays the trace data sampled in the ICE trace memory Toolbar This menu item shows or hides the toolbar Status Bar This menu item shows or hides the status bar 9 6 7 Option Menu Log Record Mode Setting Hom Type Self Diagnosis Log This menu item starts or stops logging using a dialog box It performs the same function as executing the log command Record This menu item starts or stops recording of a command execution using a dialog box It performs the same function as executing the rec command Mode Setting This menu item sets the on the fly display break and execution counter modes using a dialog box It performs the same functions as executing the otf be bsyn and tim command Rom Type This menu item specifies the program ROM type which is installed in the ICE ROM socket It performs the same function as executing the rom command Self Diagnosis This menu item displays the results of the diagnostic test in the ICE It performs the same function as executing the chk command 9 6 8 Windows Menu Window Cascade Tile vw Command z Mig 3 Register 4 Data 5 Trace 9 6 9 Help Menu Contents About DIbb2 Cas
139. ar register break 183 multi break Set multiple break 184 multi break clear Clear multiple break 186 breakpoint list Display all break conditions 187 break all clear Clear all break conditions 188 break enable Set break enable mode 189 break disable Set break disable synchronous mode 190 unassemble Unassemble display 191 source code Source display 192 mix Mix display 193 Symbol information sy symbol list List symbols 194 If load file Load IEEE 695 format absolute object file 195 lo load option Load Intel HEX format file 196 CV coverage Display coverage information 210 CVC coverage clear Clear coverage information 211 ROM program load Load program from ROM 197 ROM program verify Verify the contents of ROM with program memory 198 ROM type Set ROM type 199 trace condition Set trace condition 200 trace area Set trace area 201 trace area clear Clear trace area 203 trace pointer Display current trace pointer 204 trace data display Display trace information 205 trace search Search trace information 207 trace file Save trace information into a file 209 com execute command file Load amp execute command file 212 rec record commands Record commands to a command file 219 log log Turn log output on or off 214 ma map information Display map information 215 otf on the fly display Turn on the fly display on or off 216 tim time o
140. arameter file and initializes the ICE When terminated normally Parameter file XXXXX par Chip name EO0C62XX li qo MEC done Ue eve Sey es enter es ahd Bde dt Eh ee Ee ee done gt When an error is encountered Parameter file XXXXX par Chip name EOC62XX liche 645 Soe ae he Se Oe a ee Error US dee ee ek es oe etn ve ca ve ee TIPP TP Error gt If an error occurs in the above initialization process temporarily quit the debugger Check the cause of the error and repair it before restarting the debugger 122 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER After initialization the state of the screen including the position and size of the windows will return the same as the last time the debugger was terminated The contents displayed in each window if it is opened are as follows Window Display contents Command window Initialization information and waits for command input Data window Data memory contents starting from data memory address 0 Register window Current register values Source window Unassemble display starting from program memory address 0x0100 Trace window Blank 9 3 5 Method of Termination To terminate the debugger select Exit from the File menu You can also input the g command in the Command window to terminate the debugger q 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 123 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 4 Windows This se
141. art address is larger than the end address Error i end address lt Start address You can set all program area as trace area using format 2 If the end address of the last location is not specified it is treated as the maximum program address For direct input mode in format 1 an error results if you attempt to specify more than 4 address ranges at a time But for guidance mode there is no such limitation so you can specify more than 4 address ranges before terminating the command by the Enter key If you set an address range to trace area this address range will be added to current trace area So if you want to set trace area from nothing you should at first clear current trace area You can use this command for multiple times to set new address ranges to trace area or clear address ranges from trace area GUI utility Trace Trace Area menu item When this menu item is selected a dialog box appears for setting trace areas Add Clear Trace Area Enter the start and end addresses and then click Add Start Address 1 Hl End Address 1 Up to four areas can be set at a time To set more Start Address 2 End Address 2 than four areas select this menu item every four Start Address 3 End Address 3 areas Start Address 4 End Address 4 ss When the Clear button is clicked the entered address ranges are cleared Trace All Clear Cancel The Trace All button set the entire program memo
142. as that of the input source file The format of each line of the assembly list file is as follows Line No Address Code Source statement Example Assembler 62 ver x xx Relocatable List File MAIN LST Wed Apr 22 15 31 00 1998 cO 10 OF WN FPF WO 103 11 12 13 14 15 16 1734 193 191 20 213 22 Zo 24 254 26 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 0105 0106 0000 main s test program main routine S INITIAL SP ADDRESS DEFINITION define SP_INIT_ADDR 0x80 SP init addr 0x80 dog E BOOT LOOP KKKKK global INIT RAM BLK1 Subroutine global INC RAM BLK1 Subroutine org 0x100 BOOT e08 ta a SP INIT ADDR 4 set SP fed ld sph a e00 ld a SP_INIT_ADDR amp 0xf f fO ld spl a 400 call INIT_RAM_BLK1 initialize RAM block 1 LOOP 400 call INC_RAM_BLK1 increment RAM block 1 000 JP LOOP infinity loop SEEKER RAM block kck k bss Senge 0x000 00 comm RAM BLK1 4 Content of line No The source line number from top of the file will be delivered Content of address In the case of an absolute section an absolute address will be delivered in hexadecimal number In the case of a relocatable section a relative address will be delivered in hexadecimal number from top of the file Content of code CODE section The instruction machine language codes are delivered in hexadecimal numbers One BSS section address corresponds with one instruction The
143. ase characters Use of upper case characters Creates all instructions and labels using lower case characters If neither this option nor the cl option is specified the source will be made with all labels in upper case characters and instructions in lower case characters Output of error files Also delivers in a file the contents to be output by the disassembler through the Standard Output stdout such as error messages If this option is not specified no error file will be output Specification of output path file name Specifies an output path file name without extension or with an extension ms If no extension is specified ms will be supplemented at the end of the specified output path file name The input file name is used for the output file Specification of start address Specifies the start address of the object This address is used to decide the address parameter of the first org instruction If this option is not specified the disassembled source will begin with address 0 When entering an option in the command line one or more spaces are necessary before and after the option Example c e0c62 ds62 e cl test abs ics62xxp par 5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE EPSON 113 CHAPTER 8 DISASSEMBLER 8 4 Messages The disassembler delivers all its messages via the Standard Output stdout Start up message The hex converter outputs only the following message when it starts
144. assembler sets the operand immediate data of the code that refers to unresolved address to 0 The immediate data will be decided by the linker Irrespective of the size of the secured area 00 is always delivered here Only the address defined for a symbol top address of the secured area is delivered as the address of the BSS section 84 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 10 Sample Executions Command line Cr BOCo2 bin ast2 g e 1 Mainws Assembly source file Mains test program main routine S INITIAL SP ADDRESS DEFINITION define SP_INIT_ADDR 0x80 SP init addr 0x80 Pearse BOOT LOOP KRREERK EK global INIT RAM BLK1 subroutine global INC RAM BLK1 Subroutine JOE 0x100 BOOT ld SP INIT ADDRS gt 4 set SP ld sph a Tol a SP INIT ADDR amp Oxf ld Bpl a call INIT RAM BLK1 initialize RAM block 1 LOOP call INC RAM BLK1 increment RAM block 1 Jp LOOP infinity loop PRR RS RAM block KKKKK bss onere 0x000 comm RAM_BLK1 4 Preprocessed file stabs C E0C62 test main s FileName f main s test program main routine S INITIAL SP ADDRESS DEFINITION define SP INIT ADDR 0x80 SP init addr 0x80 PARNER BOOT LOOP KKKKK global INIT RAM BLK1 subroutine global INC RAM BLK1 subroutine OIG 0x100 Stabn 13 LineInfo BOOT Stabn 14 LineInfo ld a 0x80 gt gt 4 set SP Stabn
145. atic command execution function using a command file 9 2 Input Output Files from Linker IEEE 695 Source file s Parameter file object file a Command file a ANNE fles poem e i ce Pro ram O tion file log HEX files HEX files Record file Log file Trace file Fig 9 2 1 Flow chart Debugger db62 T 9 2 1 Input Files Parameter file File format Text file File name file name gt par Description This file contains memory information on each microcomputer model and is indispensable for starting the debugger This file is included with the development tool package for each microcomputer model The following files are read by the debugger according to command specification Object file File format Binary file in the IEEE 695 format File name file name abs An extension other than abs can also be used Description This is an object file generated by the linker This file is read into the debugger by the If command By reading a file in the IEEE 695 format that contains debug information source display and symbolic debugging can be performed 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 119 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER Source file File format File name Description Program file File format File name Description Text file file name s This is the source file of the above object file It is read when the debugger performs source display HEX file in Intel HEX f
146. ations for CODE sections by page number with the page pseudo instruction or by bank number with the bank pseudo instruction or by 2 words alignment with the align pseudo instruction but only the org and align pseudo instructions are applicable to BSS sections to define completely absolute location 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 71 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 7 6 Location Defining Pseudo Instructions org bank page align The absolute addressing pseudo instructions bank page align and org work to specify absolute location of a section in different precision such as bank number level page number level 2 words alignment level and complete absolute address level The bank and page pseudo instructions are applicable to CODE section only others are applicable to any kinds of sections CODE and BSS sections org pseudo instruction Instruction format org Address Address Absolute address specification e Only decimal binary and hexadecimal numbers can be described e The addresses that can be specified are from 0 to 8 192 Ox1fff e One or more spaces or tabs are necessary between the instruction and the address Sample description code OX Ox0100 Function Specifies an absolute address location of a CODE or BSS section in an assembly source file The section with the org pseudo instruction is taken as an absolute section Precautions e If an overlap occurs as
147. ayed beginning with address 0x110 However if an address near the uppermost part of zh mm omn Ga Z2 Z2 Za Zo Za oma Do UD omn Cn Ga oZ Z2 Z2 Gom F E mm omn Ga Za Z2 Za CT oma e CT TN XS Gm Gn Za Z2 Gn om co hk data memory e g maximum address is Oxfff such as Oxff5 is specified as lt address1 gt the last line displayed in the window in this case is Oxff0 the specified address is not at the top of the window om Cm om omn mm Cn C2 oom ocn noc C2 ID C oZ oc om oc ocn CB e E m Gm Cn om ocn Ue CR oSGm oes om o m om oc ocn om o cnom om o4 ED om Gm Cn ans Ss SSS See Cn cm com eo o Em om Gm GGG ghn ommo cm Gm Cn cm comm ee o Em cm Gm Cn om ocn eo7eogmm eoe mm om Gm ocn Gm com a o ED om Gm Cn omn Gm SS SS mm ocm Gm Cn oc omm omm oc o ED om Gm Cn Zn Gm SS SH Se Gm Cn Gm com eo ED Cm Gees SS SS SS DD cm Gm ocn Gm eee oS o ED Cm Gn Ca me CS m cm Cm Cn Gm Gn om omm T s f f f M ay Since the Data window can be scrolled to show the entire data memory defining lt address2 gt does not have any specific effect Only defining lt ad dress1 gt and both defining lt address1 gt and lt ad dress2 gt has same display result 2 When Data window is closed If both lt address1 gt and lt address2 gt are not defined the debugger displays data for 256 words from address 0x000 in the Command window Pods 0123456067 89 ABCDEF 0000s
148. be modified with the entered number 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 129 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 4 6 Trace Window Fetch register trace data a CODE e a8 Fea ep FFG eu OG ID2C Hem P OtherOP WO7F 1 WH7E H We D 6 616 Whae 8 UddHi H i Wees 8 WhAS 8 zn Cm fo Tn C2 Gn mmo cC OD 00 c2 m AAAAARAAAAH The Trace window displays the trace result up to 8 192 cycles by reading it from the ICE s trace memory The following lists the trace contents Traced cycle number e Fetched code and disassembled contents Register contents PC A B X Y and flags e Memory access status R W address data This window also displays the trace data search results by the ts command Updating of display The contents of the Trace window are cleared when the target program is executed During this period the Trace window does not accept scrolling and resizing operations To display the latest contents of this window execute the td command or temporarily close the Trace window and then reopen it 130 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 5 Tool Bar This section outlines the tool bar available with the debugger 9 5 1 Tool Bar Structure The tool bar has 14 buttons each one assigned to a frequently used command e s Sale o The specified function is executed when you click on the corresponding button
149. be selected from the following three 1 Program s execution address 2 Address from which data is read 3 Address to which data is written When the above condition and one address are specified the system starts searching When the trace information that matches the specified condition is found the system displays the found data in the Trace window or in the Command window if the Trace window is closed Table 9 6 6 3 Command menu item to search trace information Function Command Menu Search trace information ts Trace Trace Search Saving trace information After the trace information is displayed in the Trace window using the td or ts commands the trace information within the specified range can be saved to a file Table 9 8 6 4 Command menu item to save trace information Function Command Menu Save trace information tf Trace Trace File 152 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 8 7 Coverage The ICE retains coverage information i e information on addresses at which a program is executed and it can be displayed in the Command window Because the executed address range is displayed as shown below it is possible to know which areas have not been executed Coverage Information Of DID LUS Lx 0200s 20205 Table 9 8 7 1 Coverage commands Function Command Display coverage information CV Clear coverage
150. bed in this area other than the symbols for referring to the address of the data memory the area securing pseudo instructions comm and Icomm The comm pseudo instruction and the lcomm pseudo instruction are designed to define the symbol and size of a data area Although the BSS section basically consists in a RAM area it can as well be used as a data memory area such as display memory and I O memory Since code definition in this area is meaningless in embedded type microcomputers such as those of the S1C62 Family nothing else can be described other than the two instructions and comments 5 6 2 Absolute and Relocatable Sections The assembler is a relocatable assembler that always generates an relocatable object and needs the linker to make it into an executable absolute object However each section in one source can be absolute or relocatable depending on how they are described The section whose absolute address is specified with either org page or bank pseudo instruction in the source is an absolute section while the section whose absolute address is not specified is an relocatable section Absolute addresses of relocatable sections will be fixed by the linker Both types of sections can be included in one source 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 61 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 6 3 Sample Definition of Sections EODEI Relocatable program DD8sS Bes Relocatable RAM area definition code o
151. bject file specified Object files to be linked are not specified CODE section address address crossed page boundary The CODE section is across the page boundary section type section address address overlaps with the unavailable memory The section exceeds the valid memory range Unusable instruction code operation code at address object file name gt An undefined code is used Unresolved external label in FILE NAME gt Reference was made to an undefined symbol Branch destination too far from address A destination address in another page is specified 6 12 2 Warning Even when a warning appears the linker continues with the processing It completes the processing after displaying a warning message unless in addition an error takes place The output files will all be delivered but the operation of the program cannot be guaranteed The warning messages and their contents are given below Warning message Cannot create file kind file FILE NAME gt Description Symbols cannot be found Cannot open file kind file FILE NAME gt The file cannot be opened Second definition of label label in FILE NAME gt The label has already been defined 5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE EPSON 103 CHAPTER 6 LINKER 6 13 Precautions 1 Upper limits such as a maximum section count
152. ble codes source codes or Mi MD Bb ru IBP disassemble and source codes Search Label CA PC 0206 5 A 8 12 org 8x188 Ill g f 13 BOOT 7 44 6166 e88 1d a 8x8 1d a SP_INIT_ADDR gt gt 4 set SP x 663 15 6161 fe8 ld sph a 1d sph a Y 7FF Register window 16 801802 e88 ld a x ld a SP_INIT_ADDR amp OXF SP 7d St 17 0103 Ff8 ld spl a 1d spl a ID2C este Displays register values and fetched codes 18 6104 e42 pset 8x2 19 6165 466 call 6x6 call INIT_RAM_BLK1 initialize RAI Current Code e688 2 8186 e42 t 8x2 Sous pun ba e pset 6x 22 8187 ee Pe ae ene Pa i AER Next Code e88 23 8188 LD XP A i 24 fetch register trace data Trace window 25 CODE PC AB X V ID2C Hem P MEM Displays traced data 26 fdf RET 820F O f 603 7ff 6616 R 7D 8 R87E 8 27 886 JP 6x6 6168 O f 663 7ff 6616 DDR 81235567 S89ABCDEFS 4 e42 PSET 8x2 8186 8 f 663 7Ff 6618 6000 53080808 86808608890 486 CALL 8x6 8187 8f 663 7ff 6616 WO7F 1 WO7E 6 wg7p 00160 O 6 G6 G6 G6 G6 OG O G6 6 6 8 G8 8 6 6 e88 LD A 6x8 8206 O f 80803 7fF 6618 0020 6666666060 666660666 fan Size e86 LD XP A 8207 0 f 8983 7FF 6616 eds a 8028 b88 LD X 8x8 6268 O f 8800 7ff 6616 i a pre 8829 e88 LD A 0x8 6209 8 f 808 7FF 6010 x Data window 0030 f1 SCF 020a 0 f G66 7FF 6611 Displays the contents of the data memory cadant 8031 f28 ACPX HX A 820b Gf 89088 7ff OOOO R6888 80 U888 1 0070 060860
153. break poini Sel RII 175 Dae Dreak Domit Cody saistcurtinstertesagrineiesema nnn 177 bd data break wcatisuviscudaitiniavanuvesnvadudvancartiteutsensaneanceronddeteuseansiads 176 bdc data break clear iwessni ise prid rU e FbERE EE RARIUS EUREEUI Tui ve A 180 DF 10BIT DES annctustvesiereisworevtaccadanvsncunmactrernnuarsasncutnunsts 181 Dre register break CLOG esxkoncstesanetenta ant a aU PneRH 183 bm multiple DIC m 184 bmc multiple break clear iios eerte FERE v taxeraarvins 166 pr break point list enstemdtextintexsuEcun eet rtis rk rA EN E EUnA a FA RAN ERU 187 DOC Dreak al COAT DRITTE RET 166 be break enable ssecediexeedavese ce ve vbcusu as SUE EXTA rk YA HA VEN C OX Ra EQ 189 bsyn break disable sci nscisianesveepocuteaiarDbereiestoninsiwanensacaaeveraenaiene 190 uu FOO 271 OR BO 21178 NNI TE Rn 191 TAROT TS NER TETTE TEL 191 s S0UrCE COLE TUE ERT ERT ROT COTO OTST REET eR Tay erent en eT are een 192 10 610 EEEE EE TUER 193 YY 10 Symbol T Orma O NO m 194 E yO TSO TOT 194 OPA PA TIC NET Ro POE 195 USE UTOR Perm 195 lo load ODO c 196 De ROM JACOBS eA HEU VEN mia ADU OR epee ee eee 197 1D ROM program load escena d pte PE pPEV ERE Exe Fans ee RES 197 vp ROM program verify eisuissesstesebsevusA oue R 2b REEF OHFPXK RUPEE PERSE 198 FOR TOV TC s ensisttetentidno A E RE RR IR DRUS 199 S5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON vii S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CONTENTS VEN ER Doo e MERERI A EEEE I I ATA S A AIO
154. break point Format 1 gt tc lt condition gt direct input mode 2 gt te guidance mode Current type setting Set condition 1 start 2 middle 3 end lt 1 2 3 gt 4 gt condition Position for trace extraction with respect to the break point s m e Hd Examples Format 1 Sp Sal Start is specified gt Format 2 DOC Trace condition End 1 start 2 middle 3 end 241 gt i Note An error results if you input the condition other than listed above Error t invalid value Gui utility Trace Trace Condition menu item When this menu item is selected a dialog box appears allowing selection of a trace condition Trace Condition Select a condition using the radio button Start ug OK 200 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER la trace area i Function This command sets or clears the trace area by the specified program address range i Format 1 gt ta lt staddr1 gt lt endaddr1 gt lt staddr4 gt lt endaddr4 gt X direct input mode 2 gt ta alli direct input mode 3 gt ta guidance mode Current trace area 1 set 2 clear 3 clearall lt 1 2 32 1 Start address staddrs J End address endaddr staddrl 4 Start address of each specified address range hexadecimal or symbol IEEE 695 format only endaddr1 4 End address of each specified address ran
155. bugger See Section 9 9 for details of the debug commands Also refer to the follow ing manuals to understand operations of the In Circuit Emulator ICE S5U1C62000H and the Evalua tion Board S5U1C62xxxE S5U1C62000H Manual Explains the functions and handling methods of the In Circuit Emulator ICE S5U1C62xxxE Manual Covers the functions and handling methods of the evaluation board designed to evaluate the hardware specifications of each model For details of each tool Chapters 4 to 9 explain the details of each tool Refer to it if necessary Once familiar with this package Refer to the listings of instructions and commands contained in Quick Reference 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON i S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE INTRODUCTION Manual Notations This manual was prepared by following the notation rules detailed below 1 Sample screens The sample screens provided in the manual are all examples of displays under Windows 95 These displays may vary according to the system or fonts used 2 Names of each part The names or designations of the windows menus and menu commands buttons dialog boxes and keys are annotated in brackets Examples Command window File Exit menu item Exit command in File menu Key Break button q key etc 3 Names of instructions and commands The CPU instructions and the debugger commands that can be written in either uppercase or lower case characters are annota
156. button This button executes the target program from the address indicated by the current PC It performs the same function when the g command is executed ul Go to Cursor button This button executes the target program from the address indicated by the current PC to the cursor position in the Source window the address of that line It performs the same function when the g address command is executed Before this button can be selected the Source window must be open and the address line where the program is to break must be clicked Selecting a break address by clicking on the address line is valid for only the lines that have actual code and is invalid for the source only lines 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 131 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER e gt E a Go from Reset button This button resets the CPU and then executes the target program from the program start address 0x100 It performs the same function when the gr command is executed Step button This button executes one instruction step at the address indicated by the current PC It performs the same function when the s command is executed Next button This button executes one instruction step at the address indicated by the current PC If the instruc tion to be executed is call or calz it is assumed that a program section until control returns to the next address constitutes one step and all steps of their subroutines are
157. button on the window title bar The window will be maximized to the Edit window area size and other Edit windows will be hidden behind the active window Goto Label m 1 main s 2 test program main routine 3 4 5 5x INITIAL SP ADDRESS DEFINITION sexesex define SP_INIT_ADDR 0x88 SP init addr 60x88 f 8 zs xxx BOOT LOOP sss 9 qlobal INIT RA amp H BLK1 subroutine 18 global INC RAM BLK1 subroutine 11 12 org 6x166 13 BOOT 14 ld a SP_INIT_ADDR gt gt 4 See SE 15 ld sph a 16 ld a SP INIT fiDDR amp 8xf 17 ld spl a 18 call INIT_RAM_BLK1 initialize RAM block 1 19 LOOP 20 call INC_RAM_BLK1 increment RAM block 1 21 jp LOOP infinity loop 22 23 5x22 RAM block 222 24 b55 25 org 6x 666 26 comm RAM BLK1 4 27 4 Minimizing an Edit window Click the Minimize button on the window title bar The window will be minimized as a window icon The minimized icons can be arranged at the bottom of the Edit window area by selecting Arrange Icons from the Window menu 33 sub_s ajoj x 5 Moving and resizing an Edit window The Edit window allows changing of its location and its size in the same way as the standard Windows applications if it is not maximized Switching active Edit window Click the window to be activated if it can be viewed Otherwise select the window name source file name from the currently opened window list in the Window menu Scrolling dis
158. cade This menu item cascades the opened windows Tile This menu item tiles the opened windows This menu shows the currently opened window names Selecting one activates the window Contents This menu item displays the contents of help topics About Db62 This menu item displays an About dialog box for the debugger 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 135 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 7 Method for Executing Commands All debug functions can be performed by executing debug commands This section describes how to execute these commands Refer to the description of each command for command parameters and other details To execute a debug command activate the Command window and input the command from the keyboard The menu and tool bar can be used to execute frequently used commands 9 7 1 Entering Commands from Keyboard Select the Command window by clicking somewhere on the Command window When the prompt gt appears on the last line in this window and a cursor is blinking behind it the system is ready to accept a command from the keyboard Input a debug command at the prompt position The commands are not case sensitive they can be input in either uppercase or lowercase General command input format gt command parameter parameter parameter A space is required between a command and parameter e Space is required between parameters Use the arrow keys Bac
159. cedure from assembling source files to debugging It also explains how to use each development tool of the 51C62 Family Assembler Package common to all the models of the 51C62 Family How To Read the Manual This manual was edited particularly for those who are engaged in program development Therefore it assumes that the reader already possesses the following fundamental knowledge e Basic knowledge about assembler language e Basic knowledge about the general concept of program development by an assembler e Basic operating methods for Windows 95 or Windows NT 4 0 Before installation See Chapter 1 Chapter 1 describes the composition of this package and provides a general outline of each tool Installation Install the tools following the installation procedure described in Chapter 2 To understand the flow of program development See the program development flow in Chapter 3 For coding See the necessary parts in Chapter 5 Chapter 5 describes the grammar for the assembler language as well as the assembler functions Also refer to the following manuals when coding 9S1C62xxx Technical Manual Covers device specifications and the operation and control method of the peripheral circuits 951C6200 6200A Core CPU Manual Has the instructions and details the functions and operation of the Core CPU For debugging Chapter 9 gives detailed explanation of the debugger Sections 9 1 to 9 8 give an overview of the functions of the de
160. ces written for old 62 tools are available with these new tools 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 1 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 1 GENERAL 1 2 Tool Composition 1 2 1 Composition of Package The 1C62 Family Assembler Package contains the items listed below When it is unpacked make sure that all items are supplied 2 Waranty CaO TTE OT One each in English and Japanese 1 2 2 Outline of Software Tools The following shows the outlines of the software tools included in the package Assembler as62 exe Converts the mnemonic of the source files into object codes machine language of the S1C62 The results are output in a relocatable object file This assembler includes preprocessing functions such as macro definition call conditional assembly and file include functions Linker Ik62 exe Links the relocatable objects created by the assembler by fixing the memory locations and creates executable absolute object codes The linker also provides an auto PSET insertion correction function allowing the programmer to create sources without having to know branch destination page numbers Hex converter hx62 exe Converts an absolute object in IEEE 695 format output from the linker into ROM image data in Intel HEX format or Motorola 5 format This conversion is needed when making the ROM or when creat ing mask data using the development tools provided with each model Disassembler ds62 exe Disassembles an absolute object
161. cified area dm 1 Dumping data memory The contents of the data memory are displayed in hexadecimal dump format If the Data window is opened the contents of the Data window are updated if not the contents of the data memory are displayed in the Command window 2 Entering modifying data Data at a specified address is rewritten by entering hexadecimal data Data can be directly m o mn omm Cn Za Gs oU Gm omn oO Gea Za Z2 Z2 SZ a Z2 omn ou o mn omm Ca Za oZ oU Gn omn oO G2 Gn Za Z2 Z2 S2 Z2 m2 Ch A mn omm Cn Gn Gn UeoUeoUe9SCQ o9eQ 7920852 e GL Cn Za Tas Z2 S a G2 Z2 oe modified on the Data window 3 Rewriting specified area An entire specified area is rewritten with specified data o mm oma Za Za Z2 Z2 Za Za Ga CT UD omn Z2 Ga Ga Z2 Z2 oG n om I o o mm omm Ga Za Z2 Z2 T mn oU CT STD G2 Gn Ga Z2 Z2 n mn co hb o mn omm Za Za Za Z2 Za Gn ss Ss SSS See Tas ee Z2 omn cl omn oma Za Za Za Z2 aa ao G2 G2 Ga Z2 Z2 oS 2 Zn om I 4 Copying specified area The content of a specified area is copied to Om Nm Sm nomm ommo e Gm cT ED GL Gm GL Cm Gm Sm cn UO o En omn ge Gs Xp SS Ue G3 Gn Ga Z2 Z2 Za G2 Z2 0 o En omn Za Za Ga Xp UoUeSogm SUDO ES Gn Ga Z2 Z2 Za Z2 m D En omn Zn Gua Gn Gp UeoUeSOU amp QoUeQCUSO7S cU IS S Ca Za Z2 Za Z2 za C2 o En omn Zn Zu Gn Gp UeoUeSOUeQ OQ 7 GB CS Ga Za Z2 Za Z2 m2 02 A a UD S Za Z2 Z2 om Z2 m2 C7 A EE 7 M QS S Ga Z2 Z2 Ga Z2 za TU 8
162. cimal valid operation code of S1C62 Condition 0 address lt last program memory address O input code lt Oxfff Example gt pe Program enter address 1004 Address is input 0100 fit Jadu Code is input 0101 fff Xm Address 0x101 is skipped 0102 fff d Command is terminated gt Notes The start address you specified must be within the range of the program memory area available with each microcomputer model An error results if the input one is not hexadecimal number or not a valid symbol Error invalid value An error results if the limit is exceeded Error Program address out of range Code must be input using a hexadecimal number in the range of 12bits 0 to Oxfff An error results if the input one is not a hexadecimal number Error s invalid value An error results if the input code exceeds the limit or it is invalidated by the DEL command in the PAR file Error illegal code In guidance mode the following keyboard inputs have special meaning qH Command is terminated finish inputting and start execution ual Return to previous address d Input is skipped keep current value If the maximum address of program memory is reached and gets a valid input other than J the command is terminated When the contents of the program memory are modified using the pe command in direct mode the unassemble contents of the Source window are updated immediately W
163. covered in this manual For details refer to the tool manual associated with each specific model 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 7 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 3 SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT PROCEDURE 3 2 Development Using Work Bench This section shows a basic development procedure using the work bench wb62 Refer to Chapter 4 Work Bench for operation details 3 2 1 Starting Up the Work Bench m Programs Accessories f EPSON MCU fe 51C62 Assembler English Manuals et k Documents Startl Ip Japanese Manuals Settings t A MS DOS Prompt Windows Explorer Find Help Uninstall m W arkBenchb2 Bun Windows25 Shut Down Serr Start up the work bench by choosing WorkBench62 from the program menu J WorkBench62 Version Xx File Edit View Insert Build Tools Help Dc ee ee le a 5l Biz ficse2icr PaR m Absolute Object m ek WE mE For Help press F1 No document OVA NUM 8 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 3 SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT PROCEDURE 3 2 2 Creating a New Project The work bench manages necessary file and tool setting information as a project First a new project file should be created 1 Select New from the File menu or click the New button iu New button The New dialog box appears New EDC Assembly Source File EOC Assembly Header File Cancel Help
164. cted ADDR 020 1002 Break address is set to Ox 100 DATA B s 1 1 BA Data pattern is set to 0b1 1 R W Wo R W condition is set for read and write access bd J ADDR 100 DATA 1 1 B R W l set 2 clear sear Aa 2 clear is selected bd Data break None 1 set 2 clear Terminated by Enter key moe in the binary data pattern specifies that the bit will not be compared with the actual read write data 178 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER i Notes e For the first time this command is executed no item can be skipped because no default value is set e In guidance mode the following keyboard inputs have special meaning qe Command is terminated finish inputting and start execution AVI Return to previous address Input is skipped keep current value When the command is terminated in the middle of guidance by qu the contents that have been input up to that time will be modified However these contents will not be modified if some cleared settings are left intact e A data break condition can be cleared by executing the bm command e The addresses must be specified within the range of the data memory area available for each micro computer model An error results if the input one is not a hexadecimal number or a valid symbol Error invalid value An error results if the limit is exceeded Error Data addr
165. ction describes the types of windows used by the debugger 9 4 1 Basic Structure of Window The diagram below shows the window structure of the debugger Ej Db62 Data Source window Trace window Register window Bl Ed Fle Fun Besk Tace Vew Opon Wingo Hep Y oj sle lala la lleis elt BL R87F V87D 12 org 6x196 13 BOOT 14 6166 e688 ld a 8x8 ld a SP_INIT_ADDR gt gt 4 15 6161 fee ld sph a ld sph a 16 8182 e 66 ld a 6x6 ld ay SP INIT fiDDR amp OxfF 17 0103 ff8 ld spl a ld spl a 18 0104 e42 pset 8x2 19 6165 466 call 6x6 call INIT RAH BLK1 28 LOOP 21 6106 e42 pset 8x2 22 6167 ns nS 23 e108 OU 25 trace fetch register trace data 25 Loc CODE PC AB X VW IDZC Hem P 26 8022 fdf RET 020F 8 f 6863 7ff 68616 R87D 8 R87E 8 27 8023 886 JP 6x6 6168 8G f 663 7ff 0010 4 8825 e42 PSET 8x2 6166 8 f 2883 7ff 8818 8825 466 CALL 6x6 8187 O f 603 7ff 6616 WO7F 1 WO7E 6 8026 e686 LD A 8x8 8206 8 f 663 7ff 6616 Ram Size 8027 e86 LD XP fi 0207 68 f 663 7ff 6618 Ram Start 9 9928 bee LD X 6x6 6268 O f 666 7ff 8818 Ram End fidd 8029 e686 LD A 0x8 0200 68 f 666 7ff 6616 I 0 Area 6636 f41 SCF 626a 68 f 6866 7ff 6611 Segnent 8831 f28 ACPX HX A 820b f 888 7FF OOOO R888 8 W888 1 Read Only A 8832 28 ACPX MX A 626c 0 f 661 7FF 8866 ROBI 9 Wee1 9 Write Only S Read amp Write Area 0080 8881 66c1 88ch 88c6 88c8 88dl 88d2 88e8 82c1 82ch 82c6 82c8
166. ctions Blue Labels Light brown Comments Green Project window This window shows the currently opened work space folder and lists all the source files in the project with a structure similar to Windows Explorer Double clicking a source file icon opens the source file in the Edit window 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 15 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 4 WORK BENCH Output window This window displays the messages delivered from the executed tools in a build or assemble process Double clicking a syntax error message with a source line number displayed in this window activates or opens the Edit window of the corresponding source so that the source line in which the error has occurred can be viewed Menu bar Refer to Section 4 5 Toolbar Refer to Section 4 4 Status bar Shows help messages when the mouse cursor is placed on a menu item or a button It also indicates the cursor position in the Edit window Key lock status Num lock Caps lock Scroll lock 4 3 2 Window Manipulation Resizing the windows WorkBenchb2 Version 320 sub s EID File Edit View Insert Build Tools Window Help Each window area can be Diae e alele e P SJE ficsezicr rary absolute Object v deve ee eS m resized by dragging the win riim sg mici test files S mains dow boundary The size B nbs information is saved when the ER NN NES work bench is terminated So
167. cuted This button becomes active only while a build process is being executed ICS621 CP PAR Im ICE Parameter pull down list box EATEB BAG Selects the ICE parameter file for the model being developed In this box all the d Es BS impr ILS B248P PAR ICE parameter files that exist in the dev62 directory are listed Absolute Object Absolute Object Output Format pull down list box Selects an executable object file format Three types of formats are available IEEE 695 absolute object format Intel HEX format and Motorola 5 format The Intel Hex Motorola 5 build process will generate an executable object in the format selected here HEX HEX Convert button Invokes the HEX converter to convert an absolute object into an Intel HEX object or a Motorola S object A dialog box will appear allowing selection of an absolute object and options of the HEX converter Disassemble button Invokes the disassembler to disassemble an absolute object A dialog box will appear allowing selection of an absolute object and options of the disassembler Debug button Invokes the debugger with the specified ICE parameter file 4 4 3 Window Toolbar This tool bar has the following buttons used in window manipulation E mi Cascade button Cascades the opened Edit windows Tile Horizontally button Tiles the opened Edit window horizontally Tile Vertically button Tiles the opened Edit windo
168. d Expansion rule If a Define name defined appears in the source the assembler substitutes a defined character string for that Define name Sample expansion define INT F1 Oxf define INT F1 RST INT F1 0xf define MEMORY X mx ldpx MEMORY X INT F1 RST Expanded to ldpx mx 0 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 65 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER Precautions e The assembler only permits backward reference of a Define name Therefore the name definition must precede the use of it Once a Define name is defined it cannot be canceled However redefinition can be made using another Define name Example define MemX1 mx define MemX2 MemX1 ldpx MemX2 my Expanded to Idpx mx my When the same Define name is defined duplicatedly an error will result No other characters than delimiters space tab line feed and comma can be added before and after a Define name in the source However an operator can be added to a Define name string without delimiters Examples define L LABEL ld a L h 4 60500001111 Replaced with Id a LABEL 7 4 ld b hL l amp 0b00001111 Replaced with Id b LABEL 3 0 The internal preprocess part of the assembler does not check the validity of a statement as the result of the replacement of the character string 66 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 7 3 Macro Instructions macro Zen
169. d window Log mode The same contents as those displayed in the relevant window are also displayed in the Command window However changes made to the relevant window by scrolling or opening it are not reflected in the Command window 2 When executing a command while each window is closed When the relevant display window is closed the execution results are always displayed in the Command window except for the program display commands u sc m regardless of whether operation is in log mode or normal mode For the display format in the Command window refer to each command description 140 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 8 Debug Functions This section outlines the debug features of the debugger classified by function Refer to Section 9 9 Command Reference for details about each debug command 9 8 1 Loading Program and Option Data Loading files The debugger can read a file in IEEE 695 format or Intel HEX format in the debugging process Table 9 8 1 1 lists the files that can be read by the debugger and the load commands Table 9 6 1 1 Files and load commands File type Data type Ext Generation tool Com Menu Button IEEE 695 Program data abs Linker If File Load File Intel HEX Program 4 high order bits h hex HEX convertor lo File Load Option Program 8 low order bits l hex HEX convertor Function option f
170. d Address z BF FF I 0 Area List Hugs8d dB8rr 81860 61FF 8286 6 FF 83880 83FF 6486 Segment Area List B8858 887F 54580 8057fF Read Only Area H691 68695 68c9 lBcrca BHFB BHFc 8191 8195 Aich 8591 8495 HBhc9 84cta BhFS Bhfc Write Only firea 0450 0477F Read amp Write Area 6080 8081 B cl ch B c B c8 BBdl B d2 bed H2c1 H2c5h H2c 6 H2c8 Bedi 82d2 H2eB 82h 82F4 Hhc8 H dl Hhd2 84e8 BAFH BhF Unused Area HB882 8B88F 38893 8H97 889F HBal BBaF HBb3 BBbF Hl H182 H18F 8193 H197 H19F Hlal HlaF Hib3 HibF Hr Ny The Command window is used to do the following 1 Entering debug commands When the prompt gt appears in the Command window the system will accept a command entered from the keyboard If some other window is selected click on the Command window A cursor will blink at the prompt indicating that readiness to input a command Refer to Section 9 7 1 Entering Commands from Keyboard 2 Displaying debug commands selected from menus or tool bar When a command is executed by selecting the menu item or tool bar button the executed command line is displayed in the Command window 3 Displaying command execution results The Command window displays command execution results However some command execution results are displayed in the Source Data Register or Trace windows The contents of these executio
171. d in the Command window as well as output to the log file even when the Trace window is opened 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 207 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER ui Note The address specified for search must be within the range of the program data memory area available for each microcomputer model An error results if the input one is not a hexadecimal number or not a valid symbol Error invalid value An error results if the limit is exceeded for program memory address Error Program address out of range An error results if the limit is exceeded for data memory address Error Data address out of range GUI utility Trace Trace Search menu item When this menu item is selected a dialog appears for setting a search condition Trace Search Select a option using the radio button and enter an address in the text box then click OK C Data Read Address C Data Write Address Address Hexadecimal or Symbol Cancel 208 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER tf trace file i Function This command saves the specified range of the trace information displayed in the Trace window by the td command to a file Format 1 gt tf lt num1 gt lt num2 gt file name gt direct input mode 2 gt tf guidance mode Start pointer lt num1 gt End pointer num2 1 File Name file name gt gt numl
172. d line one or more spaces should be placed between the file names For the output file name specify an absolute object file name abs The file name will be used for other output files If no absolute object file name is specified the same name as that of the relocatable object file to be linked first is used as the output file name The ICE parameter file cannot be omitted A long file name supported in Windows and a path name can be specified When including spaces in the file name enclose the file name with double quotation marks Options The linker comes provided with the following options d Function Explanation Default Function Explanation Default Note Function Explanation Default Disable full PSET optimization Disables automatic insertion deletion correction of the pset instructions for branch instructions jumps and calls If this option is not specified the automatic page correction function will be enabled Disable PSET deletion function Disables PSET deletion only among full PSET optimization insertion deletion correction This will be needed when at least the existing PSET should not be removed as in the case of a source contained jump table made up with page set and jump instructions If this option is not specified unnecessary pset instructions will be removed when the automatic page correction function is specified Be sure to specify this option if the objec
173. d single steps the target program from the current PC position by executing one instruc tion at a time i Format gt N lt step gt direct input mode step Number of steps to be executed decimal default is 1 Condition 0 step 65 535 Operation This command basically operates in the same way as the s command However the call and calz instructions including all subroutines until control returns to the next address are executed as one step After executing such step the PC will be set to the second instruc tion address after the call or calz instruction If the next instruction is also call or calz the PC will be set to the first instruction address in the subroutine called by the second call or calz instruction Example when 1 call instruction is executed by the n command without step count PC when n is executed Gall testi ld a O0 PC after n is completed Ld b 0 PC when n is executed call _ testi call _test2 ld a O0 ld b t0 PC after n is completed _test2 ld a 1 Notes e The step count must be specified within the range of 0 to 65 535 An error results if the limit is ex ceeded Error Number of steps out of range use 0 65535 e If the Data window is opened its display contents are updated after the execution e When the n command is executed the multi break function is invalidated due to the hardware specification while the program is running It takes eff
174. d1 5 468 call 8x6 call INIT _RAM_BLK1 initialize Ral 28 LOOP 21 6166 e42 pset 8x2 22 8167 466 call 6x6 call INC_RAM_BLE1 3 increment B H g In this mode both unassembled codes and sources are displayed like an absolute list This mode is available only when an absolute object file that contains source debugging information has been loaded Refer to Section 9 4 3 Source Window for details about the display contents Symbol reference When debugging a program after reading an object file in IEEE 695 format the symbols defined in the source file can be used to specify an address This feature can be used when entering a command having address in its parameter from the Command window or a dialog box 1 Referencing global symbols Follow the method below to specify a symbol that is declared to be a global symbol label by the global or comm pseudo instruction lt symbol gt Example of specification gt m BOOT gt de RAM_BLK1 2 Referencing local symbols Follow the method below to specify a local symbol label that is used in only the defined source file lt symbol gt c lt file name gt The file name here is the source file name s in which the symbol is defined Example of specification gt bp QGSUBlGtest s 3 Displaying symbol list All symbols used in the program and the defined addresses can be displayed in the Command window Table 9 8 2 2 Command to display symb
175. de into a comment line using a semicolon 5 5 6 Register Names The CPU register names may be written in either uppercase or lowercase letters Table 5 5 6 1 Notations of register names Register memory location flag Notation A A register aorA B B register bor B XP Four high order bits of IX register xp or XP YP Four high order bits of IY register yp or YP X Eight low order bits of IX register xor X Y Eight low order bits of IY register yorY XH Four high order bits of XHL register xh or XH XL Four low order bits of XHL register xl or XL YH Four high order bits of YHL register yh or YH YL Four low order bits of YHL register yl or YL SP Stack pointer SP sp or SP SPH Four high order bits of stack pointer SP sph or SPH SPL Four low order bits of stack pointer SP spl or SPL MX Data memory location whose address is specified by IX mx or MX MY Data memory location whose address is specified by IY my or MY MO MF Data memory location in the register area 0x000 0x00f mO mf or MO MF F Flag register IDZC f or F C Carry cor C NC No carry nc or NC Z Zero zorZ NZ Not zero nz or NZ Note These symbols are reserved words therefore they cannot be used as user defined symbol names 56 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 5 7 Numerical Notations This Assembler supports three kinds of numerical notations decimal hexadec
176. ded To use the optional In Circuit Emulator ICE the personal computer also requires a serial port with a D sub 9 pin Display A display unit capable of displaying 800 x 600 dots or more is necessary Hard disk and CD ROM drive Since the installation is done from a CD ROM to a hard disk a CD ROM drive and a hard disk drive are required Mouse A mouse is necessary to operate the tools System software The S1C62 Family Assembler Package supports Microsoft Windows 95 English or Japanese and Windows NT 4 0 English or Japanese Other development tools To debug the target program the optional In Circuit Emulator ICE S5U1C62000H and an Evaluation Board S5U1C62xxxE are needed as the hardware tools The evaluation board is prepared for each 51C62 model 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 3 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION 2 2 Installation Method The supplied CD ROM contains the installer Setup exe that installs the tools To install the tools ETE olx File Edit View Help acrobat bin Dev62 doc _inst32i e _ HL ES A A A _isdel exe _setup dll sysl cab userl cab Data tag a datal cab lang dat layout bin os dat Release txt Setup exe Setup ini setup ins setup lid 20 obiect s 728KB Ui InstallShield Wizard Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for 51C62 Family Assembler Package Yer2 0 The InstallShield R Wizard will install 51C52
177. dm Any statement string can be left defined as a macro using the macro instruction macro and the content of that definition can be invoked from different parts of the program with the macro name Unlike a subroutine the part that is invoking a macro is replaced with the content of the definition Instruction format macro Macro name gt lt Dummy parameters lt Dummy parameters lt Statement string gt endm lt Macro name gt e The first character is limited to a z A Z and _ e The second and the subsequent characters can use a z A Z 0 9 and __ e Uppercase and lowercase characters are discriminated macro itself is not case sensitive e One or more spaces or tabs are necessary between the instruction and the macro name Dummy parameter e Dummy parameter symbols for macro definition They are described when a macro to be defined needs parameters e One or more spaces or tabs are necessary between the macro name and the first parameter symbol When describing multiple parameters a comma is necessary between one parameter and another e The same symbols as for a macro name are available e The number of parameters are limited according to the free memory space Statement string e The following statements can be described Basic instruction mnemonic and operand Conditional assembly instruction Internal branch label Comments e The following statements cannot be described Assembler
178. e with the ICE 9600 bps is set by default Initial Command Initial Command edit box This box is used to edit the debugger commands to be executed when the debugger starts up The work bench generates a command file with the commands entered in this box and Cancel Apply Help specifies it when invoking the debugger A load command is initially set so that the debugger can load the object at start up Refer to Chapter 9 Debugger for details of the debugger options 4 9 4 HEX Converter Options Output Format list box An output format of the executable object to be generated by the build task can be selected When Absolute Object is selected the build task will be terminated after linking has completed The HEX converter will not be invoked When Intel Hex or Motorola S is selected the HEX converter will be invoked after linking has completed Other HEX converter options become selectable when one of them is selected Settings Assembler Linker Debugger Hex Converter Output Format RUIN MR tt E Do not hilroom with Geer Intel Hex Motorola 5 i ouput era log file Mat execute Hex Converter Do not fill room with OxFF check box Select this option when not filling the unused program area with OxFF Cancel Apply Help Output error log file check box Select this option to generate the error log file of the HEX converter Refer to Chapter 7 HEX Converter
179. e The data that can be specified are from 0 to 4096 Oxfff e One or more spaces or tabs are necessary between the instruction and the first data e Acomma is necessary between one data and another Sample description code codeword Oxa 0xa40 0xff3 Function Defines the 12 bit data to be written to the program ROM Precaution The codeword pseudo instruction can be used only in a CODE section 78 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 7 9 Area Securing Pseudo Instructions comm lcomm Instruction format Comm lt Symbols Size comm lt Symbols Size lt Symbol gt Symbols for data memory access address reference e The 1st character is limited to a z A Z and _ e The 2nd and the subsequent character can use a z A Z 0 9 and _ e Uppercase and lowercase are discriminated e One or more spaces or tabs are necessary between instruction and symbol Size Number of words of the area to be secured 4 bits word e Only decimal binary and hexadecimal numbers can be described e The size that can grammatically be specified is from 0 to 8 192 e One or more spaces tabs or a comma are necessary between symbol and size Sample description comm RAMO 4 loomm BUF 1 Function Sets an area of the specified size in the BSS section RAM and other data memory and creates a symbol indicating its top address with the specified name
180. e bm command bm Error illegal code The input code is not available pe pf Error illegal mnemonic The input mnemonic is invalid for S1C62 as Error invalid command This is an invalid command All commands Error invalid data pattern The input data pattern is invalid bd Error invalid value The input data address or symbol is invalid All commands Command errors Error no high and low ROM No ROM is installed in ICE rp Error no high ROM No high order ROM is installed in ICE rp Error no low ROM No low order ROM is installed in ICE rp Error no mapping area A no map area is specified pm dm Error no such symbol There is no such symbol All symbol support commands Error Incorrect number of parameter The parameter number is incorrect All commands Error over max nesting level 5 can t open file Nestling of the com command exceeds the limit com Error r w option r w or An illegal R W option is specified bd bm Error ROM program verify error ROM program checks out different codes vp Error Incorrect ROM type 64 128 256 512 An illegal value is specified for the ROM type parameter of the rom command rom Error Number of steps out of range use 0 65535 The specified step count is out of range s n Error symbol type error The symbol type CODE
181. e cycle in which the specified address is executed 2 Search for a specified memory read cycle In this mode you can specify a data memory address The debugger searches the cycle in which data is read from the specified address 3 Search for a specified memory write cycle In this mode you can specify a data memory address The debugger searches the cycle in which data is written to the specified address Format 1 gt ts option lt address gt direct input mode 2 gt ts guidance mode 1 Pc address 2 Data read address 3 Data write address lt 1 2 3 gt 4 Search address lt address gt Search result is displayed gt lt option gt Condition type program address data read address or data write address pc dr dw lt address gt Search address hexadecimal or symbol IEEE 695 format only Display The search results are displayed in the Trace window if it is open otherwise the results are dis played in the Command window Format 1 S8 que UD Trace searching Done 0006 e00 LD A 0x0 0200 0 O 001 100 0100 gt Format 2 JD 1 Pc address 2 Data read address 3 Data write address ld Search address 200 Trace searching Done 0006 e00 LD A 0x0 0200 0 O 001 100 0100 gt Loc CODE PC A B X Y IDZC MemOP OtherOP 0006 e00 LD A 0x0 0200 00 001 100 0100 When command execution results are being output to a log file by the log command the search results are displaye
182. e end record sum 1 byte This is a checksum 1 s complement from length to the last data The end records are always S804000000FB Note When using hex files for creating the mask data do not specify Motorola S format because the the mask data checker does not support this format 7 5 4 Conversion Range By default the hex converter generates the hex files that include all the codes of the ROM area available for each model Data for unused addresses are delivered as Oxff For example if the model has a built in 2KB ROM and the program uses the area from address 0x0 to address Ox6ff the hex converter fills the area from address 0x700 to address O0x7ff with Oxff If there are unused addresses in the range from 0x0 to Ox6ff those data are also delivered as Oxff When creating the mask data by the mask data checker provided for each model the hex files must be generated in this format When the b option is specified the hex converter does not deliver data in unused addresses of the absolute object file This allows minimization of the output hex files Note however that the hex files generated in this format cannot be used for creating the mask data 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 109 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 7 HEX CONVERTER 7 6 Error Warning Messages 7 6 1 Errors When an error occurs the hex converter immediately terminates the processing after displaying an error message It will not output hex files
183. e file The file name is incorrect The file name specified with the option is incorrect The input file is not an object file in IEEE 695 format An illegal option is specified CODE section address address overlaps The address range of the section is duplicated with section type section address lt address gt No address specified with option option No code to locate No ICE parameter file specified No name and address specified with option option No object file specified CODE section address address crossed page boundary section type section address address overlaps with the unavailable memory Unusable instruction code operation code at address object file name gt Unresolved external label in FILE NAME gt Branch destination too far from address Warning Messages Cannot create file kind file lt FILE NAME Cannot open file kind file FILE NAME gt Second definition of label label in FILE NAME Address is not specified with the option There is no valid code for mapping ICE parameter file is not specified Name and address are not specified with the option Object files to be linked are not specified The CODE section is across the page boundary The section exceeds the valid memory range An undefined code is used Reference was made to an undefined symbol A destination address in another page is specified Symbols ca
184. e file in which the label is defined and in the file that references the label A double definition of local labels will be an error at the assembly stage while a double definition of global labels will be an error at the link stage Example File in which global label is defined file1 global SYMBOL Global declaration of a label which is to be defined in this file SYMBOL LABEL Local label Can be referenced to only in this file File in which a global label is referenced to file2 global SYMBOL Global declaration of a label defined in other source file call SYMBOL Label externally referenced to LABEL Local label Treated as a different label from LABEL of filel The assembler regards those labels as those of undefined addresses in the assembling and includes that information in the object file it delivers Those addresses are finally determined by the processing of the linker When a label is defined by the comm pseudo instruction that label will be a global label Therefore in a defined file no global declaration needs to be made using the global pseudo instruction On the contrary in a file to be referenced the global declaration is necessary prior to the reference Restrictions e The maximum number of characters of a label is limited to 259 the same as that of one line e Only the following characters can be used A 4 az 09 e A label cannot begin with a numeral Examples OK i rr
185. e gt File name to be loaded path can also be specified i Examples Format 1 gt lf test absd Loading file OK Format 2 PX ES File name test abs Loading file OK gt i Notes e An error results if the loaded file is linked with a different ICE parameter file than the one the debugger is using Error different chip type can t load this file Only an IEEE 695 format object file generated by the linker can be loaded by the If command e If you want to use source display and symbols when debugging a program the object file must be in IEEE 695 format that contains debug information loaded into the computer e If the Source window is opened when loading a file its contents are updated The program contents are displayed from the current PC address e If an error occurs when loading a file portions of the file that have already been read will remain in the emulation memory GUI utility File Load File menu item Load File button When this menu item or button is selected a dialog box appears allowing selection of an object file to be loaded oad File i Load File button Look in E test EN Test abs Files of type Source Files abs Cancel 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 195 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER lO load option i Function This command loads an Intel HEX format program or option file listed below into the debugger
186. e section start address was specified with an option rcode rbss are mapped from the specified address Other relocatable sections are mapped from top of the relocatable CODE BSS section Basically the relocatable sections except those that are specified with the rcode or rbss option are arranged successively in the order of processing However if a relocatable section cannot be mapped subsequent to the previous mapped section for instance there is unused area indicated by the ICE parameter file an already mapped absolute section or if there is a page boundary the linker searches another area to map the section If there is no available area an error will occur A section is not divided into two or more blocks when it is mapped After that another section may be mapped in the vacant area if it is possible to map there If the or option is specified the linker tries to arrange as much as possible a relocatable section in the same page as the section that has many branching relationships in order to decrease unnecessary pset instructions Restrictions on linking Note that all sections may not be mapped depending on each section size or address specifications even if the relocatable object size is within the available memory size Example of linking A sample case where two relocatable object files testl o and test2 0 are linked together under the following condition is described further below Memory configuration of the mod
187. e specified file cannot be opened The specified file cannot be read Data cannot be written to the file The divisor in the expression is O The statement has a syntax error The number of macro parameters has exceeded the limit The address is duplicated Two or more statements were described in one line Nesting of include has exceeded the limit The number of internal branch labels has exceeded the limit The label is multiply defined The symbol is multiply defined Reference was made to an undefined label A non existing instruction was described The symbol mask has a description error A non existing pseudo instruction was described The symbol is multiply defined by define There is no section definition The result of the expression is out of the effective range Linker Ik62 Outline Links the relocatable objects created by the assembler by fixing the memory locations and creates executable absolute object codes The linker also provides an auto PSET insertion correction function allowing the programmer to create sources without having to know branch destination page numbers Flowchart from Assembler Linker Relocatable ICE command file object file s parameter file 3 file cm file par Linker IKGo luexiec reed i EE ME Absolute object file JL to Debugger Cross Absolute Error file reference file list file Link Symbol map file file Start up Co
188. ea e Data in the write only area cannot be read If the source area contains write only address 0 is written to the corresponding destination If the destination area contains read only address the data of that address can not be rewritten If the source and destination areas contain I O address of mixed read only bits and write only bits either read or write operation can be executed for the corresponding bits e An error results if there is an unused area in the specified source or destination area and no copy operation will be done Error no mapping area e When the contents of the data memory is modified using the dm command the displayed contents of the Data window are updated automatically Gui utility None 166 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 9 5 Register Operation rd register display Hi Function This command displays the contents of the registers current and next operation code and correspond ing mnemonic Format gt rd direct input mode i Display 1 Contents of display mi Register Jol x The following lists the contents displayed by this command PE Program counter A A register B B register X X register xt Y register 5r Stack pointer IDZC 278618 Current Code ed8 nee Flags Current Code Currently fetched program code at address indicated by PC LD A x8 Hext Code feu LD SPH A and corresponding mnemonic Nex
189. ect again after the next execution is completed e During a single step operation the program will not break even if the break condition set by a command is met Unlike in successive executions g or gr command the Register window is updated every time a step is executed Gui utility Run Next menu item Next button When this menu item or button is selected the n command without step count is executed She Next button 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 173 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 9 7 CPU Reset rst reset CPU i Function This command resets the CPU i Format gt rstu direct input mode Notes e The registers and flags are set as follows 0x0100 Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined 0 Undefined S1C6200 or 0 S1C6200A Undefined Undefined Undefined Ns ASe e e If the Source window is opened the window is redisplayed beginning with address 0x0100 If the Register window is opened the window is redisplayed with the above contents e The debug status such as memory contents and break conditions is not reset Gui utility Run Reset CPU menu item Reset button When this menu item or button is selected the rst command is executed x Reset button 174 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE 9 9 8 Break bp break point set Hi Function CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER This command sets or clears breakpoi
190. ed Data enter address 1004 Address is input 100 0 ad Data is input 101 0 SEES 4 Skipped 10 2 D gad Command is terminated gt Notes e The start address specified here must be within the range of the data memory area available with each microcomputer model An error results if the input one is not a hexadecimal number or a valid symbol Error invalid value An error results if the limit is exceeded Error Data address out of range The contents of the read only area cannot be rewritten A warning message will be displayed if you specify such an address Warning read only address can t write In guidance mode the contents of the write only I O area will be marked as hyphens For the contents of address of mixed read only and write only bits in I O area an exclamation mark will be marked in front of the data The contents of the unused area will be marked as slashes If you encounter any address marked by press Enter key to skip that address or terminate the command e Data must be input using a hexadecimal number in the range of 4 bits 0 to Oxf An error results if the limit is exceeded Error Data out of range use O0 Oxf When the contents of the data memory is modified using the de command the displayed contents of the Data window are updated automatically 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 163 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER In guidance m
191. eded Error Data address out of range An error results if the start address is larger than the end address Error end address lt start address The contents of the write only I O area cannot be read but will be marked as hyphens For the contents of address of mixed read only and write only bits in I O area an exclamation mark will be marked in front of the data The contents of the unused area will be marked as slashes Gui utility View Data Dump menu item When this menu item is selected the Data window opens or becomes active and displays the current data memory contents 162 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER de data memory enter Function This command rewrites the contents of the data memory with the input hexadecimal data Data can be written to continuous memory locations beginning with a specified address Hd Format 1 gt de address lt data1 gt lt data2 gt lt data16 gt W direct input mode 2 gt de guidance mode Data enter address lt address gt Address Original data lt data gt gt lt address gt Start address from which to write data hexadecimal or symbol IEEE 695 format only data 1 16 Write data hexadecimal Condition 0 address lt last data memory address 0 lt data lt Oxf Li Examples Format 1 gt de 100 AJ Rewrites data at address 0x100 with Oxa Format 2 gt d
192. eep stop CPU and oscillation 5 5 XX instructions LD xXx v c lt X lt xX lt 5 Yc Y 1 5 IXHex 7 4 XLex 3 0 Es YH y 7 4 YL y 8 0 h h h h h e e e e e e o e e e e e A o r U qx x lt xIx T T L U lt gt O lt lt XX MITT lt E l Remarks 111 111 111 111 111 111 01 0 0 XP r 111 1 0 00 0 r 5 XPe r xc rt fott foto foto effete pee r 1 o 1 o o 0 1 0 t 5 Xter YP r 111 1 10 10 1 Oi r 5 YPer ns Huretse tst e 1 1 o YES E 111 1101110 0r 5 r XP itjo t oft oot EccL s pon JE E5 freex r YP 111 110 11 0 r 5 reYP a hohoho EE em 5 evt 1101 0 0101 1 eoo 7 XL XL i C ojojijlo i ee 7 YHeYH i C ojoj i f elel 7 YLeYL i C Instruction List 3 Index operation instructions instructions Flag operation instructions Stack operation instructions Remarks Data transfer LD 4 e Oo 5 r M SP SP SP 1 1C6200 Core CPU Clasiffication Opcode Operan SuSE Code Ter se z Cik Function CP XH i 1 01 0 01 0 0 i iele 7 XH XLi 1 01 0 0 10 1 O o 7 XL YL i 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 lele 7 Li Gi COTO T peer iret Gg 1T o9 11019 r q aH B Mn 511 1
193. egister Break menu item When this menu item is selected a dialog box appears for clearing the register break conditions See the br command 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 183 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER bm multiple break Function This command sets or clears multiple break conditions combined with a PC data RAM access and register breaks Li Format 1 gt bm item value lt item gt value item lt value gt 2 bm Multiple break set status 1 set PC ADDR DATA R W A B FI FD FZ FC X Y gt 2 clear Old value Old value Old value Old value Old value Old value Old value Old value Old value Old value Old value Old value value value value value value value value value value 4 value value value 4 2 1 252 direct input mode guidance mode Command is completed when 2 is selected item PC ADDR DATA OPT A B F X Y ADDR DATA and OPT are for data RAM access please refer to bd command value Value set for each item hexadecimal or binary with B suffix can be used for the bits to be masked i Examples Format 1 gt bm PC 150 ADDR 20 DATA O OPT Wd Sets a PC and a data memory conditions In this case a break will occur when the program writes 0 to data memory address 0x20 and the progr
194. egister break None l set 2 clear share dal set is selected A del Data Oxa is set for A register condition B y El masks the register condition B pe du FD Ex m FZ ee FC eode yl X i 202 T a d returns guidance to previous setting x 020 604 i 2 wd gt pral ASA Bi X000 Yr LDACTLISQ B l set 2 clear zest el 2 clear is selected abr Register break None 1 set 2 clear teat ad Terminated by Enter key 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 181 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER ui Notes For the first time this command is executed no item can be skipped because no default value is set In guidance mode the following keyboard inputs have special meaning qA Command is terminated finish inputting and start execution ep Return to previous address al Input is skipped keep current value When the command is terminated in the middle of guidance by qu the contents that have been input up to that time will be modified However these contents will not be modified if some cleared settings are left intact A register break condition can be cleared by executing the bm command An error results if you input the register name other than A B X Y or F when using the direct input mode Error Incorrect register name use PC A B X Y F You can use the direct input mode to set register break condition at a time or change one or several
195. el ROM 8K words 0x0000 to Ox1fff 16 pages x 2 banks RAM 3 585 words 0x000 to Oxdff 14 pages I O memory 512 words 0xe00 to Oxfff 2 pages Relocatable object files test1 o test2 0 CODE relocatable BSS1 relocatable org is used org is used org is used Fig 6 10 1 Structure of sample relocatable files Sample linker command file code 0x0100 Relocatable CODE section start address rcode test2 0 0x0110 CODE section start address of test2 o bss 0x0500 Relocatable BSS section start address rbss test2 o 0x600 BSS section start address of test2 o o test abs Output file name testl o Input file 1 test2 0 Input file 2 When linking is executed with the commands defined above the linker maps the sections of each module in the manner graphically presented in Figure 6 10 2 100 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 6 LINKER test1 o test abs CODE1 relocatable BSS1 relocatable CODE2 absolute 0x000 BSS2 absolute Oxe00 test2 0 CODES relocatable BSS3 absolute Oxf00 ROM area CODE4 relocatable BSS4 relocatable RAM area Fig 6 10 2 Example of linking The absolute sections CODE2 BSS2 and BSS3 are mapped to the location specified in the source files The start addresses of the relocatable sections in test2 0 is specified by the rcode and rbss options so CODES is mapped from address 0x110 and CODE 4 follows
196. elected text in the Edit window to the clipboard D Paste button Pastes the text copied on the clipboard to the current cursor position in the Edit window or Le replaces the selected text with the copied text Find button Finds the specified word in the active Edit window A dialog box will appear allowing specifica is tion of the word to be found and a search condition Find Next button Finds next target word towards the end of the file Find Previous button Finds next target word towards the beginning of the file Print button Prints the document in the active Edit window A standard print dialog will appear allowing a e m specific print condition Help button Displays a dialog box showing the version of the work bench 9 20 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 4 WORK BENCH 4 4 2 Build Toolbar This tool bar has the following buttons and list boxes used to build a project Assemble button Assembles the assembly source in the active Edit window This button becomes active only when the active Edit window shows an assembly source file Build button Builds the currently opened project using a general make process Rebuild All button Builds the currently opened project All the source files will be assembled regardless of whether they are updated or not Stop Build button Stops the build process being exe
197. en below Error message filename is changed by another editor Reopen this file Description The currently opened file is modified by another editor Cannot create file filename The file linker command file debugger command file etc cannot be created filename was not found The source file cannot be found Cannot find ICE parameter file The ICE parameter file cannot be found Cannot open file filename The source file cannot be opened You cannot close workspace while a build is in progress Select the Stop Build command before closing The project close command or work bench terminate command is specified while the build task is being processed Would you like to build it The debugger invoke command is specified when the build task has not already been completed 5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE EPSON 45 CHAPTER 4 WORK BENCH 4 12 Precautions 1 The source file that can be displayed and edited in the work bench is limited to 16M byte size 2 The label search and coloring function of the work bench does not support labels that have not ended with a colon 3 The work bench can create a make linker command and debugger command files note however that these files or settings created with another editor cannot be input into the work bench 46 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE
198. ension of a file name Seiko Epson recommends using cmd Command files can also be created using the rec command The rec command creates a command file and saves the executed commands to the file Example of a command file The example below shows a command group necessary to read an object file and an option file Example File name startup cmd lf test abs lo testf hex lo tests hex A command file to write the commands that come with a guidance mode can be executed In this case be sure to break the line for each guidance input item as a command is written Reading in and executing a command file There are two methods to read a command file into the debugger and to execute it as described below 1 Execution by the start up option By specifying a command file in the debugger start up command one command file can be executed when the debugger starts up If the above example of a command file is specified for example the necessary files are read into the debugger immediately after the debugger starts up so everything is ready to debug the program Example Startup command of the debugger db62 gstart up ond xc862xxp par 2 Execution by a command The debugger has the com commands available that can be used to execute a command file The com command reads in a specified file and executes the commands in that file sequentially in the order they are written An execution interval between the commands can be specified up t
199. er information which the assembler delivers via the Standard Output stdout 48 EPSON 5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 3 Starting Method General form of command line as62 options source file name gt denotes a space indicates the possibility to omit Source file name In the command line only one assembly source file can be specified at a time Therefore you will have to process multiple files by executing the assembler the number of times equal to the number of files to be processed A long file name supported in Windows and a path name can be specified When including spaces in the file name enclose the file name with double quotation marks Options The assembler comes provided with five types of start up options d define name gt Function Definition of Define name Explanation Works in the same manner as you describe define define name gt at top of the source It is an option to control the conditional assembly at the start up e One or more spaces are necessary between d and the define name gt To define two or more Define names repeat the specification of d define name gt Function Explanation Default 0 file name gt Function Explanation Default Function Explanation Default Function Explanation Default Addition of debugging information Creates an output file containing symbo
200. ess out of range e The data value can be input as a binary number with or without mask bits or a hexadecimal number in the range of 4 bits 0 to Oxf An error results if the limit is exceeded Error invalid data pattern To input a binary value a suffix B must be used When specifying a binary number without mask bits all four bits should be input otherwise the value is treated as a hexadecimal number For example to specify 0b10 0010P should be input If only 10B is input it will be treated as Ox10b However when specifying mask bits only the required lower bits can be input In this case the higher bits will be treated as 0 by default For example 1 B will be treated as 001 B moe e An error results if you input the R W option other than r w or Error c r w option r wor Gui utility Break Data Break menu item When this menu item is selected a dialog box appears for setting a data break condition Data Break To set a data break condition enter an address and a data pattern in the text box and select R W Break Option condition from the radio buttons Then click Address po04 C Read Address OK To clear the set data break condition click Clear Data i B C Write Address Hex ar Bin AAW Address Mask Bit Data Bit 1 ar 0 Cancel Clear 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 179 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER bdc data break clear
201. essage CALL for different bank at address Description The call instruction calls a subroutine in another bank CALZ for non zero page at address The calz instruction calls a subroutine in another bank or another page other than page O Cannot create file kind file FILE NAME gt The file cannot be created Cannot open file kind file FILE NAME The file cannot be opened Cannot read file kind file lt FILE NAME gt The file cannot be read Cannot write file kind file FILE NAME gt Data cannot be written to the file Illegal file name FILE NAME gt The file name is incorrect Illegal file name FILE NAME gt specified with option option The file name specified with the option is incorrect Illegal object format FILE NAME gt The input file is not an object file in IEEE 695 format Illegal option option An illegal option is specified CODE section address address overlaps with section type section address address The address range of the section is duplicated No address specified with option option Address is not specified with the option No code to locate There is no valid code for mapping No ICE parameter file specified ICE parameter file is not specified No name and address specified with option option Name and address are not specified with the option No o
202. est Function This command displays the results of the ICE initial test The test consists of the following items 1 Sum check test of ICE firmware 2 ICE RAM read write test Li Format gt chk direct input mode i Display e If a ROM check error is detected the normal value and the error value will be displayed gt chkd ROM check error 5F gt FF normal value 5F error value FF gt e Ifa RAM check error is detected the memory address the normal value and the error value will be displayed gt chk4 RAM check error 110 5 gt F address 110 normal value 5 error value F gt GUI utility Option Self Diagnosis menu item When this menu item is selected the chk command is executed 218 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 9 20 Quit Q quit This command quits the debugger Format gt q direct input mode GUI utility File Exit menu item Selecting this menu item terminates the debugger S5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 219 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 10 Error Warning Messages 1 ICE errors Error message Content of message Error communication error There is a probrem in communication between Host and ICE Error ID not match ICE protocol ID error Error ROM sum check error ICE62 firmware ROM sum error found during self diagnostic test Error RAM check
203. est program main routine xxx INITIAL SP ADDRESS DEFINITION xx define SP INIT RDDR 8x88 2 3exx BOOT LOOP ses global INIT RA amp H BLK1 global INC_RAM BLK1 0x100 a SP_INIT_ADDR gt gt 4 sph a a SP_INIT_ADDR amp OxF spl a INIT_RAM_BLK1 INC RAH BLK1 LOOP 3ex RAM block xxx b55 org 6x 666 i sub s mel x zj sub s test program subroutines global RAM BLK1 org 6x2 66 xxxxx RAM block 1 initialize xxx global INIT RAH BLK1 INIT RAH BLK1 a RAM_BLK1 h xp a x RAM_BLK1 1 mx 6 mx 6 xxxx RAM block 1 increment sex global INC RAM BLK1 INC RAM BLK1 a RAH BLK1 h xp a x RAM BLK1 1 To tile windows horizontally select Tile Horizontally from the Window menu or click the Tile Horizontally button Tile Horizontally button 313 mai 3 main s Goto Label main s test program main routine define SP INIT RDDR 6x86 xxxx BOOT LOOP sese global INIT RAM BLK1 global INC RAH BLK1 E o 0D OM UT fans oh 2 sub s Goto Label sub s test program subroutines qlobal RAM BLK1 org 6x2 66 Pxxxxx RAM block 1 initialize sex global INIT_RAM_BLK1 INIT RAM BLK1 s Qreoean ow f oh h xxx INITIAL SP ADDRESS DEFINITION s SP init addr Bx88 18 5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 4 WORK BENCH 3 Maximizing an Edit window Click the Maximize
204. estriction as to where the description of an instruction may begin in a line An instruction containing a parameter needs to be separated into the instruction and the parameter with one or more tabs or spaces If an instruction requires multiple parameters they are separated from each other with an appropriate delimiter 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 53 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER Types of pseudo instructions The following 23 types of pseudo instructions are available include define macro endm ifdef ifndef else endif align org page bank code bss codeword comm lcomm global 98600 alist n list stabs Stabn The assembler supports the old format pseudo instructions for asm62XX as well as the above instruc tions For details of each pseudo instruction and its functionality refer to Section 5 7 Assembler Pseudo Instructions Restriction The mnemonics and pseudo instructions are all not case sensitive Therefore they can be written in uppercase A Z characters lowercase a z characters or both For example Id LD and Ld are all accepted as Id instructions However the user defined symbols used in the operands or param eters are case sensitive They must be the same with the defined characters 5 5 3 Labels A label is an identifier designed to refer to an arbitrary address in the program It is possible to refer to a branch destination of a program or a data memory add
205. ete enam etd it Sra RIeu TRUS d RV Ree Rees a a 3 22 Installation Method a eunte irt EU RD DRM NANEN EAR PPM IO 4 2 9 Directories and Files after DUSIQUOilOllssase siet o DeE D RU c ASIE pSE tant 6 CHAPTER 3 SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT PROCEDURE eee e eee eee eee eene eene thee nennen 7 Su Sotware Development T OW o pases iE innra EEE EE EN F 3 2 Development Using Work Bench assess ccxadiaactisnasvinsaenvatiaaversessavaeentresaaeieeeee 8 3 2 1 Starting Up the Work Bench is sivsansessannnsencdncsncosacesearadveadenbeuninessensetaubianseivaunes Do ITI IUE NR 2e ORE 9 902 0 FOIE SONICS TUS EEE EE HS E eIR p hEDH MERE M IM IUE 9 3 2 4 Configuration of Tool Options sconiavisvatvnisen vincdeniertuiswrvvistentaheiniadiiarieserteixios PE 3 2 5 Building an Executable Object seusstexcenccactiseese e edu elivtu stes coded det rines Ero 12 SUA ORBI Fe re RET 13 CHAPTERS WORK DENCH RT E dii 14 A E E EE E T E E E ES 14 4 2 Starting Up and Terminating the Work Bench cesses 14 43 Work Bench WINDOWS vesireitin vexit e E VEU EVE UE nte Ceu et e iab 15 di3 d Window COn LOM camps Re enere ra EEEE NATER EE EENES 15 4 32 Wirndow Manipulation ee tin ri pct Spb Drei e NESEN 16 44 Toolbar and BULTOIS c etoetivese rhe sin reo d terno gau ka x Ev Up EIN eu e reco Peu vau 20 dadd SIRO ft O01 OF aentienmeartdvpvt exta det tix E EEEE NERENN EEE 20 EL BUA IT C 21 44 3 Window ToolbaP E eris i na EE Ee 21 4 4 4 Toolbar Manip
206. ferent codes vp Error Incorrect ROM type 64 128 256 512 An illegal value is specified for the ROM type parameter of the rom command rom Error Number of steps out of range use 0 65535 The specified step count is out of range s n Error symbol type error The symbol type CODE BSS is error All symbol support commands Error this chip not support this function The chip with the used parameter file cannot support this option function lo Error undefined code detected Undefined code is detected when loading file rp Error Incorrect register name use PC A B X Y F An invalid register name is specified br Warning read only address can t write This data address is read only cannot be written to de 220 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE 1C62 Family Assembler Package Quick Reference EPSON CMOS 4 bit Single Chip Microcomputer Memory Map Program Memory Map Bank 0 Step Page 1 Bank 0 OxO Program start address 0x1 Interrupt vector area Oxf S1C6200 Core CPU Data Memory Map Address Page 0 0x00 0x10 RAM Display memory I O memory S1C62 Family Assembler Package Page 15 our Program area Bags a Step _ Page 1 Bank 1 Address Other pages e oxo 0 0x00 RAM Quick Reference on Maximum Display memon Interrupt vector area configulation Oxff I O memory for Development T p a remm
207. file are delivered Results of automatic pset insertion deletion correction As the result of automatic pset insertion deletion correction the pset instruction may be coded without accordance to the source part To show the result of such code optimizations clearly the following description will be made on an absolute list file When pset is inserted is placed to the right of the code part There is no original source for the code but the disas sembled pset bank page number is delivered at the source part When pset is deleted is placed to the left of the original source part The original statement appears at the source part in the list file but no code is delivered When the operand of pset is corrected is placed to the left of the source statement Instructions preprocessed in the assembler The instructions expanded in the assembler macros include sources JPM instruction and CALLM instruction are listed with a 98 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 6 LINKER 6 9 Cross Reference File The cross reference file enumerates all the address labels with their absolute addresses and all the ad dresses where the address labels are referred to It is delivered only when the x option is specified Its file format is a text file and the file name is file name xrf The file name is the same as that of the output object file Sample cross reference fi
208. for details of the HEX converter options 44 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE 4 10 Short Cut Key List CHAPTER 4 WORK BENCH Key operation Function Ctrl N Creates a new document Ctrl O Opens an existing document Ctrl F12 Opens an existing document Ctrl S Saves the document Ctrl P Print the active document Ctrl Shift F12 Print the active document Ctrl Z Undoes the last action Alt BackSpace Undoes the last action Ctrl X Cuts the selection and puts it on the clipboard Shift Delete Cuts the selection and puts it on the clipboard Ctrl C Copies the selection to the clipboard Ctrl Insert Copies the selection to the clipboard Ctrl V Inserts the clipboard contents at the insertion point Shift Insert Inserts the clipboard contents at the insertion point Ctrl A Selects the entire document Ctrl F Finds the specified text F3 Finds next Shift F3 Finds previous Ctrl H Replaces the specified text with different text Ctrl G Moves to the specified location Ctrl F7 Assembles the file F7 Builds the project Ctrl Break Stops the build F5 Debugs the project Alt F7 Edits the project build and debug settings Ctrl Tab Next MDI Window Short cut key Opens the popup menu Shift F10 Opens the popup menu 4 11 Error Messages The work bench error messages are giv
209. g call is made between banks an error will result This occurs only when the section that calls the subroutine and the section in which the subroutine exists are absolute sections and are in different banks Relocatable sections are located so that a cross bank call does not occur If the subroutine call is made within the same bank the optimization process is the same as that for the jp instruction Examples Original source After corrected disassembled code ld a b ld a b call SUBROUTINE pset XX call SUBROUTINE Necessary pset XX instruction is inserted If both the subroutine and current section are absolute and are in different banks an error will result pset YY call SUBROUTINE call SUBROUTINE pset YY is removed if unnecessary Even when pset Y Y is necessary YY is checked and corrected if wrong If both the subroutine and current section are absolute and are in different banks an error will result If the dr option is specified existing pset instructions will not be removed 102 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE 6 12 Error Warning Messages 6 12 1 Errors CHAPTER 6 LINKER When an error occurs the linker will immediately terminate the processing after displaying an error message No object file will be output Other files will be delivered only in the part which was processed prior to the occurrence of the error The error messages are given below Error m
210. g level limit nesting level limit exceeded Nesting of include has exceeded the limit Number of macro labels limit The number of internal branch labels has exceeded the limit number of macro label limit exceeded Second definition of label label The label is multiply defined Second definition of symbol symbol The symbol is multiply defined Unknown label label Reference was made to an undefined label Unknown mnemonic lt name gt A non existing instruction was described Unknown symbol mask lt name gt The symbol mask has a description error Unsupported directive lt directive gt A non existing pseudo instruction was described 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 87 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 11 2 Warning When a warning occurs the assembler will keep on processing and terminates the processing after displaying a warning message unless any other error is produced The warning message is delivered displayed in the following formats Source file name Line number Warning Warning message Example TEST S 41 Warning Expression out of range The warning messages are given below Warning message Description Second definition of define symbol symbol The symbol is multiply defined by define Section activation expected use code bss There is no section definition Expression out of range The result of the expression is out of the effective range
211. ge hexadecimal or symbol IEEE 695 format only Condition 0 staddr 1 4 endaddr 1 4 last program memory address i Examples Format 1 gt ta 400 6004 Sets a trace area from address 0x400 to 0x600 gt Format 2 gt ta alld Sets as entire program memory to be traced gt Format 3 gt tad Trace area 0000 UTTE ls SAE 2 Glear 3 Clear all Sel x Clears all areas gt ta No trace extract address is defined 1 set 2 clear 3 clear all dba Start address 1004 Sets a trace area from address 0x100 to Ox17f End address 17f Start address 200 Sets a trace area from address 0x200 to Ox2ff End address 2ff Start address J Terminated by Enter key Piu Trace area 0100 017 f 0200 02ff l set 2 clear 3 clear all saa iPad Start address 1504 Clears a trace area from address 0x150 to 0x24f End address 24f Start address 4l gt tad Trace area 0100 014f 0250 02TE 1 set 2 clear 3 clear all Meuse al gt S5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 201 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER i Notes The addresses must be specified within the range of the program memory area available for each microcomputer model An error results if the input one is not a hexadecimal number or a valid symbol Error invalid value An error results if the limit is exceeded Error Program address out of range An error results if the st
212. ged 1 Set 1 0 Reset 0 Indicates that the instruction performs a decimal operation if the D flag is set Clk Indicates the number of execution cycles Instruction List 2 S1C6200 Core CPU Mnemonic Clasiffication Branch PSET p instructions JP Flags Opcode Operand MSB E DIZ C CIk Function 5 NPBepi4 NPP p 3 0 5 PCBC NBP PCP NPP PCS lt s instructions HALT e C s 0 0 1 H PCB NBP PCP lt NPP PCScs if C 1 NC s 0 0 1 5 PCB eNBP PCP lt NPP PCSes if C20 5 PCB NBP PCP NPP PCScs if Z 1 NZ s 0 1 1 Ss 5 IPCBe NBP PCP lt NPP PCSes if Z 0 IPBA Z POB NBP POP NPP PCSHe B POSLCA S 7 M P 1 PCP M SP22 PCSH M SP 3 lt PCSL 1 SP amp SP 3 PCPCNPP PCS lt s CALZ 1 0 S 7 M SP 1 lt PCP M SP 2 PCSH M SP 3 lt PCSL 1 SP lt SP 3 PCP 0 PCSes RET Treo E ECSEDEH PCSL M SP PCSH M SP 1 PCP M SP 2 SP SP 3 12 PCSL lt M SP PCSH M SP 1 PCP lt M SP 2 SP SP43 PC PC 1 12 PCSL M SP PCSH M SP 1 PCP M SP 2 SP SP 3 M X 3 0 MH e 7 4 X X42 System 5 No operation 5 clock cycles control No operation 7 clock cycles Index INC operation h h 9 h h h h d h h h h h oO a S deni n O o o O O O 5 Halt stop CPU 5 Sl
213. global RAM BLK1 s org 6x266 the same window layout will Pet OPIDO ER appearat the next time the work dU ees ul b h 1d a RAH BLK1 h enc starts up X RAH BLK l set RAM_BLK1 address to x nx 8 set 6x6666 to RAM BLK1 nx 8 Linker 62 Uer x Copyright C SEIKO EPSON CORP 1993 l Created absolute object file TEST ABS Link 8 error s 8 varning s Build Done e For Help press F1 Ln 1 Col NUM Double click H WorkBench62 Version X Xx sub s Floating and docking the SEE E Project and Output EEE Esai SESS ES indow seges ficsezcP rar m Absolute Object m dk ese WI n 20 main s e ace 7 Gc T sub s m B a The Project window and the C B nans Output window can be made EE N global RAM BLK1 a floating window by double ers ox200 clicking the window boundary we dye 0 global INIT RAM BLi1 necosbiles Gar ORE and the floating window can be aAa as RUM BLAN Copyright C SEIKO EPSON CORP 199x a X RAH_BLK1 1 set RAM BLK1 addr created SET ere eee ea ibe moved and resized in the work n o set 8880 to RaM rreoted error log file SUD ERR nx 8 Created relocatable object file SUB 0 bench window The floating MTS Assembly 8 error s 8 warning s window will be restored to a ped trino ME docking window by double peur preprocessed sure rie ms Created error 10g file MAIN ERR clicking the window s title bar Created relocatable object file MAIN O fissembly 8 error s 8
214. he debugger displays 11 lines of the trace data from num in the Command window gt td Start point ENTER from the latest d trace fetch register trace data Loc CODE PG AB X X IDZC MemOP OtherOP 0000 e08 LD A 0x8 OLOO 0 0 O01 100 0100 0001 fe0 LD SPH A 0101 68 0 001 100 0100 0002 e00 LD A 0x0 0102 8 0 001 100 0100 0003 ff0 LD SPL A 0103 0 O 001 100 0100 0004 e42 PSET 0x2 0104 0 O 001 100 0100 0005 400 CALL 0x0 0105 00 001 100 0100 WO7F 1 W07E 0 W07D 6 0006 e00 LD A 0x0 0200 0 0 001 100 0100 0007 e80 LD XP A 0201 00 001 100 0100 0008 b00 LD X 0x0 0202 0 0 000 100 0100 0009 900 LBPX MX 0x0 0203 0 0 001 100 0100 WOOO 0 WO01 0 0010 900 LBPX MX 0x0 0204 0 O 003 100 0100 WO0O2 0 WOO03 0 gt td 104 trace fetch register trace data Loc CODE PC AB X Y IDZC MemOP OtherOP 0010 900 LBPX MX 0x0 0204 00 003 100 0100 W002 20 WO03 0 0011 dTdf RET 0205 00 004 100 0100 R07D 6 R07E 0 RO7F 1 0012 e42 PSET 0x2 0106 00 004 100 0100 0013 406 CALL 0x6 0107 00 004 100 0100 WO7F 1 WO7E 0 WO7D 8 0014 e00 LD A 0x0 0206 00 004 100 0100 0015 e80 LD XP A 0207 0 O 004 100 0100 0016 DOO LD X 0x0 0208 0 0 000 100 0100 0017 e00 LD A 0x0 0209 00 000 100 0100 0018 41 SCF 020a 0 0 000 100 0101 0019 28 ACPX MX A 020b 00 000100 0100 R000 0 w000 21 0020 28 ACPX MX A 020c 00 001 100 0110 R001 0 wWO001 20 gt Notes e Trace memory has a capacity of 8 192 cycles On the other hand the S1C6200 has 5 7
215. he debugging functions and operations refer to Chapter 9 Debugger S5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 13 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 4 WORK BENCH CHAPTER 4 WorK BENCH This chapter describes the functions and operating method of the Work Bench wb62 4 1 Features The Work Bench wb62 provides an integrated operating environment ranging from editing source files to debugging Its functions and features are summarized below e Source edit function that supports copy paste find replace print label jump and tag jump from error messages e Allows simple management of all necessary files and information as a project e General make process to invoke necessary tools and to update the least necessary files e Supports all options of the assembler linker HEX converter disassembler and debugger e Windows GUI interface for simple operation 4 2 Starting Up and Terminating the Work Bench To start up the work bench Programs gt A CCOSSOf Choose WorkBench62 from the Program menu to start up the work bench f WorkBench62 is not registered in the Program menu it means that the installation was not suc cessful Therefore reinstall the tools by referring to Chapter 2 Installation When the work bench starts up the window shown below appears ox ICS621CP PAR m Absolute Object e BP SS m To terminate the work bench Select Exit from the File menu 14 EPSON S
216. hed Break switch is pressed Status halt The status of ICE is halt Status key break Key break is pressed Status reset switch target Reset switch is pressed Status reset switch idle Reset switch is idle Status target down There is a problem in communication between the ICE and Evaluation Board Status time out Command errors No coverage address The time waiting for a message from ICE is too long There is no coverage information cv No trace data There is no trace data in trace memory td ts Error Program address out of range The specified program memory address is out of range pe pf pm sc m u g bp cv ts Error Data address out of range The specified data memory address is out of range de df dm dd ts Error can t open file The file cannot be opened If lo Error Data out of range use 0 Oxf The specified number is out of the data range de df Error different chip type can t load this file A different ICE parameter is used in the file If Error end address start address The start address is larger than the end address pf pm df dm bp cv Error error file type extension should be CMD The extension of the command file should be CMD com Error Incorrect identifier use PC ADDR DATA OPT A B X Y F An illegal parameter has been specified for an item of th
217. hen it is done in guidance mode the unassemble contents of the Source window are updated immediately in unassemble display mode but will be updated when the qu is input to terminate the command in mix display mode Although the contents of the unassemble display are modified by rewriting code those of source display remain unchanged Gui utility None 158 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER pf program memory fill i Function This command rewrites the contents of the specified program memory area with the specified code i Format 1 gt pf lt address1 gt lt address2 gt lt code gt direct input mode 2 gt pf guidance mode Start address lt address1 gt End address address2 Fill code lt code gt gt lt address1 gt Start address of specified range hexadecimal or symbol IEEE 695 format only lt address2 gt End address of specified range hexadecimal or symbol IEEE 695 format only lt code gt Write code hexadecimal valid operation code of S1C62 Condition 0 address lt address2 lt last program memory address 0 code lt Oxfff i Examples Format 1 gt pf 200 2FF FFBA Fills the area from address 0x200 to address Ox2ff with Oxffb Format 2 pid Start address 2004 Start address is input End address 2ff End address is input Fill code fff Code is input gt Command execution can be c
218. his menu item quits the debugger It performs the same function when the q command is executed Go This menu item executes the target program from the address indicated by the current PC It performs the same function when the g command is executed Go to Cursor This menu item executes the target program from the address indicated by the current PC to the cursor position in the Source window the address of that line It performs the same function when the g address command is executed Before this menu item can be selected the Source window must be open and the address line where the program is to break must be clicked Selecting a break address by clicking on the address line is valid for only the lines that have actual code and is invalid for the source only lines Go from Reset This menu item resets the CPU and then executes the target program from the program start address 0x100 It performs the same function when the gr command is executed Step This menu item executes one instruction step at the address indicated by the current PC It performs the same function when the s command is executed Next This menu item executes one instruction step at the address indicated by the current PC If the instruction to be executed is call or calz it is assumed that a program section until control returns to the next address constitutes one step and all steps of their subroutines are executed This menu item performs the s
219. ht C SEIKO EPSON CORP 199x End message The assembler outputs the following messages to indicate which files have been created when it ends normally Created preprocessed source file lt FILENAME MS gt Created relocatable object file lt FILENAME O gt Created relocatable list file lt FILENAME LST gt Created error log file lt FILENAME ERR gt Assembly O0 error s O0 warning s Usage output If no file name was specified or the option was not specified correctly the assembler ends after delivering the following message concerning the usage Usage as62 options file name Options d symbol Add preprocess definition e Output error log file ERR e Add source debug information in object 1 Output relocatable list file LST o file name Specify output file name O or no extension File name Source file name DAT S or MS When error warning occurs If an error is produced an error message will appear before the end message shows up Example TEST S 5 Error Illegal syntax Assembly 1 erros s 0 warning s In the case of an error the assembler ends without creating an output file If an error occurs at the preprocessing stage in the assembler the assembler stops processing and outputs preprocess level errors only If a warning is issued a warning message will appear before the end message shows up Example TEST S 6 Warning Expression out of range Assembly 0 error s 1 warning s I
220. ifting to left 4 gt gt Shifting to right 4 Addition 5 Subtraction 5 Equal relational operator 6 l Not equal relational operator 6 lt Less than relational operator 6 lt Less than or equal relational operator 6 gt Greater than relational operator 6 gt Greater than or equal relational operator 6 amp Bit AND 7 Bit OR 8 Bit XOR 8 amp amp AND relational operator 9 ll OR relational operator 10 Numbers and symbols can be used as terms in expressions The expression is calculated as a signed 16 bit data Do not put any space or TAB between operator and number Error Messages Cannot open file kind file FILE NAME gt Cannot read file kind file lt FILE NAME gt Cannot write file kind file lt FILE NAME gt Division by zero Illegal syntax Macro parameter range macro parameter range exceeded CODE section address overlaps with CODE section lt address gt Multiple statements on the same line Nesting level limit nesting level limit exceeded Number of macro labels limit number of macro label limit exceeded Second definition of label label Second definition of symbol symbol Unknown label label Unknown mnemonic name Unknown symbol mask name Unsupported directive directive Warning Message Second definition of define symbol lt symbol gt Section activation expected use lt code bss gt Expression out of range Development Tools Th
221. ile Vertically Arrange conz Tile Horizontally Close All Tiles the opened Edit window horizontally v 1 subs Tile Vertically 2 main Tiles the opened Edit window vertically The currently opened Arrange Icons document file names are listed in this menu Selecting one activates dow area the Edit window Arranges the minimized Edit window icons at the bottom of the Edit win Close All Closes all the Edit windows opened 4 5 8 Help Menu About WB62 About WEG Displays a dialog box showing the version of the work bench 26 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 4 WORK BENCH 4 6 Project and Work Space The work bench manages a program development task using a work space folder and a project file that contains file and other information necessary for invoking the development tools 4 6 1 Creating a New Project A new project file can be created by the following procedure 1 Select New from the File menu or click the New button ni New button The New dialog box appears Hew ES EDC Assembly Source File EOC Assembly Header File Cancel Help 2 Select EOC Project File and click OK The Project dialog box appears Project Project ILE parameter file ICS621CP PAR Location Cancel CAEDCE2 EJ A 3 Enter a project name select an ICE parameter file and select a directory then click OK The
222. imal and binary Decimal notations of values Notations represented with 0 9 only will be regarded as decimal numbers To specify a negative value put a minus sign before the value Examples 1 255 3 Characters other than 0 9 and the sign cannot be used Hexadecimal notations of values To specify a hexadecimal number place 0x before the value Examples Oxla Oxff00 Ox cannot be followed by characters other than 0 9 a f and A F Binary notations of values To specify a binary number place 0b before the value Examples 051001 051001100 Ob cannot be followed by characters other than 0 or 1 Specified ranges of values The size specified range of immediate data varies with each instruction The specifiable ranges of different immediate data are given below Table 5 5 7 1 Types of immediate data and their specifiable ranges Symbol Type Decimal Hexadecimal Binary p 5 bit immediate data label 0 31 0x0 0x1f 0b0 0b11111 S 8 bit immediate data label 0 255 Ox0 Oxff 0b0 0b1 1111111 8 bit immediate data 0 255 Ox0 Oxff 0b0 0b1 1111111 i 4 bit immediate data 0 15 0x0 0xf 0b0 0b1111 These symbols are used in the instruction list of the 51C6200 6200A Core CPU Manual or Quick Reference Compatibility with the older tools The assembler allows the notation in the old syntax for the asm62XX Thus the following numerical notations can be used nnnnB Binary number
223. imilar to the relocatable list file output by the assembler except that the location addresses are absolute and takes the form of an integrated single file Text file File name File name gt err Output destination Current directory Description File delivered when the start up option e is specified It records the information which the linker outputs to the Standard Output stdout such as error messages 90 EPSON 5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 6 LINKER 6 3 Starting Method General form of command line Ik62 Options lt Relocatable object files gt Linker command file gt ICE parameter file gt denotes a space indicates the possibility to omit The order of options and file names can be arbitrary File names Files are identified with their extensions Therefore an appropriate extension should be included in each file name However the extension o of the relocatable object file can be omitted Relocatable object files File name o gt Linker command file ICE parameter file File name cm File name par gt When using a linker command file options relocatable object file names an ICE parameter file name and an output file name can be described in the linker command file If all the items to be specified are entered in a command line the linker command file is not necessary When linking multiple relocatable object files from a comman
224. in the work space folder file epj Project file This file contains the project information lt file gt cm Linker command file This file is generated when a build task is started and is used by the linker to generate an absolute object file Example WorkBench62 Generated Friday May Ol 1998 C NEOC62Ndev62NDev621cNIcs621cp par ICE parameter file o Lest abs output file absolute object linked object file s sub o main o The contents vary according to the source files included in the project and the linker option setting lt file gt cmd Debugger startup command file This file is generated when a build task is started and is used by the debugger to execute the com mand in this file when it is started up Example Li COIOBC QDS The work bench generates this file so that the executable file according to the format selection is loaded when the debugger starts up lt file gt mak make file for build task This file is generated when a build task is started and is used for the build process in the work bench Example WorkBench62 Generated Friday May 01 1998 ASM as62 exe LINK 1k62 exe HEX hx62 exe ASM_FLG g LINK FLG g HEX FLG e b ALL test abs test abs test cm sub o main o S LINK S LINK FLG test cm sub o s C E0C62 test sub s S ASM S ASM FLG C EOC62 test sub s main o C E0C62 test main s S ASM S ASM FLC C EOC62 test main s This is a generic ma
225. indow The on the fly function can be disabled and re enabled using the otf command 4 Measuring execution time steps The ICE contains a 16 bit execution counter allowing measurement of the program execution time or the number of steps executed When the program starts executing successively the execution counter starts counting after resetting the counter When the program execution is suspended the counter stops counting and the counted value is displayed in the Command window The count mode can be selected using the tim command In the initial debugger settings the execu tion time count mode is selected The following lists the maximum values that can be measured by the execution counter and measure ment error Execution time count mode 6 5 x 65535 psec 425 9775 msec error 6 5 psec Step count mode 65535 steps error 1 step If the counter overflows during program execution Run time Time over will be displayed as the results 146 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER Single stepping 1 Types of single stepping There are two types of single stepping available e Stepping through all instructions STEP All instructions are executed one step at a time according to the PC regardless of the type of instruction e Stepping through instructions except subroutines NEXT The call and calz instructions are executed under the assumption that one step constitutes the
226. ing data memory contents The Data window displays the memory dump results in hexadecimal numbers The symbols that appear in the Data window indicate the following status Unused address Write only I O address I An address that contains a write only bit or a read only bit Updating of display m Baggs Gm gm oO TS Xn Gm Gn Za Z2 G2 ee i o mm on Ga Za Zn oU Gn og o TS Ge geese C2 Z2 Ch mn on Gn Gp Zn Ue eS eS CUeQC9eQCS 7 U Ce Cn Ga Za Z2 G2 C2 Z2 The display contents of the Data window are updated automatically when memory contents are mm on Za Z2 Z2 Za Zo Za omn CD sss Za Z2 Zn omm om F Baggage CT ma UeoCT C TN Xn Gn oGa Za Z2 Gn wM modified with a command de df or dm command or by direct modification After executing the pro gram g gr s n or rst command the display con tents are also updated To refresh the Data window H b Hu A t H u H H f a oem C Sm Sm C e Snomnom ocmnomosnom oc i Bagge os X Gn Ga Z2 Z2 Z2 Z2 Z2 a En Za Za Za Z2 Za oes os Uwe X3 Gn Za Z2 Z2 Z2 C2 Z2 D En Zn Gn Ga Za Gn UeoUe9QS UeQSCeQSO7 ss C2 En Zn Zn Za Za Zn UeoUe9QS NN es 02 n Zn Gn Gg Zn UeoUeSOUeQ GO G2 Z2 Z2 7 manually execute the dd command or click the wr vertical scroll bar 2 Direct modification of data memory contents The Data window allows direct modification of data memory contents To modify dat
227. ing s For Help press F1 n4 Co 1 NUM Output window In the build task a general make process is executed to update the least necessary files To rebuild all the files without the make function select Rebuild All from the Build menu or click the Rebuild All button Rebuild All button To invoke the assembler only to correct syntax errors select Assemble in the Built menu or click the Assemble button El Assemble button 12 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 3 SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT PROCEDURE 3 2 6 Debugging To debug the executable object 1 Select Debug from the Build menu or click the Debug button X Debug button The debugger starts up with the specified ICE parameter file and then loads the executable object file Note Make sure that the ICE is ready to debug before invoking the debugger Refer to the ICE hardware manual for settings and startup method of the ICE i Db62 Command PIIE3 File Run Break Trace View Option Window Help e j ajaja So ale m Register OL x Search Label E 1 8188 e 68 ld a 0x8 ld a SP INIT ADDR gt gt 4 set SP 15 6161 fee ld sph a ld sph a 16 6162 e686 ld a 6x6 ld a SP INIT fiDDR amp Oxf 17 6163 ff8 ld spl a ld spl a 18 6164 e42 pset 8x2 2 8185 488 call 8x8 ane call INIT R amp H BLK1 initialize RAt ID2C 6611 21 6166 eh pset 6x2 Current Code e68
228. inter Stack pointer SPL or its contents 4 low order bits of the stack pointer New bank pointer NBP or its contents 1 bit New page pointer NPP or its contents 4 bits Program counter bank PCB or its contents 1 bit Program counter page PCP or its contents 4 bits Program counter step PCS or its contents 8 bits 4 high order bits of PCS 4 bits 4 low order bits of PCS 4 bits Memory Addresses Memory Data MX M X MY M Y Mn M n M SP Data memory addressed by IX or the contents of the specified memory Data memory addressed by IY or the contents of the specified memory Data memory addressed by n n 0 to Oxf or the contents of the specified memory Stack addressed by SP or the contents of the stack address Immediate Data p S l X y i n r q 5 bit immediate data or a label 0x0 0x1f 8 bit immediate data or a label 0x0 Oxff 8 bit immediate data 0x0 Oxff 4 bit immediate data 0x0 0xf 4 bit address for specifying Mn Ox0 Oxf 2 bit immediate data for specifying a register or a data memory r q Register memory specified O O O O S1C6200 Core CPU Functions c Indicates that the right item is loaded or set to the left item Addition i Subtraction amp AND OR XOR I NOT Flags Z Zero flag C Carry flag I Interrupt flag D Decimal flag Not changed e Set 1 reset 0 or not chan
229. ions The assembler only permits backward reference of a macro invocation Therefore the macro definition must precede the use of it Once a defined macro name is defined it cannot be canceled If the same macro name is defined duplicatedly a warning message will appear Until it is redefined it is expanded with the original content and once it is redefined it is expanded with the new content Definition should be done with distinct names although the program operation will not be affected No other characters than delimiters space tab line feed and commas can be added before and after a dummy parameter in a statement The same character string as that of the define instruction cannot be used as a macro name When the number of dummy parameters differs from that of actual parameters an error will result The maximum number of parameters and internal branch labels are limited according to the free memory space __Lnnnn used for the internal branch labels should not be employed as other label or symbol 68 EPSON 5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 7 4 Conditional Assembly Instructions Zifdef else endif ifndef else fendif A conditional assembly instruction determines whether assembling should be performed within the specified range dependent on whether the specified name Define name is defined or not Instruction formats Format 1 ifdef lt Name g
230. is input End address 2ff l End address is input Fill data 0 Data is input gt Command execution can be canceled by entering only the Enter key and nothing else i Notes Both the start and end addresses specified here must be within the range of the data memory area available with each microcomputer model An error results if the input one is not a hexadecimal number or a valid symbol Error invalid value An error results if the limit is exceeded Error Data address out of range An error results if the start address is larger than the end address Error i end address lt starri address Data must be input using a hexadecimal number in the range of 4 bits 0 to Oxf An error results if the limit is exceeded Error Data out of range use O0 Oxf Write operation is not performed to the read only address of the I O area When there is an unused area in the specified address range no error occurs The area other than the unused area will be filled with the specified data When the contents of the data memory is modified using the df command the displayed contents of the Data window are updated automatically GUI utility None 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 165 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER dm data memory move i Function This command copies the contents of the specified data memory area to another area Format 1 dm lt address1 gt lt address2 gt
231. k Space key or Delete key to correct erroneous input When you press the Enter key after entering a command the system executes that command If the command entered is accompanied by guidance the command is executed when the necessary data is input according to the displayed guidance Input example Sg Only a command is input gt com test cmd A command and parameter are input Command input accompanied by guidance For commands that cannot be executed unless a parameter or the commands that modify the existing data are specified a guidance mode is entered when only a command is input In this mode the system brings up a guidance field so input a parameter there Input example gt LT File name test abs J Input data according to the guidance underlined part gt Commands requiring parameter input as a precondition The If command shown in the above example reads an absolute object file into the debugger Com mands like this that require an entered parameter as a precondition are not executed until the param eter is input and the Enter key pressed If a command has multiple parameters to be input the system brings up the next guidance so be sure to input all necessary parameters sequentially If the Enter key is pressed without entering a parameter in some guidance session of a command the system assumes the command is canceled and does not execute it 136 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMB
232. ke file that contains macro setting and dependency list The following files are generated by the development tools during a build process lt file gt o Relocatable object files generated by the assembler lt file gt abs Absolute object file generated by the linker lt file gt h hex file 2l hex Intel HEX files generated by the Hex converter when this format is specified in the work bench lt file gt hsa lt file gt Isa Motorola S files generated by the HEX converter when this format is speci fied in the work bench 30 EPSON 5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 4 WORK BENCH 4 7 Source Editor The work bench has a source editor function Sources can be created and modified in the Edit window 4 7 1 Creating a New Source or Header File To create a new source file 1 Select New from the File menu or click the New button iu New button The New dialog box appears OK EDC Assembly Source File EDC Assembly Header File EOC Project File Cancel 2 Select EOC Assembly Source File and click OK An Edit window appears V WorkBench62 Version x xx EOCASM1 Ex File Edit View Insert Build Tools Window Help z 8 x eges He alele ale SES gs X ICS621CP PAR Absolute Object ak vs ee emm Goto Label Edit window Enter source codes here For Help press F1 Ln 1 Col 1 Hm NUM Enter so
233. king is completed 60 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 6 Section Management 5 6 1 Definition of Sections The memory configuration of the 51C62 Family is divided into a ROM that contains programs written and data memories such as data RAM and I O memory A section refers to an area where codes are written or to be mapped and there are two types of sections in correspondence with the memories 1 CODE section Area located within program ROM 2 BSS section Area for dynamic data storage built in RAM display memory and I O memory To allow to specify these sections in a source file the assembler comes provided with pseudo instruc tions CODE section The code pseudo instruction defines a CODE section Statements from this instruction to another section defining instruction will be regarded as program codes and will be so processed as to be mapped in the program ROM The source file will be regarded as a CODE section by default There fore the part that goes from top of the file to another section will be processed as CODE section Because this section is of 12 bits word 4 bit data cannot be defined BSS section The bss pseudo instruction defines a BSS section Statements from this instruction to another section defining instruction will be regarded as 4 bit data and will be so processed as to be mapped in the data memory RAM Therefore nothing else can be descri
234. lay of the Source window to the mix mode Go button Go to Cursor button position in the Source window the address of that line Go from Reset button Step button Next button Reset button Resets the CPU Break Button Help Button This button displays an About dialog box for the debugger elek Ekle LL ja n ar ie v o Switches the display of the Source window to the unassemble mode Reads a program or optional HEX file in Intel HEX format into the debugger Executes the target program from the address indicated by the current PC Executes the target program from the address indicated by the current PC to the cursor Resets the CPU and then executes the target program from the program start address 0x100 Executes one instruction step at the address indicated by the current PC Executes one instruction step at the address indicated by the current PC The call and calz instructions and their subroutines are executed as one step Sets or clears a breakpoint at the address where the cursor is located in the Source window Controls on Source window Find button Searches the specified word and moves the source display to the found word location Search Label pull down list box Moves the source display to the selected label location Search Label BOOT INC RAM BLKIT IMIT RH amp M BLKT LOOP Menus Development Tools File menu Load File
235. ld task can be suspended by selecting Stop Build from the Build menu or clicking the Stop Build button ES Stop Build button 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 37 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 4 WORK BENCH To invoke only the assembler select Assemble from the Build menu or click the Assemble button after activating the Edit window of the source to be assembled El Assemble button 4 8 3 Debugging To debug the generated executable file select Debug from the Build menu or click the Debug button bid Debug button The debugger starts up with the specified ICE parameter file and then loads the executable object by the command file generated from the work bench This command file contains the command to load the specified type of an executable object to the debugger The contents of the command file can be edited in the Settings dialog box explained in Section 4 9 When the building process is performed again after invoking the debugger the debugger will reload the object file if its window can be activated Ej Db62 Command BEE File Run Break Trace View Option Window Help eJ s s ajajaj 1 o 5 m Mix LIBE ES mm Register ioj x Search Label E 1 8188 e B8 ld a 6x8 ld a SP INIT ADDR gt gt 4 set SP 15 6161 feb ld sph a ld sph a 16 6162 e686 ld a 8x8 ld a SP INIT fiDDR amp Oxf 17 8183 ff ld spl a ld spl a 18 6164 e42 pset 8x2 2 8185 4
236. le Linker 62 ver x xx Cross reference file TEST XRF Sun May 03 14 16 16 1998 Label RAM BLK1 at 0x000 MAIN O BSS Global 0x0O200 SUB O CODE Dx0Z02 C SUB 0 CODE 0x0206 SUB O CODE 0x0208 SUB O CODE Label BOOT at Ox0100 MAIN O CODE Local Label LOOP at Ox0106 MAIN O CODE Local 0x0Ll08 MAIN O CODE Label INIT RAM BLK1 at 0x0200 SUB O CODE Global 0x0105 MAIN O CODE Label INC RAM BLKI at Ox0206 SUB O CODE Global 0x0107 MAIN O CODE Contents of cross reference file The format of each label information is as follows Label information Address File name Type Label information Indicates the following information e Label name Defined address Object file in which the label is defined e Section type e Scope Address Indicates the address where the label is referred File Indicates the object file in which the label is referred Type Indicates the type of section that contains the address where the label is referred 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 99 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 6 LINKER 6 10 Linking Linking rules The linking process takes place in conformity with the following rules e Absolute sections are mapped ahead of relocatable sections according to the absolute addresses which were defined at the time of assembling If an absolute section exceeds the available memory area an error will occur e The relocatable sections in the file of which th
237. le format File name Description Record file File format File name Description Trace file File format Text file file name log An extension other than log can also be used This file contains the information of executed commands and execution results that are output to a file Output of this file can be controlled by the log command Text file file name rec An extension other than rec can also be used This file contains the information of executed commands that are output to a file Output of this file can be controlled by the rec command Text file File name file name trc An extension other than trc can also be used Description This file contains the specified range of trace information Output of this file can be con trolled by the tf command 120 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 3 Starting Method 9 3 1 Start up Format General form of command line db62 parameter file name gt start up option denotes a space indicates the possibility to omit Note The parameter file will be recognized by its extension par so par must be included in the parameter file name to be specified 9 3 2 Start up Options The debugger has three start up options available command file name gt Function Specifies a command file Explanation For a series of commands to be executed immediately after the debugger starts
238. lic source debugging information e Always specify this function when you perform symbolic source debugging If this option is not specified no debugging information will be added to the relocatable object file Specification of output path file name e Specifies an output path file name without extension or with an extension o If no extension is specified o will be supplemented at the end of the specified output path file name The input file name is used for the output files Output of relocatable list file Outputs a relocatable list file If this option is not specified no relocatable list file will be output Output of error file e Also delivers in a file File name gt err the contents that are output by the assembler via the Standard Output stdout such as error messages If this option is not specified no error file will be output When entering an option in the command line you need to place one or more spaces before and after the option The options can be specified in any order It is also possible to enter options after the source file name Example c e0c62 bin as62 g e l d TEST1 d TEST2 test s 5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE EPSON 49 CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 4 Messages The assembler delivers all its messages through the Standard Output stdout Start up message The assembler outputs only the following message when it starts up Assembler 62 Ver x xx Copyrig
239. llowing sections Example code The latest relocatable section definition Org 0x100 This does not start a new absolute section and makes no effect bss The another kind BSS of section which is not affected by the previous org pseudo instruction in the CODE section code I his will be an relocatable CODE section not affected by the previous org pseudo instruction S5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 73 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER page pseudo instruction Instruction format page Page numbers Page numbers Absolute page number specification e Only decimal binary and hexadecimal numbers can be described e The page numbers that can be specified are from 0 to 15 Oxf e One or more spaces or tabs are necessary between the instruction and the page number Sample description code page 0x1 Function Specifies an absolute page address of a CODE section in an assembly source file The section with the page pseudo instruction will be located at the top of the specified page Precautions e When the page pseudo instruction appears in a section a new absolute section starts at that point The section type does not change The page pseudo instruction keeps its effect only in that section until the next section definer code or bss or the next location definer org align page or bank appears Example code The latest relocatable section definition
240. ltiple times to clear address ranges from trace area Gui utility Trace Trace area menu item When this menu item is selected a dialog box appears for clearing trace areas See the ta command 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 203 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER tp trace pointer Function This command displays the current location of the trace pointer The pointer points to the location in the trace memory into which the last trace information has been stored i Format gt tp direct input mode Example gt tpa LOC 2058 Current trace pointer value gt Gui utility None 204 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER td trace data display Function This command displays the trace information that has been sampled into the ICE s trace memory i Format 1 gt td lt num gt direct input mode 2 gt td guidance mode Start point ENTER from the latest lt num gt Trace data is displayed gt num Start pointer of trace data decimal from 0 to 2 730 Display The following lists the contents of trace information Loc Trace cycle number decimal The last information taken into the trace memory becomes 0000 CODE Fetched code hexadecimal and unassembled content mnemonic PC PC address hexadecimal A B X Y Values of A B X Y registers hexadecimal IDZC Values of I D Z and
241. m G OUe o ouo ocn oCm Cm Cn Cm Cm Cn TN 4 N A NUM Data window Depending on the computer used the windows may differ from the above display depending on the screen resolution the number of dots in system font etc Adjust the size of each window to suit needs 124 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER Features common to all windows 1 Open close and activating a window All windows except Command can be closed or opened To open a window select the window name from the View menu When a command is executed the corresponding window opens if the command uses the window for displaying the executed results To close a window click the Close box on the window After initialization the state of the screen including the position and size of the windows will return to the same as the last time the debugger was terminated The opened windows are listed in the Window menu Selecting one from the list activates the selected window It can also be done by simply clicking on an inactive window Furthermore pressing Ctrl Tab switches the active window to the next open window 2 Resizing and moving a window Each window can be resized as needed by dragging the boundary of the window with the mouse The Minimize and Maximize buttons work in the same way as in general Windows applications Each window can be moved to the desired display position by dragging the wi
242. mmand Usage Usage 1k62 options object files O ICE param file PAR gt lt command file CM gt Options d Disable all branch optimizations di Disable insertion of branch extension dr Disable removal of branch extension Output error log file ERR m Add source debug information l Output absolute list file ALS m Output map file MAP o file name Specify output file name 5 Output symbol file SYM Output cross reference file XRF code address Specify CODE start address bss address Specify BSS start address rcode file name gt lt address gt Specify CODE start address of the file rbss file name gt lt address gt Specify BSS start address of the file Error Messages CALL for different bank at lt address gt CALZ for non zero page at address Cannot create file kind file FILE NAME gt Cannot open file kind file FILE NAME gt Cannot read file kind file FILE NAME gt Cannot write file kind file FILE NAME gt Illegal file name FILE NAME Illegal file name FILE NAME gt specified with option option Illegal object format FILE NAME gt Illegal option option Development Tools The call instruction calls a subroutine in another bank The calz instruction calls a subroutine in another bank or another page other than page O The file cannot be created The file cannot be opened The file cannot be read Data cannot be written to th
243. mode the following keyboard inputs have special meaning q Command is terminated finish inputting and start execution NE Return to previous address Input is skipped keep current value If the maximum address of program memory is reached and gets a valid input other than J the command is terminated 156 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER e When the contents of the program memory are modified using the as command in direct mode the unassemble contents of the Source window are updated immediately When it is done in guidance mode the unassemble contents of the Source window are updated immediately in unassemble display mode but will be updated when the qu is input to terminate the command in mix display mode e Although the contents of the unassemble display are modified by rewriting code those of source display remain unchanged Gui utility None 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 157 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER De program memory enter Function This command rewrites the contents of the specified address in the program memory with the input hexadecimal code Li Format gt pe guidance mode Program enter address lt address gt Address Original code lt code gt gt lt address gt Start address from which to write code hexadecimal or symbol IEEE 695 format only code 1 8 Write code hexade
244. n results are displayed when their corresponding windows are open If the corresponding window is closed the execution result is displayed in the Command window When writing to a log file the content of the write data is displayed in the window Refer to the description for log command Note The Command window cannot be closed 126 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 4 3 Source Window LLL PIS E3 Search Label E ri P g xxxx BOOT LOOP sxxsx 9 global INIT RAM_BLK1 subroutine 1H global INC RAM BLET1 subroutine 11 12 org 82788 13 BOOT 14 166 e B8 ld a x8 ld 3 SP IHIT ADDR gt gt 4 set SP 15 0101 Fea ld sph a ld sph a 16 8162 eB ld a 6x8 ld a SP IHIT ARDDR amp xF 17 6189 Fra ld spl a ld spl a 18 87164 ek pset 8x2 19 d1 5 468 call 8x86 call INIT _RAM_BLK1 initialize Ral 28 LOOP 21 6166 e42 pset 8x2 22 8167 466 call 6x6 call INC_RAM_BLE1 increment i H g The Source window displays the contents of 1 to 3 listed below This window also allows breakpoints to be set and words or labels to be found 1 Unassembled codes and source codes You can choose one of the following three display modes 1 Mix mode selected by the Mix button or entering the m command In this mode the window displays the addresses codes unassembled contents Mix button and corresponding source line numbers and source statement
245. n the case of a warning the assembler ends after creating an output file The source file name that was specified in the command line will appear at the beginning of the error and warning messages For details on errors and warnings refer to Section 5 11 Error Warning Messages 50 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 5 Grammar of Assembly Source Assembly source files should be created on a general purpose editor or the source editor of the work bench Save sources as standard text files For the file name a long file name supported in Windows can be specified Define the extension as s when creating sources in the new syntax for as62 When using source files described in the old syntax for asm62XX the default extension dat should be used Actually a s source file and a dat source file can have the same contents with the new and old syntax mixed However if the first section does not have an absolute address specification the section is re garded as a relocatable section in a s source while in a dat source it is regarded as an absolute section and org 0 is placed at the beginning of the source by preprocessing This section explains the rules and grammar involved with the creation of assembly source files 5 5 1 Statements Each individual instruction or definition of an assembly source is called a statement The basic composi tion of a statement is as
246. ndicated by the PC es Executes one step at the current PC address oS 204 Executes 20 steps from the current PC address The program execution is suspended by the following cause even before the specified number of steps is completed e The Key Break button is clicked or the Esc key is pressed e The break or reset switch on the ICE is pushed After each step is completed the register contents in the Register window are updated If the Register window is closed the register contents are displayed in the Command window same as executing the rd command i Notes The step count must be specified within the range of 0 to 65 535 An error results if the limit is ex ceeded Error Number of steps out of range use 0 653535 If the Data window is opened its display contents are updated after the execution During a single step operation the program will not break even if the break condition set by a command is met Unlike in successive executions g or gr command the Register window is updated every time a step is executed The s command one step is also executed by pressing Enter at the command prompt gt Gui utility Run Step menu item Step button When this menu item or button is selected the s command without step count is executed ES Step button 172 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER n next Function This comman
247. ndicates the type of hexadecimal format currently only 00 data 16 bytes max The object codes are placed here This is not included in the end record sum 1 byte This is a checksum 2 s complement from Data volume to the last data The end records are always 00000001FF 108 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 7 HEX CONVERTER 7 5 3 Motorola S Format The hex converter converts an absolute object file in the IEEE 695 format into the Motorola S2 format files when the m option is specified The high order data file is generated with an extension hsa and the low order data file is generated with an extension lsa The following shows a sample data in Motorola S2 format length address data sum 9224000000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFB 9224000020FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFDB 22400010008g7E000F04200420606FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF89 S804000000FB S2 2 bytes Indicates that the line is a data record S8 2 bytes Indicates that the line is an end record end of data length 1 byte Indicates the record length of address data sum The maximum length of a data record is 0x24 while the end record is fixed at 0x04 address 3 bytes Indicates the address where the head data in a record is placed data 36 bytes max The object codes are placed here This is not included in th
248. ndow s title bar with the mouse However windows can only be resized and moved within the range of the application window 3 Scrolling a window All windows can be scrolled The Register window can be scrolled only when its size is reduced Use one of the following three methods to scroll a window 1 Click on an arrow button or enter an arrow key cursor movement to scroll a window one line at a time 2 Click on the scroll bar of a window to scroll it one page current window size at a time 3 Drag the scroll bar handle of a window to move it to the desired area 4 Other The opened windows can be cascaded or tiled using the Window menu Note for display The windows may display incorrect contents caused by incompatibility between the OS and the video card or driver If there is any problem try the following methods to fix it e Update the driver to the latest version if an older version has been installed Please inquire about the version to the distributor e If the driver allows selection of extended function such as acceleration turn the functions off e Ifthe problem is not fixed using the above try the standard driver supplied with Windows95 NT 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 125 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 4 2 Command Window ig Command Mel na Map Information Rom Size 1000 Rom Start Address BBHB Rom End Address AFFF Ram Size 18B88 Ram Start Address uBBdd Ram En
249. ne Converts the mnemonic of the source files into object codes machine language of the S1C62 The results are output in a relocatable object file This assembler includes preprocessing functions such as macro definition call conditional assembly and file include functions Flowchart Assembly source file F 3 Relocatable Object file list file 5 to Linker Start up Command Usage Usage as62 options Options d symbol file err Preprocessed Error file source file lt file name gt Add preprocess definition e Output error log file ERR x5 Add source debug information in object ze Output relocatable list file LST o file name Specify output file name O or no extension File name Source file name DAT S or MS include define macro endm ifdef else endif ifndef else endif code bss org page bank align comm lcomm set global codeword list nolist stabs stabn stabn Pseudo instructions file name gt define name gt lt string gt macro name gt par par lt statements gt lt name gt lt statements 1 gt statements 2 gt lt name gt lt statements 1 gt statements 2 gt lt address gt lt page number gt lt bank number gt lt alignment number gt lt global symbol gt lt size gt lt local symbol gt lt size gt lt symbol gt lt address gt lt symbol gt data
250. nnot be found The file cannot be opened The label has already been defined HEX Converter hx62 Outline Converts an absolute object in IEEE 695 format output from the linker into ROM image data in Intel HEX format or Motorola S format This conversion is needed when making the ROM or when creating mask data using the development tools provided with each model Flowchart from Linker Absolute object file ICE parameter file Motorola S file err format files flee format files Error file ROM or Mask data creation Start up Command Usage Usage hx62 options lt file names gt Options b Do not fill room with Oxff e Output error log file HX62 ERR t Use Motorola S format Error Messages Cannot create file kind file FILE NAME gt Cannot open file kind file FILE NAME gt Cannot read file kind file FILE NAME gt Cannot write file kind file FILE NAME gt Different processor types Illegal file name FILE NAME Illegal option option Illegal absolute object format Out of memory Warning Message Input file name extension XXX conflict O file name Output file name L H HEX L HSA or no extension File name Absolute object file ABS ICE parameter file PAR Development Tools The file cannot be created The file cannot be opened The file cannot be read Data cannot be written to the file The ICE parameter file contains an illegal parameter setting The
251. ns into eines A 132 BIS AAP Eoi OU NIIT 132 TO o Mo 133 9 6 1 MenitotV clle reser UEM pets Ee EE EIFE ir ekinini eiis earen ak eeir tara resit 133 9 6 2 File Ment PR Lm 133 UOS IE MOU aeeie E a eri 133 90 4 Break Men isissisisirricrere aiieieo aiiai i EEE 134 OOS TUCE ME TOT a a 134 QOO View Menu oosiseceixvuntx one DEI ennie kiran nieee A EENES aA ENESES 134 DOF TONTON MONU MEC E E EN A a 135 9 6 8 Windows MB svosvee cbe ides se Fon Eau C Evae x ret ACE RR SPEO TTEUEUR Fd utet EUR RU ORE Eder 135 VIS Agp MENU ei 135 9 7 Method for Executing Commands sciccrsacassasansaiasiere ncatseesaceasdotetiondeaiaieaengiiais 136 9 7 1 Entering Commands from Keyboard cese 136 9 7 2 Executing from Menu or Tool Baf asset re keep ERE mia EVE EE E 138 9 7 3 Executing from a Command File sissiscvovuisusauindsdanresonsntssuaesuwbuusdetuesndewencwass 139 LA LO T qr IE 140 vi EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CONTENTS 9o BLAIS QT 0 OR eee te rid emitted terius edi NEN 141 9 8 1 Loading Program and Option Data sete tre rri he Evo eh ev Exe Us 141 9 8 2 Source Display and Symbolic Debugging Function esse 142 9 6 3 Displaying and Modifying Program Data and Register 144 98 4 Executing Protti cisien renin i VRAREER tena 146 95 0 DEOK T UT OTS painaa ee E EEEE DIA SEE 148 D o Doe T an TONS sco E a N E N
252. nsert into project button on the Edit window sl Insert into project button When the source file has been opened click the Insert into project button on the Edit window Do not forget to save the source to the file before inserting into the project 4 Dragging source files on the Project window Drag source files from Windows Explorer to the Project window These files will be added to the current project When a source file is inserted into the project the source file name appears in the Project window Removing a source from the project To remove a source file from the project select the source in the Project window and then press the Delete key This removes only the source information and does not delete the actual source file 28 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 4 WORK BENCH 4 6 3 Project Window The Project window shows the work space folder and the source files included in the project that has been opened When a source file icon is double clicked the source file will be opened or the corresponding Edit window will be activated When the folder icon or a source file icon is double clicked with the right mouse button a shortcut menu including the available build menu items appears Note Note that the list in the project window is not the actual directory structure Sources of the project in other folders than the work space folder are also lis
253. nto this memory The trace memory has the capacity to store information for 8 192 cycles making it possible to trace up to 2 730 instructions for five clock instructions only When the trace information exceeds this capacity the data is overwritten the oldest data first Consequently the trace information stored in the trace memory is always within 8 192 cycles The trace memory is cleared when a program is executed starting to trace the new execution data Fetch register trace data CODE B X y IDZC Hem P ther P eb8 LDA OXE 883 ZFF BIA fe LD SPH A 883 ZFF BIA eb6 LDA OXG 883 ZFF BIA FFA LD SPL A 883 ZFF HH1H eh PSET Hx2 Hd3 ZFF HH1H 466 CALL x Hd3 ZFF HUH1HB UBH7F 1 UW E BH8 W ZD e LDA 6x8 803 ZFF 8616 e386 LD XP A 603 ZFF BIA b B LD x 6x8 gag ZFF 8616 9606 LBPX Hx x 6283 661 ZFF 8616 WHbB 6 Whb1 8 9606 LBPX MA 8x8 0204 003 0010 Wee2 6 Weeas 6 A BH 8 8 an i a B a Be a B a Bs a Bi Bi a Bi a i a Bia a The following lists the trace information that is taken into the trace memory in every cycle This list is corresponded to display in the Trace window Loc Trace cycle number decimal The last information taken into the trace memory becomes 0000 CODE Fetched code hexadecimal and unassembled content mnemonic PC PC address hexadecimal A B X Y Values of A B X Y registers hexadecimal IDZC Values of I D Z and C flags binary after cycle execution
254. nts using a program s execution address or address ranges i Format 1 gt bp lt break1 gt lt break2 gt lt break3 gt lt break4 gt W 2 gt bp PC break set status 1 set 2 clear 3 clear all a 1 2 3521 direct input mode guidance mode ee guidance depends on the above selection see examples breakl 4 Break address or address area hexadecimal or symbol IEEE 695 format only Condition Examples Format 1 2 bp 100 200 3500 1 0 address lt last program memory address Sets PC break points at address 0x100 and the area from 0x200 to 0x300 The direct input mode cannot clear the set break points Format 2 gt DE Set PC break None l set 2 Clear 3 clear all Set new PC break 2 1004 Set new PC break 200 3004 Set new PC break 7 xl Sp Clear 0 0100 1 0200 0300 1 set 2 clear 3 clear all Clear PC break AD oov 2 Du Clear PC break d bp l Clear all O 0100 1 0251 0300 l set 2 Clear 3 clear all bp4 PC break None l set 2 clear 3 clear all gt i Notes e All PC breaks are cleared by executing the bm command 14 Z4 34 2 1 set is selected Address 0x100 is set as a breakpoint Area 0x200 0x300 is set as a break area Terminated by Enter key 2 clear is selected Break area 0x150 0x200 0x250 is cleared Terminated by Enter key 3 clear all is selected Te
255. o 30 seconds Example com startup cmd The commands written in the command file are displayed in the Command window Restrictions Another command file can be read from within a command file However nesting of these command files is limited to a maximum of five levels An error is assumed and the subsequent execution is halted when the com command at the sixth level is encountered 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 139 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 7 4 Log File The executed commands and the execution results can be saved to a file in text format that is called a log file This file allows verification of the debug procedures and contents The contents displayed in the Command window are saved to this file Command example gt log tst log After the debugger is set to the log mode by the log command after it starts outputting to a log file the log command toggles output turned on in log mode output turned off in normal mode Therefore you can output only the portions needed can be output to the log file Display of Command window in log mode The contents displayed in the Command window during log mode differ from those appearing in normal mode 1 When executing a command when each window is open When the window that displays the command execution result is opened Normal mode The contents of the relevant display window are updated The execution results are not displayed in the Comman
256. o absolute list file will be output Specification of output path file name Specifies an output path file name without extension or with an extension abs If no extension is specified abs will be supplemented at the end of the specified output path file name The 1st input file name is used for the output files Output of link map file Outputs a link map file If this option is not specified no link map file will be output Output of symbol file Outputs a symbol file If this option is not specified no symbol file will be output Output of cross reference file Outputs a cross reference file If this option is not specified no cross reference file will be output Set up of a relocatable CODE section start address e Sets the absolute start address of a relocatable CODE section Absolute sections remain unaffected e CODE sections are mapped from this address unless otherwise specified e One or more spaces or tabs are necessary between code and address e The address should be described in hexadecimal format Ox If this option is not specified the CODE section will begin from the program ROM physical start address specified with the ICE parameter file Code Ox100 EPSON 5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 6 LINKER bss lt address gt Function Set up of a relocatable BSS section start address Explanation Sets the absolute start address of a relocatable BSS section
257. ode the following keyboard inputs have special meaning gel Command is terminated finish inputting and start execution EN Return to previous address A Input is skipped keep current value If the maximum address of data memory is reached and gets a valid input other than the command is terminated Gui utility Data window The Data window allows direct modification of data Click the Data window and select the dis played data to be modified then enter a hexadecimal number 164 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER df data memory fill LH Function This command rewrites the contents of the specified data memory area with the specified data i Format 1 gt df lt address1 gt lt address2 gt lt data gt direct input mode 2 gt df guidance mode Start address lt address1 gt End address lt address2 gt 1 Fill data data gt lt address1 gt Start address of specified range hexadecimal or symbol IEEE 695 format only lt address2 gt End address of specified range hexadecimal or symbol IEEE 695 format only lt data gt Write data hexadecimal Condition 0 lt address lt address2 lt last data memory address 0 lt data lt Oxf i Examples Format 1 gt df 200 2FF D Fills the data memory area from address 0x200 to address Ox2ff with OxO Format 2 Par Start address 2004 Start address
258. og Starts or stops logging Record PG Starts or stops recording of commands executed Record Mode Setting Mode Setting Sets the on the fly display break and execution counter modes Bor urs m Rom Type Specifies the program ROM type which is installed in the ICE ROM socket Self Diagnosis Displays the results of the diagnostic test in the ICE Self Diagnosis Contents Displays the contents of help topics About Db62 Displays an About dialog box for the debugger Debugger db62 4 Debug Commands Program memory operation as Assemble mnemonic pe Input program code pf lt addr1 gt lt addr2 gt lt code gt Fill program area pm lt addr1 gt lt addr2 gt lt addr3 gt Data memory operation dd lt addr1 gt lt addr2 gt Copy program memory Dump data memory de lt addr gt lt data1 gt lt data2 gt lt data16 gt Input data df lt addr1 gt lt addr2 gt lt data gt Fill data area dm lt addr1 gt lt addr2 gt lt addr3 gt Register operation rd Copy data area Display register values rs lt reg gt lt value gt lt reg gt lt value gt Program execution Modify register values g lt addr gt Execute successively gr Reset CPU and execute successively s lt step D gt Step into n lt step D gt Step over CPU reset rst Reset CPU Break bp lt addr1 gt lt addr2 gt
259. og off mode or log on mode A new log file can also be specified using the New button 214 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE 9 9 17 Map Information ma map information Hi Function CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER This command displays the map information that is set by a parameter file Format gt ma_ Li Example gt ma Map Information direct input mode Rom Size 1000 Rom Start Address 0000 Rom End Address O0Offf Ram Size 1000 Ram Start Address 0000 Ram End Address Offf I O Area List 0080 00ff G1LS0 66 ULET UZG0 UZTE Segment Area List 0050 007f f 0450 047 Read Only Area 0091 0095 00c9 00ca D TS DUTC 0191 Write Only Area 0450 047f Read amp Write Area 0080 0081 DOG TL 00c4 00c6 00c8 00d1 Unused Area 0082 008f 0093 0097x 0Q009f 00a1l 00af gt Li GUI utility None S5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 215 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 9 18 Mode Setting Olf on the fly display i Function This command selects whether or not to run the on the fly display during target program execution by the g go or gr go after reset command Format gt otf direct input mode i Example gt otf4 Set on the fly display off This command toggles the on the fly display function gt OUcT Set on the fly display on Note The on the fly display is turned on at power on by default
260. ol list Function Command Displaying symbol list sy 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 143 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 8 3 Displaying and Modifying Program Data and Register The debugger has functions to operate on the program memory data memory and registers Each memory area is set to the debugger according to the map information that is given in a parameter file Operating on program memory area The following operations can be performed on the program memory area Table 9 8 3 1 Commands to operate on program memory Function Command Entering modifying program code pe In line assemble as Rewriting specified area pf Copying specified area pm 1 Entering modifying program code The program code at a specified address is modified by entering hexadecimal data 2 In line assemble The program code at a specified address is modified by entering a mnemonic code 3 Rewriting specified area An entire specified area is rewritten with specified code 4 Copying specified area The content of a specified area is copied to another area Operating on data memory area The following operations can be performed on the data memory areas RAM display memory I O memory Table 9 8 3 2 Commands menu item to operate on data memory Function Command Menu Dumping data memory dd View Data Dump Entering modifying data de Rewriting specified area df Copying spe
261. ommands menu items tool bar buttons for successive execution Function Command Menu Button Successive execution from current PC g Run Go Run Go to Cursor ul Successive execution after resetting CPU gr Run Go from Reset EE 2 Stopping successive execution Using the successive execution command g lt address gt can specify a temporary break address that is only effective during program execution The temporary break address can also be specified from the Source window If the cursor is placed on an address line in the Source window and the Go to Cursor button clicked the program starts executing from the current PC address and breaks after executing the instruction at the address the cursor is placed Except being stopped by this temporary break the program continues execution until it is stopped by one of the following causes e Break conditions set by a break set up command are met e The Key Break button is clicked or the Esc key is pressed e The Break or Reset switch on the ICE is pushed el Key Break button When the program does not stop use this button to forcibly stop it 3 On the fly function The ICE and debugger provide the on the fly function to display the PC address every 0 5 seconds during successive execution The PC address is displayed in the relevant positions of the Register window If the Register window is closed it is displayed in the Command w
262. option An illegal option is specified No ICE parameter file specified ICE parameter file is not specified Out of memory Cannot secure memory space 8 6 2 Warning Even if a warning is issued the disassembler keeps on processing and completes the processing after displaying a warning message unless in addition any error is produced Warning message Description Input file name extension XXX conflict Two or more file names with the same extension have been specified The last one is used 118 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER This chapter describes how to use the Debugger db62 9 1 Features The Debugger db62 is used to debug a program after reading an object file in the IEEE 695 format that is generated by the linker It has the following features and functions e Various data can be referenced at the same time using multiple windows e Frequently used commands can be executed from tool bars and menus using a mouse e Also available are source display and symbolic debug functions which correspond to assembly source codes e Consecutive program execution and two types of single stepping are possible e Four break functions are supported e A real time display function shows register and memory contents on the fly e A time display function showing execution time by both duration and steps e An advanced trace function e An autom
263. or FOO llable Abcd QO ABC L1 L 1 comm BUF 4 Joonmm LSt BUF 2 e Since labels are case sensitive uppercase and lowercase are discriminated When referencing a defined label use the symbol exactly the same as the defined label Examples Abcd jp _ABCD Does not jump to _Abcd 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 55 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 5 4 Comments Comments are used to describe a series of routines or the meaning of each statement Comments cannot comprise part of coding Definition of comment A character string beginning with a semicolon and ending with a line feed code LF is interpreted as a comment Not only ASCII characters but also other non ASCII characters can be used to describe a comment Examples This line is a comment line LABEL Ihis is the comment for LABEL ld a b This is the comment for the instruction on the left Restrictions e A comment is allowed up to 259 characters including a semicolon spaces before after and inside the comment and a return line feed code e When a comment extends to several lines each line must begin with a semicolon Examples These are comment lines The second line will not be regarded as a comment An error will result These are comment lines Both lines will be regarded as comments 5 5 5 Blank Lines This assembler also allows a blank line containing only a return line feed code It need not be ma
264. ormat file name h hex file name l hex This is a load image file of the program ROM and is read into the debugger by the lo command The file h hex corresponds to the 4 high order bits of the program code and the file I hex corresponds to the 8 low order bits of the program code These files are gener ated for the purpose of creating mask data from an object file in the IEEE 695 format by a HEX conversion utility Unlike files in the IEEE 695 format these files cannot be used for source display or symbolic debugging but can be used to check the operation of final program data Option data file File format File name Description HEX file in Intel HEX format file name f hex file name s hex file name a hex Varies with the type of microcom puter These data files are used to set up hardware options for each microcomputer model and is read by the lo command These files are generated by a development tool available for each microcomputer model Command file File format File name Description Text file file name cmd An extension other than cmd can also be used This file contains a description of debug commands to be executed successively By writing a series of frequently used commands in this file the time and labor required for entering commands from the keyboard can be saved The command described in the file are read and executed using the com command 9 2 2 Output Files Log file Fi
265. output object file While a relocatable list file can be made for each assembly source file the absolute list file is made as a single file integrating all the linked objects and their according sources Sample absolute list file Linker 62 ver x xx Absolute list file TEST ALS Sat May 30 07 53 14 1998 ie main s Pa test program main routine CE A 4 Ds S INITIAL SP ADDRESS DEFINITION 6 define SP_INIT_ADDR 0x80 SP init addr 0x80 7 Bs S MACRO DEFINITION 9s macro CL AB 10s Ld a 0 11 ld b 0 12 fendm 13 14 PRAERER BOOT LOOP e ex l53 global INIT RAM BLK1 Subroutine 16 global INC RAM BLKI1 subroutine Js es OT 0x100 19 BOOT 20s 0100 e08 ld a SP INIT ADDR 4 Set SP 21l 0101 fed ld sph a 202 0102 e00 ld a SP INIT ADDR amp Oxf 23 0103 f fO ld spl a 24 0104 e42 pset 0x2 VASE 0105 400 call INIT RAM BLK1 initialize RAM block 1 26 CL AB eM 0106 e00 t Ld a 0 R CL_AB 28 0107 e10 ld b 0 29 LOOP 30 0108 e42 pset 0x2 31 0109 406 call INC_RAM_BLK1 increment RAM block 1 OO ee GN 010a 008 JP LOOP infi ity loop Contents of absolute list file The format of each line of the absolute list file is as follows Line No Absolute address Code Source statement Line No Indicates the line number from the top of the file Address Indicates the absolute address after the instruction is allocated Code Indicates the object code Source Thecontents of the assembly source
266. parameter file Output Format Displays a dialog box for selecting an executable object file format Tools menu Toole Hex Converter Disassembler HEX Converter Invokes the HEX converter Disassembler Invokes the disassembler Work Bench wb62 4 Menus Window menu Cascade Ww in d Ou Cascade Tile Horizontally Tile Horizontally Tile Vertically Tile Vertically Arrange leon Close All Arrange Icons w 1 subs 2 main Close All About WB62 Help menu About WEBS Error Messages lt filename gt is changed by another editor Reopen this file Cannot create file lt filename gt lt filename gt was not found Cannot find ICE parameter file Cannot open file lt filename gt You cannot close workspace while a build is in progress Select the Stop Build command before closing Would you like to build it This menu appears when an Edit window is opened Cascades the opened Edit windows Tiles the opened Edit window horizontally Tiles the opened Edit window vertically Arranges the minimized Edit window icons Closes all the Edit windows opened Displays a dialog box showing the version of the work bench The currently opened file is modified by another editor The file linker command file debugger command file etc cannot be created The source file cannot be found The ICE parameter file cannot be found The source file
267. pe Relocatable program bss Org 0x100 If this specification is omitted a BSS section begins from the address following BSS1 nee Absolute RAM area definition code cone Relocatable program code org 0x0 CODE4 Absolute program In the section definition shown above absolute sections and relocatable sections are mixed in one source Absolute sections are sections whose absolute addresses are specified with the org pseudo instructions BSS2 and CODE4 are absolute sections Absolute sections will be located at the place specified Other sections are relocatable in the sense that the absolute location addresses are not fixed at the assem bly stage and will be fixed later at the linking stage Precautions When there appears in a section a statement which is designed for other section a warning will be issued and a new section will be started according to the statement Examples code comm BUF 16 Warning A new bss section begins DSS ld a b Warning A new code section begins e One section cannot cross over a bank or page boundary 62 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE 5 7 Assembler Pseudo Instructions CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER The assembler pseudo instructions are not converted to execution codes but they are designed to control the assembler or to set data For discrimination from other instructions all the assembler pseudo instructions begin with a character
268. play contents A standard scroll bar appears if the display contents exceed the display size of a window Use it to scroll the display contents The arrow Keys can also be used Showing and hiding the status bar The status bar can be shown or hidden by selecting Status Bar from the View menu 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 19 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 4 WORK BENCH 4 4 Toolbar and Buttons Tree types of toolbars have been implemented in the work bench standard toolbar build toolbar and window tool bar Standard fporbar ET gt Tal db E ala dhll amp x ICS621CP PAR m Absolute Object de n BS e mm Build toolbar Window toolbar 4 4 1 Standard Toolbar This toolbar has the following standard buttons New button Creates a new document A dialog box will appear allowing selection from among three document Ij types E0C62 assembly source E0C62 assembly header and project Open button Opens a document A dialog box will appear allowing selection of the file to be opened Save button Saves the document in the active Edit window to the file The file will be overwritten jo fe This button becomes inactive if no Edit window is opened Save All button Saves the documents of all Edit windows and the project information to the respective files Cut button Cuts the selected text in the Edit window to the clipboard e Copy button Copies the s
269. ption PER ee Generator fog62XX Assembler i i pec coe as62 ME fileF HEX Make file file MAK fileF DOC Assembly H b qc Function option Function option a P d Segment option Linker file s reprocesse file SEG source file command file source file s Segment Option Generator sog62XX fileS HEX fileS DOC Absolute ile ALS J list file Segment option Segment option HEX file document file Absolute m Cross Link map file file MAP object file Lflle XRF J reference file Melody file me J data file HEX converter Mel mla62XX Motorola S Intel HEX format files format files Ec Se m fileA HEX fileA DOC file HSA L or fileL HEX f Melody Melody HEX file document file Mask Data Checker mdc62XX 3 k Disassembler po ds62 E o e 1 fle MS i Disassembled E source file Debugger db62 Q In Circuit Emulator k file PAn data file Fig 3 1 1 Software development flow The work bench provides an integrated development environment from source editing to debugging Tools such as the assembler and linker can be invoked from the work bench The tools can also be in voked individually from the DOS prompt Refer to the respective chapter for details of each tool The part indicated as Development tools for each model is not
270. r Status Bar Shows or hides the status bar located at the bottom of the work bench window Output Window Opens or closes the Output window Project Window Opens or closes the Project window Build Bar Shows or hides the build toolbar Window Bar Shows or hides the window toolbar Full Screen Maximizes the Edit window area to the full screen size 24 EPSON 5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE 4 5 4 Insert Menu File Files into project 4 5 5 Build Menu Assemble Ctrl F 7 Build Fr Rebuild All Stop Build Chrl Break Debug F5 Settings Alt F 7 ILE parameter File Output Format 4 5 6 Tools Menu Tools Hex Converter Disassembler CHAPTER 4 WORK BENCH File Inserts the specified file to the current cursor position in the Edit window or replaces the selected text with the contents of the specified file A dialog box will appear allowing selection of the file to be inserted Files into project Adds the specified source file in the currently opened project A dialog box will appear allowing selection of the file to be added Assemble Ctrl F7 Assembles the assembly source in the active Edit window This menu item becomes active only when the active Edit window shows an assembly source file Build F7 Builds the currently opened project using a general make process Rebuild All Builds
271. r Break Clear register break conditions brc Break Register Break For example if the program is executed after setting 0 for the data of register A and 1 for the data of flag C and masking all others the program breaks when the A register is cleared to 0 and the C flag is set to 1 4 Multiple break The debugger supports a multiple break function that consists of a PC breakpoint a data break condition and a register break condition Each break condition is the same as that of the independent break function A break occurs when all the set conditions are satisfied The program will not break at the position set by multiple break when executing the command g address or n Table 9 8 5 4 Commands menu item to set multiple break Function Command Menu Set multiple break conditions bm Break Multiple Break Clear multiple break conditions bmc Break Multiple Break Forced break by the Key Break button or the Esc key The Key Break button or the Esc key can be used to forcibly terminate the program under execu tion when the program has fallen into an endless loop or cannot exit a standby HALT or SLEEP state el Key Break button Forced break by the Break or Reset switch on the ICE The Break or Reset switch can also be used to forcibly terminate the program being executed Break enable disable mode in the ICE The ICE has two break modes break enable mode and break disable mode
272. r EE GP Spe SPH D sehr 1j3 111 1 1 9 9 0 r 5 SPHer SPL r 111 1 1 1 1 1 1 0r 5 SPLer SSPE TT TAT TT ofolt s je sem nsee AAA top T 5 espe Arithmetic ADD r i 1110 0 0 r d fe eee 7 reri instructions ADC ri 1 1 0 001 r i Xiao 7 rerri C nq 1 0 1 1 00 0 1 r q oxo 7 rer q C suena rere reor a oxere T peers SBC ni 1 1 01 0 1 r i Xjo e 7 rreri c nq 1 0 1 tort r q oxeo 7 rer q C g DUO EO E 0 Do PE s res g r i 1 110 1 1 r i 7 fre i PF tka o eae SS ERA SE XOR ei ACO Oy as 4 u9 7 er nq 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 r q 7 frer g rg 11 1 1 0 0 0 0 r q j oje 7 ra FAN r i 11110 111 0 r i gt 7 r amp i Ea a alio olo a a e 7 fis RLC CS 1 1 1 r r d3 d2 d2 d1 d1 d0 d0 C C d3 RRC r 1 1 1 011 0 0 0 1 1 r lele 5 1d3 C d2 43 d1 lt d2 d0c d1 C d0 mc Ww forol e EES 7 Inne Mn M n e M n ACPX MX r 1 1 1 1 000 1 0 1 0 r _ x xjleje 7 M X M X ar C X X41 acey v c rat rojo rio r 1 weal 7 Moe Mese cv SCPX MXr 1111 001 1 1 0 r I amp jo 7 MOQCM X 1 C XX Mer EA 1 Ir 01 Iu r rec 7 M Y M Y C Y Y 1 NOT r 1 11 0110 O r 111 1 7 ret Remarks Software Development Flowchart Make aE file file MAK Note The part indicated as Development tools for each model and Steps 3 and 5 are not covered in the S1C62 Family Assembler
273. r file Refer to Section 4 6 1 3 Create source files and add them into the project Refer to Sections 4 7 and 4 6 2 4 Select tool options Refer to Section 4 9 4 6 2 Building an Executable Object To generate an executable object 1 Open the project file 2 Select an output format absolute Intel HEX or Motorola S using the Output Format list box Absolute Object x Absolute Object Intel Hex Motorola 5 3 Select Build from the Build menu or click the Build button ha Build button The work bench generates a make file according to the source files in the project and the tool options set by the user This file is used to control invocation of tools First the make process invokes the assembler for each source file to be assembled If the latest relocatable object file exists in the work space the corresponding source file is not assembled to reduce process time Next the linker is invoked to generate an absolute object file The linker command file used in this phase is automatically generated If absolute object has been selected as the output format the build task is completed at this phase If Intel HEX or Motorola S has been selected the HEX converter will be invoked to generate an object in the specified format To rebuild all files including the latest relocatable object files select Rebuild All from the Build menu or click the Rebuild All button Rebuild All button The bui
274. r step mode Set time or step measurement mode 217 chk self diagnostic test Report results of ICE self diagnostic test 218 q quit Quit debugger 219 154 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE 9 9 2 Reference for Each Command The following sections explain all the commands by functions The explanations contain the following items Ll Function Indicates the functions of the command i Format Indicates the keyboard input format and parameters required for execution Example Indicates a sample execution of the command Hd Note Shows notes on using Gui utility CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER Indicates a menu item or tool bar button if they are available for the command Notes In the command format description the parameters enclosed by lt gt indicate they are necessary parameters that must be input by the user while the ones enclosed by indicate they are optional parameters e The input commands are case insensitive you can use either upper case or lower case letters or even mixed e An error results if the number of parameters is not correct when you input a command using direct input mode Error number of parameter S5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 155 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 9 3 Program Memory Operation aS assemble mnemonic i Function This command assembles the input mnemonic and rewrites the co
275. race information for 4 096 cycles beginning from the first hit break point In this case the trace information of 4 096 cycles before and after the break point are sampled into the trace memory Break point Execution started l 4 096 cycles 4 096 cycles Trace sampling range Fig 9 8 6 2 Trace range when middle is selected End default The trace is halted after sampling trace information at the first hit break point In this case the trace information at the break point is the latest information stored in the trace memory Break point Execution started l 8 192 cycles Trace sampling range Fig 9 8 6 3 Trace range when end is selected Displaying and searching trace information The sampled trace information can be displayed in the Trace window by a command If the Trace window is closed the information is displayed in the Command window In the Trace window the entire trace memory data can be seen by scrolling the window The trace information can be displayed beginning from a specified cycle The display contents are as described above Table 9 8 6 2 Command menu item to display trace information Function Command Menu Display trace information td View Trace 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 151 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER It is possible to specify a search condition and display the trace information that matches a specified condition The search condition can
276. range of statements until control is returned to the next step by a return instruction Other instruc tions are executed in the same way as in ordinary single stepping In either case the program starts executing from the current PC Table 9 8 4 2 Commands menu items tool bar buttons for single stepping Function Command Menu Button Stepping through all instructions S Run Step D Stepping through all instructions except subroutines n Run Next EE When executing single stepping by command input the number of steps to be executed can be specified up to 65 535 steps When using menu commands or tool bar buttons the program is ex ecuted one step at a time One step execution can also be performed by pressing the Enter key only In the following cases single stepping is terminated before a specified number of steps is executed e The Key Break button is clicked or the Esc key is pressed e The Break or Reset switch on the ICE is pushed Single stepping is not suspended by breaks set by the user such as a PC break or data break C Key Break button When the program does not stop use this button to forcibly stop it 2 Display during single stepping In the initial debugger settings the display is updated every step as follows When the Source window is open the highlighted line designating the next address to be executed moves every step as the program is stepped through The display contents of the
277. rd Current Command File dialog box appears for specifying a command recording file CAE OCEA tes sample cmd If the recording function has been activated a dialog box appears allowing selection of either record off mode or Fiecord State record on mode A new recording file can also be specified Record On using the New button Record Off 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 213 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 9 16 log log log Function This command saves the input commands and the execution results to a file Format 1 gt log file name gt direct input mode 2 gt log guidance mode See Examples for guidance file name Log file name path can also be specified i Examples 1 First log execution after debugger starts up log File name debugl logd 1 append 2 clear and open 09 Displayed if the file is already exists gt 2 log command input in the second and following sessions gt logd Set to log off mode Logging function toggles when log is input log J set to log on mode Notes e In log on mode the contents displayed in the Command window are written as displayed directly to the log file The commands executed by selecting from a menu or with a tool bar button are displayed in the Command window However the Help menu and button commands are not displayed If you modify the register value or data memory contents b
278. rder bytes bits 7 to 0 of the object codes The high order data hex file h hex or hsa contains the high order bytes bits 11 to 8 suffixed by high order bits 0b0000 When creating the ROMs to be installed to the ICE or the Evaluation Board write these files using a ROM writer By specifying the m option the hex converter can convert the absolute object file into Motorola S format files as well as Intel HEX format However use Intel HEX format when loading the hex files to the debugger or creating the mask data by the mask data checker because the debugger and mask data checker do not support Motorola S format files 7 5 2 Intel HEX Format The hex converter converts an absolute object file in the IEEE 695 format into the Intel HEX format files by default The high order data file is generated with a name file name gt h hex and the low order data file is generated with a name file name l hex The following shows a sample data in Intel HEX format data volume type address data sum 10000000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFOO 10001000FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFO 1001000008E000F04200420606FFFFFFFFFFFFFFGSE 100FFOO00FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFOI 00000001FF data volume 1 byte Indicates the data length of each record The maximum length of a data record is 0x10 while the end record is fixed at 0x00 address 2 bytes Indicates the address where the head data in a record is placed type 1 byte I
279. ree document types E0C62 assembly source E0C62 assembly header and project Open Ctrl O Opens a document A dialog box will appear allowing selection of the file to be opened Close Closes the active Edit window This menu item appears when an Edit window becomes active Open Workspace Opens a project A dialog box will appear allowing selection of the project to be opened Close Workspace Closes the currently opened project This menu item becomes inactive if no project is opened Save Ctrl S Saves the document in the active Edit window to the file The file will be overwritten This menu item appears when an Edit window becomes active Save As Saves the document in the active Edit window with another file name A dialog box will appear allowing specification of a save location and a file name This menu item appears when an Edit window becomes active Save All Saves the documents of all Edit windows and the project information to the respective files Print Ctrl P Prints the document in the active Edit window A standard print dialog box will appear allowing a specific print condition This menu item appears when an Edit window becomes active Print Preview Displays a print image of the document in the active Edit window This menu item appears when an Edit window becomes active Page Setup Displays a dialog box for selecting paper
280. remain unaffected e One or more spaces or tabs are necessary between rbss and lt file name gt e The address should be described in hexadecimal format Ox Default If this option is not specified the BSS section of each module is mapped continu ously from the address that was set by the bss command Sample description rbss testl o 0x100 When inputting an option in the command line one or more spaces are necessary before and after the option Example c e0c62 1k62 g e s m testl o test2 0 o test abs ics62xxp par 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 93 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 6 LINKER 6 4 Messages The linker delivers all its messages to the Standard Output stdout Start up message The linker outputs only the following message when it starts up Linker 62 Ver x xx Copyright C SEIKO EPSON CORP 199x End message The linker outputs the following messages to indicate which files has been created when it ends normally Created absolute object file lt FILENAME ABS gt Created absolute list file lt FILENAME ALS gt Created map file lt FILENAME MAP gt Created symbol file lt FILENAME SYM gt Created cross reference file lt FILENAME XRF gt Created error log file lt FILENAME ERR gt Link 0 error s O warning s Usage output If no file name was specified or an option was not specified correctly the linker ends after delivering the following message concerning the usage Usage 1k62
281. ress using a symbol defined as a label Definition of a label Usable labels are defined as 13 bit values by any of the following methods 1 Symbol Example LABEL1 LABEL is a label that indicates the address of a described location Preceding spaces and tabs are ignored It is a general practice to describe from the top of a line 2 Definition using the comm or lcomm pseudo instruction Example comm BUF1 4 BUFI is a label that represents a RAM address The comm and lcomm pseudo instructions can define labels only in bss sections data memory such as RAM Program memory addresses cannot be defined Reference with labels A defined symbol denotes the address of a described location An actual address value should be determined in the linking process except in the case of absolute sections Examples LABEL1 jp LABEL1 Jumps to the LABEL location comm BUF 0x04 Code ld a BUESODILLITOOQO ld xm d ld b BUF amp 0b00001111 ld slp The address defined in BUF is loaded to X register 54 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER Scope The scope is a reference range of a label It is called local if the label is to be referenced within the same file and it is called global if the label is to be referenced from other files Any defined label s scope is local in default To make a label s scope global use the global pseudo instruction both in th
282. rminated finish inputting and start execution ASSI Return to previous address A Input is skipped keep current value When the command is terminated in the middle of guidance by qt the contents that have been input up to that time will be modified However these contents will not be modified if some cleared settings are left intact Gui utility Break Multiple Break menu item When this menu item is selected a dialog box appears for setting multi break conditions To set a multiple break enter each condition in the box and select a R W condition from the radio buttons then click OK All the conditions must be Multiple Break PE H A ADDR z set Enter an to exclude the condition If there is a condition that has not been set indicated with D i i no multiple break condition is set Raw Option C Read C write C R W To clear the multiple break condition click Clear 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 185 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER bmc multiple break clear i Function This command clears the multiple break condition that has been set Format gt bmc direct input mode GUI utility Break Multi Break menu item When this menu item is selected a dialog box appears for clearing multi break conditions See the bm command 186 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE bl break point lis
283. rminated by Enter key e The addresses must be specified within the range of the program memory area available for each microcomputer model An error results if the input one is not a hexadecimal number or a valid symbol Error invalid value An error results if the limit is exceeded Error Program address out of range e The consecutive address area is set by entering as start address gt lt end address gt An error results if the start address is larger than the end address Error end address lt start address e When clearing PC break points the specified addresses or areas that have not been set as PC breakpoints are ignored The break points within the specified area are cleared S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE 175 CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER e For direct input mode an error results if you attempt to set breakpoints at more than 4 locations at a time But for guidance mode there is no such limitation so you can specify more than 4 PC breaks before terminating the command by the Enter key You can use this command for multiple times to set new breakpoints e Do not set a breakpoint to the address in which the EI instruction is located as it will interfere with interrupt opera Gui utility tions Break Breakpoint Set menu item When this menu item is selected a dialog box appears for setting PC breakpoints Breakpoint 5et set Clear i C i C i C i
284. rrects the pset codes This makes it possible to omit the pset instruction in the source However this function is valid only for the branch instructions that use a label to specify the destination address This function can be disabled by specifying the d option The dr option can also be specified to disable only the pset deletion function in the case of the d option is not specified To keep compatibility with the older assembler asm62XX when the sources for the asm62XX are used the dr option must be specified For jp instruction First the linker checks if the destination label and the jp instruction are within the same page If the label exists in the same page the linker does not insert the pset code or remove the existing one for the jp instruction When the label exists in another bank page the linker inserts the adequate pset instruction code in front of the jp instruction or corrects the bank page number in the pset code if the pset code has a wrong operand Examples Original source After corrected disassembled code Ld a b ld gab Jp OTHER PAGE pset XX Necessary pset XX instruction is inserted jp OTHER PAGE pset YY Jp SAME PAGE Jp SAME PAGE pset Y Y is removed if unnecessary Even when pset Y Y is necessary YY is checked and corrected if wrong For call instruction Subroutine calls between banks are not allowed because the return instructions cannot handle bank numbers Therefore if a wron
285. rresponding code to the program memory at the specified address Format gt as t guidance mode Start address lt address gt Address Original code Original mnemonic lt mnemonic gt gt lt address gt Start address from which to write code hexadecimal or symbol IEEE 695 format only lt mnemonic gt Input mnemonic valid mnemonic of S1C62 expression and symbols are supported Condition 0 address lt last program memory address Example as Start address 1004 Address is input 0100 eOf LD A Oxf LD A O0xF Mnemonic is input Source file name enter to ignore 4 Ignored 0101 fe0 LD SPH A LD B OxA Source file name enter to ignore dA 0102 e00 LDA 0x0 qd Command is terminated gt x Source file name should be entered when a symbol label is used as the operand Specify the source file name in which the symbol was defined 0100 eOf LDA Oxf JP LOOP Symbol is used Source file name enter to ignore main sd Source file name is input i Notes e The start address you specified must be within the range of the program memory area available with each microcomputer model An error results if the input one is not a hexadecimal number or not a valid symbol Error invalid value An error results if the limit is exceeded Error Program address Out of range e An error results if the input mnemonic is invalid for S1C62 Error illegal mnemonic e In guidance
286. rsireusisorsieritrvrei PEERS ERE PEDE 37 4 5 2 Building n Executable ODJIeet iiusessodtsszie quaa Fotur et Fas cd eue APR RR du 37 ESF BIC 0171 HT M 38 4 8 4 Executing Other Tools is sacsrcacnesunsintinavsvenssavecsvnksansdudcurteatueeietaarnavixtocientinaeats 39 49 TOC IO SCOE enirir airI howe kien ae 41 ASD Assembler ODOHS siiacinnacetaainanchvdaveser erie tend eatin ERE ERREN RAERORR ar Mea FOROR I uS 41 49 2 Linker OPUONS RESTE 42 4 9 3 Debugger Options scciesceiscrenriirtadcarrevensvivaiaisaenbirndenteirsidsetsintatackeatedtatanernebbade d 4 9 4 HEX Converter Options a iceeesecekds ets eer Ee puTkCHERER QVE ES PAVERV SY EPVEXEXXEUTI EE HORS 44 FO UO CAE OI EASY NRM 45 Ad BEROPOMOUSQUEN ET EO AAN RUDI EUR IER INI IPIE A A E NTA 45 Aa PVCCAUMONS a toV UMORE INMIERUMeSMHEIMA NNUS 46 CHAPTERS JASSEMBLER GGUaSRTSEAERSIRISERRQREEANSE RESERARRIATR AENGURIRERRUATISN SE RISENARRIAE RI SEN SURIGERR DATUR 47 UMEN UII UMEN 47 VER D DET MS alee exces esd ces case ee eaten oie eels dogs T TO 47 MEI DI MIU 47 NAA BUTTER Pc PM 46 SEE D LS EEE 49 IA VEG OG 50 2 9 Grammar of Assembly Source scccosissnarsirsveaiiicnreuntesaeis UOI Er DEA pU UR USE 51 RENE UM Lu M O 51 5 5 2 Instructions Mnemonics and Pseudo instructions eee 53 SEN P UL m 54 SC OCIS NER RR cR 26 ORN UD OME
287. rt Build Tools Window Help z 8 x oema e alela Se El jg X ICS621CP PAR absolute Object ASi alam test files GotoLabe 1 For Help press F1 Ln 1 Col 1 NUM 3 Enter source codes in the Edit window Goto Label he 1 main s test program main routine 2 d 4 5L rxxxxx THITIAL SP ADDRESS DEFINITION x x rj 8 define SP IHIT ADDR 8x86 sP init addr x8 xxxx BOOT LOOP ss 9 Global INIT RAM BLH1 subroutine 18 jlobal INC_RAH_BLK1 subroutine 11 12 org Hz 188 13 BOOT 14 ld a 5P_INIT_ADDR gt gt 4 set SP 15 ld Sph a 16 ld a SP IHIT fBiDDR amp HZF 17 ld spl a 18 Call INIT_RAM_BLK1 initialize RAW block 1 19 LOOP 28 call INC_RAM BLE increment RAH block 1 21 ip LOOP infinity loop 22 23 zxxxxx RAM block sssxxx 24 b55 25 org ux aad 26 comm RAM BLK1 4 2f 4 Save the source in a file by selecting Save from the File menu or clicking the Save button m Save button 10 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 3 SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT PROCEDURE 5 Click the Insert into project button on the Edit window ea Insert into project button The created source file is added in the project To add existing source files use Files into project in the Insert menu It can also be done by dragging source files from Windows Explorer to the project window
288. ructions in the preprocessed file Therefore you do not have to describe these pseudo instructions in creating source files 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 81 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 7 13 Comment Adding Function The preprocessing pseudo instructions that begin with are all expanded to codes that can be as sembled and delivered in the preprocessed file Even after that those instructions are rewritten with comments beginning with a semicolon so that the original instructions can be identified However note that the replacements of Define names will not subsist as comments The comment is added to the first line following the expansion In case the original statement is accompa nied by a comment that comment is also added A macro definition should have a semicolon placed at top of the line Example Before expansion macro LDM REG ADDR LD X ADDR Di REG MX endm LDM A 1 load memory to A reg After expansion no debugging information macro LDM REG ADDR LD X ADDR LD REG MX endm LD X d LDM A 1 load memory to A reg LD A MX 5 7 14 Priority of Pseudo Instructions Some remarks concerning the priority among the preprocessing pseudo instructions will be given below 1 The conditional assembly instructions ifdef ifndef have the first priority Nesting cannot be made of those instructions 2 Define instruction define include instruc
289. ry to be traced 202 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER laC trace area clear i Function This command clears program address ranges from the trace area Li Format gt tac lt staddr1 gt lt endaddr1 gt lt staddr4 gt lt endaddr4 gt direct input mode staddrl 4 Start address of each specified address range hexadecimal or symbol IEEE 695 format only lt endaddr1 4 gt End address of each specified address range hexadecimal or symbol IEEE 695 format only Condition 0 staddr 1 4 endaddr 1 4 lt last program memory address i Example gt tad Trace area 0000 0fff Current trace area l set 2 Clear 3 clear all eres wd gt tac 400 6004 Clears a trace area from 0x400 to 0x600 gt tad Trace area 0000 03TE 0DGO OL OTTf l set 2 Clear 3 clear all thee x gt Notes e The addresses must be specified within the range of the program memory area available for each microcomputer model An error results if the input one is not a hexadecimal number or a valid symbol Error invalid value An error results if the limit is exceeded Error Program address out of range e An error results if the start address is larger than the end address Error end address start address e If you input the tac command without any parameter the entire trace area is clear by default You can use this command for mu
290. s See the dia gram above 2 Source mode z selected by the Source button or entering the sc command In this mode the window displays the source line numbers and source state Source button ments 3 Unassemble mode E selected by the Unassemble button or entering the u command i In this mode the window displays the addresses codes and unassembled Unassemble button contents This format is selected when the debugger starts up All program code in the 8K address space can be referenced by scrolling the window When a break occurs the display content is updated so that the address line to be executed next is displayed with the entire line highlighted for identification Use the scroll bar or arrow keys to scroll the window Or enter a command to display the program code beginning with a specified position Display of source line numbers and source statements The source line numbers and source statements can only be displayed when the IEEE 695 absolute object file including debugging information for the source display is loaded Furthermore the source statements that are actually displayed from this file are those which have had the g option specified by the assembler Updating of display When a program is loaded and executed g gr s n or rst command or the memory contents are changed as pe pf or pm command the display contents are updated In this case the Source window updates its display contents
291. s nnnnO Octal numbers nnnnQ Octal numbers nnnnH Hexadecimal numbers nnnnP binary numbers and nnnnH hexadecimal numbers are converted into the new format Obnnnn and Oxnnnn in the preprocessing stage nnnnO and nnnnQ octal numbers are converted into hexadecimal numbers Oxnnnn in the preprocessing stage 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 57 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 5 8 Symbols The set and define pseudo instructions allow definition of values as symbols Examples Set ADDR1 OxOfO0 ADDRI is a symbol that represents absolute address OxOf0 define CONST Oxf CONST is a symbol that represents data OxOf ld a CONST Will be expanded into Id a Oxf The defined symbols can be used for specifying the immediate data of instructions They are expanded into the defined value in the preprocess stage and the symbol information does not output to the object file Therefore these symbols cannot be allowed as labels used for symbolic debugging Restrictions e The maximum number of characters of a symbol is limited to 259 the same as that of one line e The characters that can be used are limited to the following A Z a z _ 0 9 Note that a symbol cannot begin with a numeral Uppercase and lowercase characters are discrimi nated 5 5 9 Operators An expression that consists of operators numbers and or defined symbols including labels can be used for specifying a number or
292. s in the file specified by that com command will not be executed but the subsequent execution of the commands in upper level files will be executed continuously Error over max nesting level 5 can t open file e If you specify an interval more than 30 seconds it is set to 30 by default e Use the hot key CTRL ESC to stop executing a command file GUI utility Run Command File menu item When this menu item is selected a dialog box appears allowing selection of a command file Com Enter an interval and a file name then click OK The file name can be selected using a standard file Seventeen Tins Do selection dialog box that appears by clicking Browse Command File Fath C NEDCE2 test test cm OF Cancel 212 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER rec record commands to a file Function This command records all debug commands following this command to a specified command file i Format 1 gt rec file name gt direct input mode 2 gt rec guidance mode See Examples for guidance file name Command file name path can also be specified i Examples 1 First rec execution after debugger starts up gt reca File name sample cmd 1 append 2 clear and open rud wad Displayed if the file is already exists gt 2 rec command input in the second and following sessions gt reca Set to record off mode
293. s mentioned herein are trademarks and or registered trademarks of their respective owners SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION 2002 All rights reserved Configuration of product number Devices S1 C 60N01 F 0A01 00 Packing specifications 00 Besides tape amp reel OA TCP BL 2 directions OB Tape amp reel BACK OC TCP BR 2 directions OD TCP BT 2 directions E TOP BD 2 directions OF Tape amp reel FRONT 0G TCP BT 4 directions OH TCP BD 4 directions OJ TCP SL 2 directions OK TCP SR 2 directions OL Tape amp reel LEFT OM TCP ST 2 directions ON TCP SD 2 directions OP TCP SI 4 directions OQ TCPSD 4directions OR Tape amp reel RIGHT 99 Specs not fixed Specification Package D die form F QFP Model number Model name C microcomputer digital products Product classification S1 semiconductor Development tools S5U1 C 60R08 _ D1 1 00 E Packing specifications 00 standard packing Version 1 Version 1 Tool type Hx ICE Ex EVA board Px Peripheral board Wx Flash ROM writer for the microcomputer Xx ROM writer peripheral board Cx C compiler package Ax Assembler package Dx Utility tool by the model Qx Soft simulator Corresponding model number 60R08 for S1C60R08 Tool classification C microcomputer use Product classification 95U1 development tool for semiconductor products INTRODUCTION Introduction This document describes the development pro
294. se in comments Also the usable symbols have certain limitations details below The reserved words such as mnemonics and pseudo instructions are all not case sensitive while items definable by the user such as labels and symbols are all case sensitive Therefore mnemonics and pseudo instructions can be written in uppercase A Z characters lowercase a z characters or both For example ld LD and Ld are all accepted as ld instructions For purposes of discrimination from symbols this manual uses lowercase characters for the reserved words 52 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 5 2 Instructions Mnemonics and Pseudo instructions The assembler supports all the mnemonics of the 1C6200 instruction set and the assembler pseudo instructions The following shows how to describe the instructions Mnemonics An instruction is generally composed of mnemonic operand Some instructions do not contain an operand General notation forms of instructions General forms lt Mnemonic gt lt Mnemonic gt tab or space lt Operand gt lt Mnemonic gt tab or space lt Operand1 gt lt Operand2 gt Examples nop5 Jp SUB ld a 0x4 There is no restriction as to where the description of a mnemonic should begin in a line A tab or space preceding a mnemonic is ignored An instruction containing an operand needs to be separated into the mnemonic and the operand with one
295. sembler for details of the assembler options 4 9 2 Linker Options Settings Assembler Linker Debugger Hes Converter CODE O Default L main subs Disable all branch optimizations Output absolute list file Disable insertion of branch extensio 7 Output Map file Qutput Error log file Output Symbol file C Disable Remowal of branch Output cross reference file optimization M Add source debug information cancel m In this dialog section allocation symbol definition and other linker options can be specified The work bench generates a linker command file including these specifications and specifies it when invoking the linker Specifying section allocation This option is set by default as all the sections will be allocated from the memory start address To specify a section start address double click the cell and then enter the address Source BSS CODE ma Default lt Double click here to change default CODE section start address then type an address Source BSS CODE Default ox100 B E 42 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 4 WORK BENCH The edit box shows the default setting Default and the list of source files in the project The default setting applies to all the sections excluding those of the source specified To set a specific source independently select the check box at the front of the source file name Check here gt
296. so that the current PC address can always be displayed The display contents are also updated when the display mode is changed 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 127 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 2 Current PC The address line indicated by the current PC program counter is highlighted Address 0x0100 in the diagram 3 PC breakpoint The address line where a breakpoint is set is indicated by a red mark at the beginning of the line Address 0x0106 in the diagram 4 Break setting at the cursor position Place the cursor at an address line where a breakpoint is to be set not available for a source only line Jm Then click on the Break button A PC breakpoint will be set at that address If cu the same is done at the address line where a PC breakpoint has been set the Break button breakpoint will be cleared If the Go to Cursor button is clicked the program will execute beginning with the current PC position and program execution breaks at the line where Go to Cursor button the cursor is located 5 Finding labels and words Any labels and words can be found using the Search Label pull down list box or the Find button on the Source window Search Label BOOT INC_RAM_BLE T Search Label pull down list box IMIT HAM BLKT LOOF E Find button 128 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 9 4 4 Data Window 1 Display
297. t i Function This command lists the current setting of all break conditions Li Format gt bl direct input mode Example gt b1la Data Break Condition ADDR 100 DATA IWI B Register Break Condition A A B X 060 Y IDZC 1 0 B PC Break List 0 0100 1 0200 0300 gt GUI utility None CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE EPSON 187 CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER Dac break all clear Function This command clears all break conditions set by the bp bd br and or bm commands i Format gt bac direct input mode Gui utility Break Break All Clear menu item When this menu item is selected the bac command is executed 188 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER be break enable LH Function This command sets the break enable mode A break is generated when the PC break data break register break or multi break condition is met with the Evaluation Board CPU state Hd Format gt be direct input mode i Example be l Set to break enable mode Gui utility Option Mode Setting menu item When this menu item is selected a dialog box appears for setting break enable mode Mode Setting Select the Break Enable button Break Made Time or Step Made Break Enable Real Time Measurement Break Disable C Step Measurement Cancel 5U1C620
298. t If no file name was specified or an option was not specified correctly the hex converter ends after delivering the following message concerning the usage Usage hx62 options file names Options b Do not fill room with Oxff e Output error log file HX62 ERR f Use Motorola S format O file name Output file name L H HEX L HSA or no extension File name Absolute object file ABS ICE parameter file PAR When error warning occurs If an error occurs an error message will appear before the end message shows up Example Error No ICE parameter file specified Hex conversion 1 error s O0 warning s In the case of an error the hex converter ends without creating an output file If a warning is issued a warning message will appear before the end message shows up Example Warning Output file name conflict Hex conversion O0 error s 1 warning s In the case of a warning the hex converter ends after creating the output files but the result cannot be guaranteed For details on errors and warnings refer to Section 7 6 Error Warning Messages 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 107 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 7 HEX CONVERTER 7 5 Output Hex Files 7 5 1 Hex File Configuration Since each 1C6200 instruction has a 12 bit code the hex converter always generates two hex files for the high order data and the low order data The low order data hex file l hex or 1sa contains the low o
299. t lt Statement string 1 gt else Statement string 2 gt endif If the name is defined lt Statement string 1 gt will be subjected to the assembling If the name is not defined and else Statement string 2 is described then Statement string 2 gt will be subjected to the assembling else Statement string 2 can be omitted Format 2 ifndef lt Name gt lt Statement string 1 gt Zelse Statement string 2 gt endif If the name is not defined lt Statement string 1 gt will be subjected to the assembling If the name is defined and else lt Statement string 2 gt is described lt Statement string 2 gt will be subjected to the assembling else lt Statement string 2 gt can be omitted lt Name gt Conforms to the restrictions on Define name See define lt Statement string gt All statements excluding conditional assembly instructions can be described Sample description ifdef TYPEI ld Xr UL else ld x 0x13 endif ifndef SMALL define SP1 0x31 tendif Name definition Name definition needs to have been completed by either of the following methods prior to the execution of a conditional assembly instruction 1 Definition using the start up option d of the assembler Example as62 d TYPE1 sample s 2 Definition in the source file using the define instruction Example define TYPE1 The define statement is valid even in a file to be included provided
300. t Code Next code and corresponding mnemonic 2 When Register window is opened When the Register window is opened all the above contents are displayed in the Register window according to the program execution When you use the rd command the displayed contents of the Register window is updated 3 When Register window is closed Data is displayed in the Command window in the following manner gt rd PC 0206 A 0 Bit SP Jd X 003 X DE IDACTOOLO Current Code e00 LD A 0x0 Next Code e80 LD XP A gt 4 During log output If a command execution result is being output to a log file by the log command the register values are displayed in the Command window even if the Register window is opened and are also output to the log file Gui utility View Register menu item When this menu item is selected the Register window opens or becomes active and displays the current register contents 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 167 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER S register set Function This command modifies the register values Format 1 gt rs lt register gt lt value gt lt register gt lt value gt lt register gt lt value gt direct input mode 2 gt rs PC Old value A Old value B Old value X Old value Y Old value FI Old value FD Old value FZ Old value FC Old value SP Old value gt guidance mode value lt
301. t address3 gt Address of destination area to be copied to hexadecimal or symbol IEEE 695 format only Condition 0 address lt address2 lt last program memory address 0 address3 lt last program memory address Li Examples Format 1 gt pm 200 2FF 2804 Copies the codes within the range from address 0x200 to address Ox2ff to the area from address 0x280 Format 2 gt pmd Start address 2004 Source area start address is input End address 2ff l Source area end address is input Destination address 2804 Destination area start address is input gt Command execution can be canceled by entering only the Enter key and nothing else i Notes e The addresses you specified must be within the range of the program memory area available with each microcomputer model An error results if the input one is not a hexadecimal number or not a valid symbol Error s invalid value An error results if the limit is exceeded Error Program address out of range If any portion of the destination area to be copied to is outside the program memory no code is copied to that area and results in an error and no copy operation is done Error no mapping area e Anerror results if the start address is larger than the end address Error 1 end address lt Start address e When the contents of the program memory is modified using the pm command the contents of the Source window are updated automatically
302. te Error file map file file object file reference file list file lt b to Debugger Fig 6 2 1 Flow chart 6 2 1 Input Files Relocatable object file File format Binary file in IEEE 695 format File name File name o A path can also be specified Description Object file of individual modules created by the assembler Linker command file File format Text file File name File name cm A path can also be specified Description File to specify the linker options This makes it possible to reduce typing in a command line This file is dispensable if all start up options can be input in a command line ICE parameter file This file must always be specified File format Text file File name File name par A path can also be specified Description File to specify the memory mapping and unsupported instruction information of each 51C62 Family model This file is supplied in the development tools for each model and commonly used with the debugger HEX converter and disassembler 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 89 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 6 LINKER 6 2 2 Output Files An output file name can be specified in the command line or command file using the o option If no output file name is specified the same name as that of the relocatable object file to be linked first is used Absolute object file File format File name Output destination Description Link map file File format
303. te object file name ICE parameter file name gt denotes a space indicates the possibility to omit The order of options and file names can be arbitrary File names Absolute object file File name gt abs ICE parameter file File name par The extension of an absolute object file can be omitted The ICE parameter file must be specified with its extension A long file name supported in Windows and a path name can be specified When including spaces in the file name enclose the file name with double quotation marks Options The hex converter comes provided with the following four types of start up options b Function Explanation Default Function Explanation Default Function Explanation Default 0 file name gt Conversion of existing codes only Converts and delivers only the object codes that exist in the specified absolute object file Data for unused addresses is not delivered If this option is not specified the hex data for the entire available memory range of the model is delivered to the output file Unused addresses are filled with Oxff Output of error files Also delivers in a file the contents to be output by the hex converter through the Standard Output stdout such as error messages If this option is not specified no error file will be output Conversion into Motorola S format Generates the hex files hsa and Isa in Motorola S format If this
304. te that undo function cannot be performed for this operation except for the last replaced word Cancel button Clicking this button closes the dialog box Go to You can go to any source line or any label position quickly To do this select Go To from the Edit menu The Go To dialog box appears GoTo Go to what Enter Line Number Label Chose Going to a source line 1 Select Line in the Go to what list box 2 Typealine number in the Enter Line Number box and then click the Go To button Going to a label position 1 Select Label in the Go to what list box The Enter Line Number box changes to the Select Label list box GoTo Go to what Select Label Linie T BOOT Ses LOOP 2 Select a label from the Select Label box and then click the Go To button The Select Label list box has a pull down menu that contains the list of labels defined in the current source file The Edit windows for source files s ms dat have the Go To Label list box similar to the Select Label list box in the Go To dialog box You can also go to a label position using this box Goto Label BOOT LOOP Inserting a file To insert a file such as a header file and another source at the cursor position of the current source select File from the Insert menu A dialog box will appears allowing selection of the file to be inserted 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 35 S1C60 62 F
305. ted as they exist in the work space folder Assemble Open Settings Propaties Shortcut menu in the Project window 4 6 4 Opening and Closing a Project To open a project select Open WorkSpace from the File menu A dialog box appears allowing selection of a project file Open Look in C3 test Files of type cac Project Files epy Cancel The work bench allows only one project to be opened at a time So if a project has been opened it will be closed when another project is opened At this time a dialog box appears to select whether the current project file is to be saved or not if it has not already been saved after a modification The project file can also be opened by selecting Open from the File menu or clicking the Open button In this case choose the file type as S1C Project Files epj in the file open dialog box To close the currently opened project file select Close WorkSpace from the File menu At this time a dialog box appears to select whether the current project file is to be saved or not if it has not already been saved after a modification If Yes save is selected in this dialog box all the modification items includ ing sources tool settings and window configuration will be saved 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 29 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 4 WORK BENCH 4 6 5 Files in the Work Space Folder The work bench generates the following files
306. ted in lowercase characters in this manual except for user specified sym bols 4 Notation of numeric values Numeric values are described as follows Decimal numbers Not accompanied by any prefix or suffix e g 123 1000 Hexadecimal numbers Accompanied by the prefix Ox e g 0x0110 Oxffff Binary numbers Accompanied by the prefix Ob e g 0b0001 0b10 However please note that some sample displays may indicate hexadecimal or binary numbers not accompanied by any symbol Moreover a hexadecimal number may be expressed as xxxxh or a binary number as xxxxb for reasons of convenience of explanation 5 Mouse operations To click The operation of pressing the left mouse button once with the cursor pointer placed in the intended location is expressed as to click The clicking operation of the right mouse button is expressed as to right click To double click Operations of pressing the left mouse button twice in a row with the cursor pointer placed in the intended location are all expressed as to double click To drag The operation of clicking on a file icon with the left mouse button and holding it down while moving the icon to another location on the screen is expressed as to drag To select The operation of selecting a menu command by clicking is expressed as to select 6 Key operations The operation of pressing a specific key is expressed as to enter a key or to press a key A combination
307. that it goes before the conditional assembly instruction that uses its Define name A name defined after a conditional assembly instruction will be regarded as undefined When a name is going to be used only in conditional assembly no substitute character string needs to be specified 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 69 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER Expansion rule A statement string subjected to the assembling is expanded according to the expansion rule of the other preprocessing pseudo instructions If no preprocessing pseudo instruction is contained the statement will be output in a file as is Precaution A name specified in the condition is evaluated with discrimination between uppercase and lowercase The condition is deemed to be satisfied only when there is the same Define name defined 70 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 7 5 Section Defining Pseudo Instructions code bss The section defining pseudo instructions define one related group of codes or data and make it possible to reallocate by the groups at the later linking stage Even if these section defining pseudo instructions are not used the section kind will be automatically judged by its contents and causes no error If the new codes or data without section definition are different from the previous code or data kind they will be taken as another new section code pseudo instruction
308. the result of specifying absolute locations with the org pseudo instruction an error will result Examples DES org Ux00 comm RAMO 4 RAM secured area 0x00 0x03 org 0x01 comm RAM1 4 Error because the area of 0x01 0x03 is overlapped e When the org pseudo instruction appears in a section a new absolute section starts at that point The section type does not change The org pseudo instruction keeps its effect only in that section until the next section definer code or bss or the next location definer org align page or bank appears Example code The latest relocatable section definition org 0x100 Starts new absolute CODE section from address 0x100 DoS This section is relocatable not affected by the org pseudo instruction code This section is also relocatable not affected by the org pseudo instruction 72 EPSON 5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER e If the org pseudo instruction is defined immediately after a section definer code or bss the section definer does not start a new section But org starts a new section with the attribute of the section definer Example code This does not start a new CODE section org 0x100 This starts an absolute CODE section e If the org pseudo instruction is defined immediately before a section definer code or bss it does not start a new section and makes no effect to the fo
309. tion Description Error file File format File name Output destination Description Binary file in relocatable IEEE 695 format file name o The file name is the same as that of the input file unless otherwise specified with o option Current directory File in which machine language codes are stored in a relocatable form available for the linker to link with other modules and to generate an executable absolute object Text file file name Ist The file name gt is the same as that of the input file unless other wise specified with o option Current directory File in which offset locations machine language codes and source codes are stored in plain text Text file file name ms The file name is the same as that of the input file unless other wise specified with o option Current directory File in which instructions for preprocessing e g conditional assembly and macro instructions are expanded into an assembling format Also the source codes de scribed in the old syntax are converted into the new syntax When developing a program using old style sources this temporary file can be used as a base file to start creating sources in the new syntax Text file file name err The file name is the same as that of the input file unless other wise specified with o option Current directory File delivered when the start up option e is specified It records error messages and oth
310. tion include or macro instruction macro can be described within a conditional assembly instruction 3 Define instruction define include instruction include and macro instruction macro cannot be described within a macro definition 4 Define name definitions are expanded with priority over macro definitions 82 EPSON 5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 8 Summary of Compatibility with the Older Tool The assembler provides the new features added to the old assembler asm62XX However the compatibil ity with the old syntax is preserved by supporting old syntax as the synonym of the new syntax As the result as62 can process the old syntax sources without any modification To realize it the assembler accepts old syntax elements and interprets them to their equivalent counterparts in new syntax elements The converted results are delivers to the preprocessed file ms The priority of the operators follows the old tool s priory The old syntax elements are handled as follows Numeric notation Old Meaning New THHHIB Binary number Ob THHHIO Octal number gt Ox the base is converted HHHHQ Octal number gt Ox the base is converted HHHHH Hexadecimal number gt Ox Arithmetic operators Old Meaning New Addition positive Subtraction negative gt Multiplication gt ii Division MOD Residue gt SH
311. tion Source name Debugging information line number The assembler supports the old type pseudo instructions shown above They are converted into the new format in the preprocessing stage The LOCAL pseudo instruction is removed in the preprocessing stage The END pseudo instruction functions the same as the older tool Old instruction EQU MACRO ENDM ORG PAGE BANK SECTION DW 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE 63 CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER 5 7 1 Include Instruction include The include instruction inserts the contents of a file in any location of a source file It is useful when the same source is shared in common among several source files Instruction format include File name gt e A drive name or path name can as well be specified as the file name e One or more spaces are necessary between the instruction and the lt File name gt e Character case is ignored for both include itself and File name gt Sample descriptions include sample def include c E0C62 header common h Expansion rule The specified file is inserted in the location where include was described Precautions e Only files created in text file format can be inserted e The include instruction can be used in the including files However nesting is limited up to 10 levels If this limit is surpassed an error will result 64 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAG
312. ts need to keep compatibility with the older tool asm62XX that does not remove the PSET instructions Disable PSET insertion function Disables PSET insertion only among full PSET optimization insertion deletion correction If this option is not specified the automatic insertion will be enabled when the automatic page correction function is specified 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 91 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 6 LINKER e Function Explanation Default Function Explanation Default Function Explanation Default 0 file name gt Function Explanation Default Function Explanation Default Function Explanation Default Function Explanation Default code address Function Explanation Default Sample description Output of error file Also delivers in a file err the contents to be output by the linker through the Standard Output stdout such as error messages If this option is not specified no error file will be output Addition of debugging information Creates an absolute object file containing debugging information e Always specify this function when you perform source display or use the symbolic debugging facility of the debugger If this option is not specified no debugging information will be added to the absolute object file Output of absolute list file Outputs an absolute list file If this option is not specified n
313. tton This will invoke the assembler and linker to create an executable object file If a HEX file format Intel HEX or Motorola S is selected by the Output format box the HEX converter will be invoked after linking By default an absolute object file in IEEE 695 format will be created Absolute Object m Absolute Object Intel Hex Output format box Motorola 5 Messages delivered from each executed tool are displayed in the Output window The work bench has a tag jump function that jumps to the source line in which an error has occurred by double clicking a source syntax error message that appears in the Output window It opens the corresponding source window if it is closed v WorkBench52 Version X Xx main s File Edi View Insert Build Tools Window Help pelala Hae A al j 1 ICS621CP PAR Absolute Object dk s 838 alasin zi test files Rp subs main s test program main routine xxx INITIAL SP ADDRESS DEFINITION sx ftdefine SP_INIT_ADDR 6x86 SP init addr 8x88 ssexex BOOT LOOP xxx qlobal INIT_RAM_BLK1 subroutine global INC_RAM_BLK1 subroutine 0x108 a SP_INIT_ADDR gt gt 4 sph a a SP_INIT_ADDR amp OxF spl a Copyright C SEIKO EPSON CORP 1998 Linked with the corresponding source line C XEBC62XTESTXHAIN S 15 Error Unknown mnemonic ls C EGC62 TEST MAIN S 14 Error Unknown label a Created preprocessed source file MAIN MS Assembly 2 error s 8 varn
314. tton Unassemble u View Program Unassemble a Source SC View Program Source Display Mix m View Program Mix Mode E 1 Unassemble mode Search Label A ADDR CODE UNASSEMBLE 466 CALL 8x8 E42 PSET 8x2 466 CALL 6x6 In this mode the debugger displays the program codes after unassembling into mnemonics 2 Source mode Source Display Iofs Search Label M Al 11 12 rg 821668 13 BOOT 14 ld a oP INIT ADDR gt 24 d Set mde 15 ld sph a 16 ld a SP IHIT AiDDR amp xF 17 ld spl a 18 call INIT RAM BLK1 initialize RAM block 1 19 LOOP 20 call INC RAH BLHET1 increment RAH block 1 21 jp LOOP infinity loop 22 eo ixsxx RAM black xx 24 b55 25 rg Hz 868 26 ComM RAM_BLK1 4 In this mode the source that contains the code at the current PC address is displayed like an editor screen This mode is available only when an absolute object file that contains source debugging information has been loaded 142 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 3 Mix mode LLL PIE E3 Search Label E T P g xxxx BOOT LOOP sxxsx 9 global IHIT RAH BLET1 subroutine 1H global INC RAM BLET1 subroutine 11 12 org 82788 13 BOOT 14 166 e B8 ld a 6x8 ld a 5P INIT ADDR gt gt 4 set SP 15 6101 Fea ld sph a ld sph a 16 8162 eB ld a 6x8 ld a SP IHIT ARDDR amp xF 17 6189 Fra ld spl a ld spl a 18 0104 ek pset 8x2 19
315. ulation ecce ee en nnnnnnn nnne nnenns 22 4 4 5 Insert into project Button on a Edit Window cesses 22 C42 05 23 BD IT e 2 MTER 23 ZR Hd M T MR 24 DAS BETA IET me 24 LAXE NIMM NN 25 ASD Build Men Me 25 4 3 0 Tools Metil NERMRRRTRRR t 29 A E NENNT 26 LISAC MOIE soie ra ear n N E 26 d FPO HO TOR ACC oE E Coop NEM Madsen 27 dO d Creedin GIN GW PTO OCI vsescaukae issues eade ehbiteintk viera EEAS Eee bv p 27 4 0 2 Inseriting Sources ito a PrOjeCi asasseecsenc sivaterieataisnsvedstactascniendeieeteriestetsos 28 OLS rroje 1027710 RR RR 29 4 6 4 Opening Gnd Closing a Project vssnscvcnedasvusnescecvnsawssenaincsnebicesssashiabeceacdemennns 29 4 6 5 Files in the Work Space Folder diciinntsncsarseiwesiasicasenawitestiestinedeswntes ia baniiminwoxvierse 30 S5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON iii S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CONTENTS dur OUTS GON xsstetesitei diea minit Usi erst ete hui u hei 31 4 7 1 Creating a New Source or Header File cccccssessssscceesceccceccccsaneansssesesseess 31 4 7 2 Loading ad SAVING Files arcu ien UR PEE Re REEEN UVe Ux HE EA EN RE VeR YR OL ER 32 DU A Ldi ATU LOWE sean NETT 33 4 7 4 Tag Jump Function ccce rt FIN IRRARQUREETREURE FU ARMEN FRPFEHRTE HEAR EIE PEE PUER 36 ATO 1 NER 37 LU ES NI aE E EEE 37 4 6 1 Preparing a Build TASK sisisessiricisissediscsrisinserri
316. up Disassembler 62 Ver x xx Copyright C SEIKO EPSON CORP 199x End message The hex converter outputs the following messages to indicate which files have been created when it ends normally Created preprocessed source file FILE NAME gt MS Created error log file DS62 ERR Disassembly 0 error s 0 warning s Usage output If no file name was specified or an option was not specified correctly the hex converter ends after delivering the following message concerning the usage Usage ds62 options file names ODLIOmnS al Use lower case characters cu Use upper case characters e Output error log file DS62 ERR o file name Output file name MS or no extension s address Offset address default 0x0 File names Absolute object file ABS or L H HEX ICE parameter file PAR When error warning occurs If an error occurs an error message will appear before the end message shows up Example Error Cannot open file TEST ABS Disassembly 1 error s 0 warning s In the case of an error the disassembler ends without creating an output file If a warning is issued a warning message will appear before the end message shows up Example Warning Output file name conflict Disassembly 0 error s 1 warning s In the case of a warning the disassembler ends after creating an output file For details on errors and warnings refer to Section 8 6 Error Warning Messages 114 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1
317. up specify a command file that describes those commands comX Function Specifies a communication port Explanation This option specifies the communication port through which a personal com puter is communicated with by the ICE Specify a port number in the X part of this option The port that can be used for this purpose varies among different personal computers Unless this option is specified the com1 port is used to communicate with the ICE b lt baud rate gt Function Specifies a communication transmission rate Explanation This option specifies the baud rate on the personal computer For lt baud rate gt select one from 1200 4800 9600 or 19200 Unless specified otherwise the baud rate is set to 19200 bps This value is the same as the initial setting of the ICE The baud rate on the ICE is set using the DIP switch mounted on the ICE When entering an option in a command line make sure that there is at least one space before and after the option Example c e0c62 bin db62 ics62xxp par startup cmd com2 b 19200 The default start up options are set as com1 amp b 19200 If no parameter file name was specified or the option was not specified correctly the debugger ends after delivering the following message concerning the usage UsSage db62 parameter file name startup option Options command file Specifies a command file Comx Xt 1 4 Com port default coml D baud rate 1200 4800 9600 19
318. urce codes in this window The New dialog box allows selection of the EOC Header File Select it when creating a header file for constant definitions 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 31 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 4 WORK BENCH 4 7 2 Loading and Saving Files To load a source file 1 Select Open from the File menu or click the Open button rj Open button The Open dialog box appears pen Look in CX test main x sub s Files of type Assembly Source Files 37 ms dat Cancel Open as read only Into project 2 Choose a source file to be opened after selecting the file type s ms dat and click OK An Edit window opens and shows the contents of the source file V WorkBench62 Version x xx main s Ex File Edit View Insert Build Tools Window Help ES laj x osag e aelel Sle ies Merer A fee E alee El test files Goto Label 1 main s 2 test program main routine 3 4 5 gsxxxx INITIAL SP ADDRESS DEFINITION sess define SP_INIT_ADDR 8x88 SP init addr 8x88 7 8 z BOOT LOOP xxxxx 9 global INIT_RAM_BLK1 subroutine 16 global INC_RAM_BLK1 subroutine 11 12 org 6x166 13 BOOT 14 ld a SP_INIT_ADDR gt gt 4 set SP 15 ld sph a 16 ld a SP_INIT_ADDR amp OxF 17 ld spl a 18 call INIT RAH BLK1 initialize RAH block 1 19 LOOP 28 call INC RAH BLK1 increment RAM block 1 21
319. value gt value lt value gt lt value gt value value value value value lt register gt Register name A B X Y SP PC F lt value gt Value to be set to the register binary for F hexadecimal for others Examples Format 1 gt rs PC 0110 F 00004 Sets PC to 0x0110 and resets all the flags Format 2 2rs PC 206 100 4 A 0 0H B f 0 X E 000 4 Y Ef 1004 FI 0 il FD 0 14 FZ 1 0 1 FC 0 ya SP 7q 7 E gt After you execute the command the Register window is updated to show the contents you have input If you input q4 to stop entering in the middle the contents input up to that time are updated i Notes e An error results if you input a value exceeding the register s bit width Error i invalid value e An error results if you input a register name other than PC A B X Y F or SP in direct input mode Error register name PC A B X Y F SP e In guidance mode the following keyboard inputs have special meaning qe Command is terminated finish inputting and start execution Werle Return to previous register A Input is skipped keep current value Gui utility Register window The Register window allows direct modification of data Click the Register window select the displayed data to be modified and enter a value then press Enter 168 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLE
320. varning s or dragging the title bar oo towards an edge of the work peers us SEIKO EPSON CORP 199x Created absolute object den LUEST mu bench window ELCA RA BA ARA MCA AUE For Help press F1 Ini Co 1 NUM 16 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 4 WORK BENCH Closing the Project and Output window The Project window and the Output window can be closed by selecting Project Window and Output Window from the View menu respectively To open them select the menu items again Maximizing the Edit window area Goto Labet The Edit window area can be 1 main s P S ea ar nat RENTES maximized to the full screen size by d selecting Full Screen from the 5 s sxxxxx INITIAL SP ADDRESS DEFINITION 3x define SP_INIT_ADDR 0x80 SP init addr 6x86 View menu All other windows 7 B anas BOOT LOOP aasa and toolbars are hidden behind the 9 global INIT RARHM BLK1 subroutine A A 18 global INC RAM BLK1 subroutine Edit window area 11 e A en To return it to the normal display K x So cte set SP click the button that appears on the Ps i eee ee screen This button can be moved 18 call INIT RAH BLK1 initialize RAHM block 1 1 ae lus aids anywhere in the screen by dragging 31 ale E Her rier am its title bar Pressing the ESC key 22 23 53 RAM block sesesesex also returns the window to the 24 bss 25 org 0x009 normal display
321. w vertically 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON 21 S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 4 WORK BENCH 4 4 4 Toolbar Manipulation Hiding and showing toolbars Each toolbar can be hidden if not needed Select the toolbar name from the View menu This opera tion toggles between hiding and showing the toolbar Changing the toolbar location Toolbars can be moved to another location in the toolbar area by dragging them If a toolbar is moved out of the toolbar area it will be changed to a window 4 4 5 Insert into project Button on a Edit Window Insert into project button When a source file s ms or dat is opened the Insert into project button appears on the Edit win dow It can be used to insert the source file into the current opened project For other file types the Edit window opens without the Insert into project button 22 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE 4 5 Menus File Edit View Inger Build 4 5 1 File Menu Mew Ctrl M Oper Lt Close pen Workspace Close Workspace Save trl 5 Save As S ave All Print Chrl P Print Preview Page Setup 1 sub 2 main 5 best apy Exil The file names listed in this menu are recently used source and project files Selecting one opens the file CHAPTER 4 WORK BENCH Toole Window Help New Ctr N Creates a new document A dialog box will appear allowing selection from among th
322. when it has a minus value Example ld da 241 NG It will be expanded as Id a Oxffff ld ddd4 2T1 50xt OK It will be expanded as Id a Oxf e Expressions are calculated with a sign like a signed short in C language Pay attention to the calculation results of the gt gt and operators using hexadecimal numbers Example define NUM1 Oxfffe 2 2 2 1 Oxffff The and operators can only be used within the range of 32767 to 32768 define NUM2 Oxfffe gt gt 1 2 gt gt 1 1 Oxffff Mask as Oxfffe gt gt 1 amp 0x7fff e Do not insert a space or a tab between an operator and a term 5 5 10 Location Counter Symbol The address of each instruction code is set in the 13 bit location counter when a statement is assembled It can be referred using a symbol as well as labels indicates the current location thus it can be used for relative branch operation The operators can be used with this symbol similar to labels Example jp Jumps to this address means endless loop jp 5 2 Jumps to two words after this address jp 10 Jumps to 10 words before this address jp 16 16 BLK gt 16 Operators and defined symbols can be used Precaution When the address referred to relatively with is in another section it should be noted if the in tended section resides at the addressed place because if the section is relocatable the absolute address is not fixed until the lin
323. wn below If there are two or more operators with the same priority in an expression the assembler calculates the expression from the left plus sign minus sign High priority AR AL S T x lt lt gt gt addition subtraction z ls lt lt gt gt amp amp amp 4 11 Low priority a Qe XJ OV 3 S cs pe v c Examples define BLK START 0x0 define BLK SIZE 16 define BLK END BLK STARTTBL SIZE l define INIT DATA Oxaa LOOP ld 4 BLK START h gt gt 460xFf ld xh a ld b BLK_START 150xf ld xl b ldpx mx INIT_DATA amp 0x80 0 2 INIT_DATA gt gt 4 amp 0xf ldpx mx INIT_DATA amp 0x80 0 2 INIT_DATA amp 0xf Cp a BLK_END gt gt 4 amp 0xf JP NZ LOOP Cp b BLK END amp Oxf JP NZ LOOP Compatibility with the older tools The assembler supports the old type operators for the asm62XX shown in Types of operators They have the same priority as the corresponding new type operators Consequently it is possible to use sources created for the older tools The old type operators are converted into the new format in the preprocessing stage 5U1C62000A MANUAL EPSON S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE 59 CHAPTER 5 ASSEMBLER Precautions e Minus numbers 1 to 32768 are handled as Oxffff to 0x8000 e The assembler handles expressions as 16 bit data Pay attention to the data size when using it as 4 bit immediate data especially
324. x converter uL ICE parameter file IEEE 695 absolute fileh hex absolute fileh hex i object file file hex e xh Disassembler ds6200 OS file ms file err Preprocessed source file Error file Fig 8 2 1 Flow chart Binary file in IEEE 695 format lt File name gt abs A path can also be specified Absolute object file created by the linker Text file in Intel HEX format File name gt h hex and File name gt hex HEX file created by the HEX converter Two hex files are needed one h hex contains the four high order bits of the object codes with 0b0000 extended and the other I hex contains the eight low order bits This file must always be specified Text file File name File name par A path can also be specified Description File to specify the memory mapping information of each 51C62 Family model This file is supplied in the development tools for each model and is commonly used with the linker debugger and HEX converter 8 2 2 Output Files Source file File format Text file File name File name ms Output destination Current directory Description Disassembled contents of the input file are delivered Error file File format Text file File name File name err Output destination Current directory Description File that is delivered when the start up option e is specified It records the infor mation that the disassembler outputs to
325. y area in which to watch accesses specification as to whether the break is to be caused by a read or write as well as specification of the content of the data read or written The read write condition can be masked so that a break will be generated for whichever operation read or write is attempted Similarly the data condition can also be masked in bit units A break occurs after completing the cycle in which an operation to satisfy the above speci fied condition is performed Table 9 6 5 2 Commands menu item to set data break Function Command Menu Set data break condition bd Break Data Break Clear data break condition bdc Break Data Break For example if the program is executed after setting the data break condition as Address 0x10 Data pattern mask and R W W the program breaks after writing any data to the data memory address 0x10 148 EPSON S5U1C62000A MANUAL S1C60 62 FAMILY ASSEMBLER PACKAGE CHAPTER 9 DEBUGGER 3 Register break This break function causes a break when the A B X Y and flag IDZC registers reach a specified value Each register can be masked so they are not included in break conditions The flag register can be masked in bit units A break occurs when the above registers are modified to satisfy all set condi tions Table 9 8 5 3 Commands menu item to set register break Function Command Menu Set register break conditions br Break Registe
326. y direct editing in the Register or Data window or set breakpoints in the Source window by double clicking the mouse the corresponding commands and the execution results are also displayed in the Command window and output to the specified file The displayed contents of the Data Trace or Register window produced by command execution are displayed in the Command window as well The on the fly information is also displayed However the updated contents of each window after some execution as well as the contents of each window scrolled by scroll bar or arrow keys are not displayed e At the first time you should specify the file name to which all following debug commands and execution results will be output e Once a log file is open log output is suspended and resumed toggled every time you input the log command This toggle operation remains effective until you terminate the debugger If you want to specify a new log file you can use format 1 to specify the file name then current log file is closed and following commands and results will be output to the newly specified file Gui utility Log x Current Log File Option Log d menu item C EOC62 test sample log When this menu item is selected a standard file selection dialog box Log State appears for specifying a log file amp LogOn f If the logging function has been activated a dialog box appears allowing C Log Of selection of either l

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

50 exercices pour penser positif  電話帳印刷と一般商業印刷を担う 総合印刷ソリューション会社    Pro.C Sシリーズスピードコントローラー取扱説明書  Untitled    Plancha de Calentamiento 45-CALENTAMIENTO001 Manual de    Manuale Antintrusione  Star Trac B3 User's Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file